Skip to main content

Full text of "Introduction to the science of dynamics"

See other formats


INTRODUCTION   TO   THE   SCIENCE 


OF 


DYNAMICS 


BY 


D.  H.  MARSHALL,  M.A,  F.R.S.E, 

FESSOR   OF  PHYSICS  IN   QUEEN'S  UNIVERSITY,  KINGSTON.  ONTARIO. 


KINGSTON,   ONT.: 

PUBLISHED  BY  R.UGLOW  &  CO. 

SUCCESSORS  TO  J.   HENDERSON   4    CO. 
1898. 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

Introduction 1 

Observation,  experiment,  space,  matter,  physics,  C.G.S  and 
F.P.S.  units. 

Chapter  I.     Extension.     Direction 5 

Units  of  measurement,  fundamental  and  dei'ived  ;  direction, 
angle,  radian ;  body,  particle,  molecule,  atom. 

Chapter  II.     Motion.     Velocity 12 

Rest;  relative,  absolute;  time,  equal  times;  speed,  tach, 
vel ;  angular  motion. 

Chapter  III.     Acceleration 19 

Chapter  IV.     Uniformly  Accelerated  Motion 25 

Chapter  V.     Inertia.     Mass 34 

Centrifugal  force  ;  density,  specific  mass,  specific  volume. 

Chapter  VI.     Momentum.      Force 43 

Gramtach,  poundvel  ;  impulse ;  dyne,  poundal ;  pressure, 
tension,  attraction,  repulsion,  friction  ;  dynamics,  statics, 
kinetics,  kinematics,  mechanics. 

Chapter  VII.     Weight.     Gravitation 52 

Vertical,  horizontal ;  absolute  and  gravitation  units  of  force. 

Chapter  VIII.     Archimedes'  Principle 62 

Specific  weights,  hydrometer,  specific  gravity  bottle. 

Chapter  IX.     Pascal's  Principle.     The  Barometer. .     70 

Solid,  fluid,  liquid,  gas,  vapour;  barad ;  Bramah  press;  hy- 
drostatic paradox  ;  Torricelli's  experiment;  suction-pump. 

Chapter  X.     Specific  Weights  of  Gases 81 

Chapter  XI.     Exact  Specific  Weights 90 

Baroscope  ;  dew-point,  hygrometer. 


IV. 

PAGE. 

Chapter  XII.     Work.     Energy 99 

Configuration  ;  molar  energy,  molecular  energy,  kinetic 
energy,  potential  energy ;  erg,  foot-poundal ;  dyntach,  horse- 
power ;  coefficient  of  friction ;  efficiency  of  a  machine. 

Chapter  XIII.     Action  and  Reaction 1.10 

Problem  of  Attwood's  machine  ;  coefficient  of  restitution. 

Chapter  XIV.     Dimensional  Equations 115 

Chafter  XV.     Composition  of  Velocities 124 

Relative  velocity  and  acceleration. 

Chapter  XVI.     Composition  of  Forces,  whose  lines 

of  action  meet  another ". 131 

Rigid  body,  stereod}'namics ;  resolution  of  velocities  and 
forces;  equilibrium. 

Chapter  XVII.     Motion  and  Equilibrium  on  an  In- 
clined Plane 140 

Angle  of  friction ;  lines  of  quickest  and  slowest  descent. 

Chapter  XVIII.     Composition  of  Forces  whose  lines 

of  action  are  parallel 148 

Centre  of  any  system  of  parallel  forces. 

Chapter  XIX.     Couples.     Moments 154 

Complete  triangle  of  forces  ;  rotation  about  a  fixed  axis. 

Chapter  XX.     Centres  of  Weight  and  Mass 161 

Stable,  unstable,  and  neutral  equilibrium ;  centroids. 

Chapter  XXI.     Simple  Machines 172 

Mechanical,  static,  and  kinetic  advantages  ;  lever  and  ful- 
crum, wheel  and  axle,  toothed  wheels,  pulley  and  rope, 
Chinese  wheel,  screw  and  nut,  endless  screw,  wedge. 

Miscellaneous  Examples 184 


PHYSICAL  LAWS. 


ARTICLE. 

Law  of  Impenetrability 2 

Newton's  First  Dynamical  Law 40 

Conservation  of  Mass 51 

Newton's  Second  Dynamical  Law 55 

Newton's  Third  Dynamical  Law 58 

Conservation  of  Momentum 59 

Hooke"s  Law 66 

Law  of  Universal  Gravitation 69 

Archimedes'  Principle 72 

Pascal's  Principle 80 

Boyle's  Law  of  Gaseous  Pressure 94 

Avogadro's  Law  of  Molecular  Volumes  of  Gases 97 

Charles'  Law  of  Gaseous  Expansion 101 

Dalton's  Law  of  Gaseous  Pressure 103 

Rankine's  enunciation  of  Boyle's  and  Dalton's  laws . .  103 

Transformation  of  Energy 119 

Conservation  of  Energy 120 

Dissipation  or  Degradation  of  Energy 121 

Law  of  Friction 122 

D'Alembert's  Principle 126 

Principle  of  Work 189 


TABLES  OF  MEASUREMENTS. 


PAGE. 

English  and  French  units  of  measurement 3 

Approximate  values  of  n 4 

Values  of  g  at  different  latitudes 56 

Value  of  G 58 

Specific  volumes  of  gases 83 

Specific  masses  and  specific  weights  of  gases  relatively 

to  dry  air  and  hydrogen 84 

Densities  and  specific  weights  of  solids,  liquids,  and 

gases 85 

Regnault's   maximum    pressures  of  aqueous  vapour, 

for  dew-points  from  0    to  29 : 93 

Coefficients  of  friction 105 

Coefficients  of  restitution 112 

Length,  Area,  Volume,  Angle,  Mass,  Density,  Time. .  120 

Speed,  Momentum,  Force,  Pressure-intensity 121 

Work  and  Energy,  Activity 122 


Useful  and   Important  Numbers. 

jr=3'14159265,  log  -=0'4971499,  1  radian  =  180o/tt  =  57"3°. 
Mean  value  of  f/  =  9805  tachs  per  sec,  or  321  ve\s  per  sec 

Zero  of  the  centigrade  scale  =  273°  air  thermometer  scale, 
and  0°A  =  -  273°C. 

Mean  sea-level  atmospheric  pressure  =  76  cm.  of  mercury 
at  0°  in  the  latitude  of  Paris  =  147  lbs.-wt.  per  sq.  in. 
=  10^  tonnes- wt.  per  sq.  metre  =  1014  megabarad. 

Earth's  mean  radius  =  6470-9  kilometres  =  3958"7  miles. 

Earth's  mean  density  =  5-67,  and  mass  =  614 XlO21  tonnes. 


PREFACE. 


The  present  text-book  embraces  Part  I  and  the  half  of 
Part  II  of  the  author's  Introduction  to  the  Science  of 
Dynamics,  first  printed  in  1886,  and  contains  as  much  of 
that  work,  as  experience  has  shewn  he  is  able  to  give  to  the 
two  divisions  of  his  pass  class  at  the  University,  at  the 
present  stage  of  university  education  in  Ontario.  The 
present  edition  will,  I  trust,  be  found  to  be  a  great  im- 
provement on  the  last.  It  is,  however,  impossible  to 
escape  all  errors,  and  any  suggestions  or  corrections  from 
students  will  be  thankfully  received. 

The  names  tach,  gramtach,  and  dyntach  have  been  re- 
tained for  the  C.G.S.  units  of  speed,  momentum,  and 
activity,  as  no  other  names  as  good  as  these  have  yet  been 
proposed.  The  Canadian  ton  of  2,000  lbs.  has  been  used  in 
preference  to  the  awkward  English  ton.  Surely  to  call 
112  lbs.  a  hundred-weight  is  unworthy  of  a  scientific 
nation.  Let  such  absurdities  disappear,  like  that  foolish 
but  fast  fading  notion,  that  a  knowledge  of  the  dead 
languages  is  necessary  to  a  liberal  education,  or  that 
equally  absurd  one,  that  a  knowledge  of  Hebrew  should 
form  an  essential  part  of  the  education  of  a  modern 
preacher. 

It  is  difficult  and  I  think  pedantic  for  an  author  to 
attempt  to  enumerate  the  books  and  authors  to  whom  he 
is  indebted,  but  I  cannot  refrain  from  at  least  thankfully 
acknowledging  my  gratitude  to  my  old  teacher  and  friend, 
Prof.  Tait,  of  Edinburgh  University,  to  whose  clear  ex- 
position of  the  great  fundamental  facts  and  laws  under- 
lying the  constitution  of  the  universe,  so  many  thousands 
of  students  are  indebted;  and  also  my  indebtedness  to  my 


Vlll. 

friend  and  former  colleague,  Prof.  R.  H.  Smith,  of  London, 
emeritus  professor  of  engineering  in  Mason  College,  Bir- 
mingham, for  his  trenchant  criticism  of  the  methods  of 
dealing  with  some  of  the  difficult  problems  in  that  only 
sure  foundation  of  the  higher  problems  in  all  the  sciences, 
the  science  of  Dynamics. 

The  full  Table  of  Contents,  as  well  as  the  lists  of  the 
Tables  of  Measurement  and  Physical  Laws  expounded  in 
the  text,  which  precede  this  preface,  will,  I  trust,  make 
reference  to  the  text  sufficiently  easy  to  the  student. 

D.  H.  Marshall. 
Elmhurst,  Kingston,  Ont. 
9,  IV,  1898. 


INTRODUCTION. 


All  our  knowledge  of  the  material  world  is  derived 
from  experience,  which  can  be  conveniently  divided  into 
observation  and  experiment.  Astronomy  is  an  example  of 
a  science  in  which  all  our  knowledge  is  primarily  derived 
from  simple  observation,  whereas  in  the  science  of 
electricity  all  important  advances  have  been  made  by  the 
performance  of  experiments.  Hence,  whilst  the  history 
of  astronomy  stretches  over  more  than  two  thousand 
years,  that  of  electricity  hardly  extends  over  two  hundred. 

Observation  consists  in  simply  observing  with  the  aid 
only  of  our  senses  what  is  taking  place  in  the  material 
world. 

Experiment  is  the  controlling  to  a  greater  or  less  ex- 
tent what  is  to  take  place,  in  order  to  find  out  what  will 
take  place  under  special  circumstances. 

What  we  observe  and  experiment  with  is  matter.  This 
term,  like  the  terms  space,  direction,  and  time,  it  is  im- 
possible to  define  satisfactorily. 

Space  is  limitless  extension  in  ail  directions.  It  is  the 
abode  of  matter,  in  which  all  motions  take  place,  though 
itself  immaterial.  The  term  matter  is  applied  to  anything 
which  is  perceived  by  our  senses,  and  which  occupies 
space.  A  shadow  can  be  perceived  but  is  not  matter, 
since  it  does  not  occupy  space.  So  with  motion,  perplex- 
ity, anger,  joy.  The  Torricellian  vacuum  occupies  space, 
but  it  is  not  matter,  since  (as  yet)  it  cannot  be  perceived 
by  the  senses. 


All  great  advances  in  Science  have  been  made  by 
measuring  what  is  observed.  Mathematics  may  be  defin- 
ed as  the  science  of  measurement.  It  is  divided  generally 
into  (1)  Pure  Mathematics,  and  (2)  Applied  Mathematics. 
In  the  former,  measurements  of  space  and  time  are 
principally  considered.  In  the  latter,  besides  space  and 
time,  the  properties  and  conditions  of  matter,  such  as 
mass,  weight,  energy,  temperature,  potential,  are  measured. 
In  a  wider  sense  Applied  Mathematics  is  known  as 
Natural  Philosophy  or  Physics.  Natural  Philosophy  is 
the  science  which  investigates  and  measures  the  properties 
of  matter  as  discovered  by  direct  observation  and  experi- 
ment and  deduces  the  laws  connecting  these  properties. 
So  extensive,  however,  has  our  knowledge  of  the  properties 
and  conditions  of  matter  become,  that  different  branches 
of  Natural  Philosophy  are  conveniently  separated  from 
the  parent  stem.  Chemistry,  Astronomy,  Geology,  Bi- 
ology, &c,  though  originally  branches  of  Natural  Philoso- 
phy, have  put  forth  roots  like  the  branches  of  the  banyan 
tree  and  become  themselves  trees  of  knowledge,  sending 
forth  their  own  branches,  and  these  in  their  turn  new 
roots.  But  the  same  vital  force  permeates  trunk  and 
branches  alike,  and  it  is  this  vital  force,  under  its  new 
name  energy,  which  now  forms  the  subject-matter  of  phy- 
sical science.  Natural  Philosophy  or  Physics  is  thus  the 
science  of  energy,  and  is  divided  into  the  following  prin- 
cipal parts  :  (1)  Dynamics,  which  treats  of  molar  energy. 
(2)  Sound,  (3)  Heat,  (4)  Magnetism  and  Electricity,  (5) 
Light  and  other  kinds  of  radiant  energy. 

Before  any  measurements  can  be  made,  certain  units 
of  measurement  must  be  fixed  upon.  Thus,  the  navigator 
measures  the  run  of  his  ship  in  knots,  the  surveyor  his 
land  in  acres,  and  states  of  heat  are  measured  in  ther- 
mometric  degrees.  Now,  not  only  in  different  countries, 
but  even  in  the  same  country,  different  units,  bearing  no 
simple  relations  to  one  another,   are  constantly  used  in 


measurements  of  the  same  kind.  In  order  to  avoid  all 
unnecessary  calculations  in  the  comparison  of  different 
observations,  scientific  men  have  agreed  to  adopt  a  uni- 
form system  of  units.  This  is  founded  on  the  French 
system  of  units  and  is  known  as  the  Centimetre-Gram- 
Second  or  C.  G.  S.  system.  With  the  English  foot,  pound 
and  second  as  fundamental  units  an  English  system  of 
units  is  formed  called  the  F.  P.  S.  system.  In  the  follow- 
ing pages  the  student  is  exercised  in  the  use  of  the  C.  G.  S 
as  well  as  the  English  units. 

When  for  special  measurements  it  is  desirable  to  use 
larger  or  smaller  units  than  the  standards,  these  are  form- 
ed in  the  C.  G.  S.  system  quite  uniformly,  except  in  mea- 
surements of  time,  by  prefixing  the  words  deca,  hecto,  kilo, 
mega,  to  the  name  of  the  standard  to  indicate  multiples  of 
10,  102,  103,  106,  times  the  standard  unit,  and  by  prefixing 
deci.  centi,  milli,  to  indicate  submultiples  of  10-1,  10~'2, 
10~3.  Taken  in  connection  with  the  decimal  notation  in 
the  writing  of  numbers,  such  a  system  of  forming  the 
multiples  and  submultiples  saves  all  unnecessary  calcula- 
tions in  reducing  to  the  standard  unit.  In  the  English 
system  of  forming  multiples  and  submultiples,  the  num- 
bers seem  to  have  been  chosen  with  a  view  of  containing 
as  many  prime  factors  as  possible,  an  imaginary  advantage 
which  has  occasioned  a  very  great  amount  of  unnecessary 
calculation.  In  conformity  with  the  C.  G.  S.  system  of 
units,  all  temperatures  in  the  following  pages  are  given  in 
degrees  centigrade. 

Units  of  Length. 

103  millimetres  =  102  centimetres  =  10  decimetres  =  1 
metre  =  10_1  decametre  =  10~2  hectometre  =  10-3  kilo- 
metre =10-6  megametre. 

3  feet=l  yard,  6  feet  =  l  fathom,  100  links  =  1  chain  = 
22  yards,  5280  feet=1760  yards  =  80  chains  =  1  mile. 


Units  of  Surface. 
1  are  =  1  square  decametre  =  10 2    square   metres  =  106 
square  centimetres. 

1  acre  =  10  square  chains,  640  acres  =  1  square  mile. 

Units  of   Volume. 

1  litre  =  1  cubic  decimetre  =  10 3  cubic  centimetres. 

1  gallon  =  277*274  cubic  inches,  and  holds  10  lbs.  avoir, 
of  water  at  62°  F. 

Units  of  Mass. 

1000  milligrams  =  100  centigrams  =  10  decigrams  = 
1  gram  =  10_1  decagram  =  10-2  hectogram  =  10-3  kilogram 
=  10~6  tonne. 

1  pound  (avoirdupois)  =  7000  grains,  1  English  ton  = 
2240  lbs.,  1  Canadian  ton  =  2000  lbs. 

The  following  useful  formulce  should  be  quite  familiar 
to  the  student: 

7r=3i    31416,   355/113,   31415926536. 
Circumference  of  a  circle  =  7td  =  2nr 
Area  of  a  circle  =  ~r2 
Surface  of  a  sphere  =  Tzd2  =  4nr2 
Volume  of  a  sphere  =^7ir3  =^7td3 


u 


INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  SCIENCE  OF  DYNAMICS. 


Chapter  I. 
Extension.  Direction. 

1.  The  student  of  elementary  dynamics  is  not  concern- 
ed with  the  ultimate  structure  of  matter,  of  which  various 
theories  have  been  advanced  by  scientific  men,  but  only 
with  its  properties.  The  principal  of  these  which  we  shall 
consider  are  extension,  inertia,  mass,  weight,  and  energy. 

2.  Any  portion  of  matter  is  called  a  body.  The  grains 
of  sand  on  the  sea-shore,  our  own  bodies,  houses,  the  whole 
earth,  the  planets,  the  fixed  stars,  are  examples  of  bodies. 
The  expression  of  the  fact  that  two  or  more  bodies  cannot 
at  the  same  time  occupy  the  same  portion  of  space  is 
known  as  the  principle  of  impenetrability. 

3.  Extension  is  that  property  of  matter  implied  in  the 
statement  that  every  body  occupies  a  limited  portion  of 
space.  Every  body  has  therefore  form  or  shape.  The 
volume  of  a  body  is  the  measure  of  its  extension.  The 
term  bulk  is  often  used  in  the  same  sense.  The  internal 
volume  of  a  body,  e.g.  that  of  a  cup  or  of  a  hollow  sphere, 
is  the  amount  of  space  enclosed  by  the  body,  and  is  called 
its  capacity. 

4.  Before  any  measurements  can  be  made  it  is  neces- 
sary to  fix  upon  units  or  definite  quantities  of  what  we 
desire  to  measure,  in  terms  of  which  all  other  quantities 
of  the  same  kind  are  expressed  by  means  of  numbers.  In 
measurements  of  extension  three  units  are  used,  viz.,  units 
of  length,  area,  and  volume.     Of  these  the  unit  of  length 


may  be  taken  as  a  fundamental  or  independent  unit,  and 
the  pthers  made  to  depend  upon  it,  and  these  are  hence 
called  derived  units.  In  any  system  of  units  a  funda- 
mental unit  is  one  whose  magnitude  is  independent  of 
that  of  any  other  unit,  otherwise  than  as  a  mere  multiple 
or  submultiple  of  a  unit  of  the  same  kind.  A  derived 
unit  is  one  whose  magnitude  depends  upon  the  magnitudes 
of  one  or  more  other  units,  but  is  not  a  mere  multiple  or 
submultiple  of  a  unit  of  the  same  kind. 

5.  The  English  standard  unit  of  length  (or  distance) 
is  the  yard,  which  is  defined  by  Act  of  Parliament  as  the 
distance  between  two  points  on  a  bar  of  metal  at  a  definite 
temperature.  The  French  unit,  the  metre,  although  de- 
rived originally  from  the  dimensions  of  the  earth,  is  sim- 
ilarly defined.  The  unit  of  length  adopted  in  the  C.  G.  S. 
system  of  units  is  one  of  the  submultiples  of  the  French 
unit,  viz.,  the  centimetre,  and  its  multiples  and  sub- 
multiples  are  the  same  as  the  French. 

6.  Whatever  unit  of  length  be  used,  it  is  found  most 
convenient  in  measurements  of  surface  to  take  as  the  unit 
of  area  (or  surface)  the  area  of  a  square  of  which  the  side 
is  unit  of  length,  or  a  multiple  or  submultiple  thereof. 
Hence  the  C.  G.  S.  unit  of  area  is  a  square  centimetre. 
The  French  unit  of  area,  the  are,  is  a  square  decametre. 

7.  Similarly  the  unit  of  volume  is  immediately  and 
most  conveniently  derived  from  the  unit  of  length  by  de- 
fining it  as  the  volume  of  a  cube  of  which  the  edge  is  unit 
of  length  or  a  multiple  or  submultiple  of  the  unit  of 
length.  Hence  the  C.  G.  S.  unit  of  volume  is  a  cubic  cen- 
timetre. The  French  unit  of  capacity,  the  litre,  is  a  cubic 
decimetre,  and  the  unit  of  volume,  the  stere,  a  cubic 
metre. 

8.  Direction  is  relative  position  irrespective  of  dis- 
tance. It  is  the  only  property  or  characteristic  of  an  in- 
definite straight  line.     It  is  the  characteristic  property  of 


motion  (Chap.  II),  and  thus  indicates  how  one  must  go 
from  one  point  of  space  to  reach  another.  An  angle  is 
difference  of  direction.  The  unit  cf  angle  in  common 
measurements  is  the  degree,  which  is  the  90th  part  of  a 
right  angle.  It  cannot  be  said  that  the  unit  of  angle  is 
derivable  from  the  unit  of  length,  but  it  is  most  conven- 
iently measured  as  the  ratio  of  two  lengths.  This  will  be 
understood  when  we  remember  that  if  a  circle  be  describ- 
ed with  the  vertex  of  an  angle  as  centre  and  with  any 
radius,  the  magnitude  of  the  angle  is  measured  by  the 
ratio  of  the  length  of  the  arc  on  which  it  stands  to  the 
length  of  the  radius.  We  may,  therefore,  define  the  unit 
angle  as  that  angle  which  is  subtended  by  an  arc  of  unit 
length  at  the  centre  of  a  circle  of  unit  radius.  This  is 
just  the  same  as  the  angle  which  is  subtended  by  an  arc, 
whose  length  is  equal  to  the  radius,  at  the  centre  of  any 
circle  whatsoever,  and  is  called  a  radian. 

9.  As  mentioned  above,  we  learn  from  elementary  ge- 
ometry that,  whatever  unit  of  angle  be  adopted,  the  fol- 
lowing formula  expresses  the  relation  between  the  length 
of  any  arc  (a)  of  a  circle,  the  length  of  the  radius  (?•), 
and  the  magnitude  of  the  angle  (i)  subtended  at  the 
centre  of  the  circle  by  the  arc,  a  =  C  ri,  where  C  is  a  con- 
stant number,  whose  value  depends  upon  the  unit  of  angle 
adopted.  If  we  measure  (i)  in  radians,  this  reduces  to 
the  simple  form 

a  =  ri 

10.  To  express  the  value  of  a  radian  in  degrees.  ■ 
Since  the  arc  subtended  by  a  straight  angle,  i.e.  by  two 

right  angles  =nr,  if  (0  be  the  measure  of  two  right  angles 
in  radians,  we  get  rtr  =  ri,  .'.  i  =  n,  i.e.  two  right  angles  =  n 
radians,  and  .\  a  radian  =  180°/;r  =  57°  IT  44"'8  true  to  the 
tenth  part  of  a  second  of  angle,  or  very  nearly  57°'3. 

11.  In  many  dynamical  investigations  it  is  unnecessary 
to  consider  in  any  way  the  dimensions  of  a  body,  or  the 


8 

distances  between  the  different  parts  of  a  system  of  bodies. 
When  this  is  the  case,  the  body  or  system  of  bodies  is 
called  a  particle  or  material  particle.  Thus  in  the  ex- 
planation of  the  seasons,  or  of  the  phases  of  the  moon,  the 
earth  or  moon  is  a  body,  as  we  cannot  neglect  its  dimen- 
sions, whereas  in  the  determination  of  a  planet's  position 
in  the  sphere  of  the  heavens  at  any  time,  the  planet  is  a 
particle.  In  considering  the  proper  motion  of  the  solar 
system  amongst  the  fixed  stars,  the  sun,  and  indeed  the 
whole  solar  system,  are  merely  particles.  The  term  par- 
ticle is  frequently  defined  as  an  indefinitely  small  body. 
The  terms  small  and  large  are  merely  relative,  and  what 
is  small  at  one  time  or  from  one  point  of  view  is  large  at 
another  or  from  another  point  of  view.  In  looking  at  a 
star  through  a  large  telescope  we  generally  speak  of  the 
star  as  a  particle,  and  of  the  telescope  as  a  large  body,  and 
yet  the  star  is  immeasurably  larger  than  the  telescope.  A 
grain  of  sand  or  a  mote  of  salt  we  generally  consider  a 
very  small  body,  but  if  it  gets  into  one's  eye,  its  size  is 
enormous. 

12.  The  most  generally  accepted  theory  of  the  ultimate 
structure  of  matter  at  the  present  day  is  known  as  the 
atomic  theory.  According  to  this  theory  matter  is  not 
infinitely  divisible,  but  consists  ultimately  of  excessively 
small  indivisible  particles.  The  smallest  portion  of  any 
substance,  beyond  which  mechanical  sub-division  is  sup- 
posed to  be  impossible,  is  called  a  molecule.  A  molecule 
may,  however,  be  chemically  divided  into  atoms.  Thus  a 
molecule  of  water  (H20)  may  be  chemically  divided  into 
three  atoms,  two  of  Hydrogen,  and  one  of  Oxygen. 


Examination  I. 

1.  Define  matter,  and  distinguish  between  the  terms 
body,  particle,  molecule,  atom. 

2.  Define  extension,  space,  length,  and  area. 


9 

3.  What  is  impenetrability  ?  Give  illustrations  of  the 
apparent  contradiction  of  this  principle,  and  explain 
them. 

4.  Distinguish  between  volume,  bulk,  and  capacity. 

5.  What  is  a  unit  of  measurement  ?  Give  the  C.  G.  S. 
and  F.  P.  S.  units  of  length,  area,  and  volume. 

6.  What  is  a  metre,  a  litre,  a  stere  ?  State  the  numeri- 
cal relations  between  the  are  and  sq.  cm.,  and  between 
the  litre,  stere,  and  cub.  cm. 

7.  Define  direction  and  angle.  Name  and  define  the 
principal  units  of  angle. 

8.  Give  in  radians  the  angles  of  an  equilateral  triangle, 
a  right  angle,  30°,  a  circumangle,  and  express  a  radian  and 
f  n  radians  in  degrees. 

9.  If  the  unit  of  length  be  a  yard,  and  the  unit  of 
angle  a  right  angle,  what  must  be  the  value  of  C  in  the 
formula  a  =  C  r  i  ?  Is  the  value  of  C  in  this  formula  de- 
pendent on  the  unit  of  length  ?     Why  ? 


Exercise   I. 

The  following  examples  in  mensuration  are  appended 
to  exercise  the  student  in  the  use  of  the  C.  O.  S.  units  and 
also  of  logarithmic  tables  to  which  he  should  early  accus- 
to  m  h  imself.     Log  n  =  0-4971499. 

1.  The  great  pyramid  of  Gizeh  is  a  regular  pyramid  on 
a  square  base.  The  original  length  of  an  edge  of  the  base 
was  22042m.,  and  of  a  slant  edge  232-865m.;  find  (1)  the 
area  of  the  ground  on  which  it  stands,  (2)  the  exposed 
area  of  the  pyramid,  (3)  the  volume. 

2.  Assuming  the  earth  to  be  a  sphere,  and  that  the 
length  of  an  arc  of  a  degree  on  a  meridian  is  equal  to 
111-19  kilom.,  find  (1)  the  length  of  the  diameter,  (2)  the 
area  of  the  earth's  surface,  (3)  the  volume. 


10 

3.  If  the  nature  of  the  earth's  crust  be  known  to  a 
depth  of  8  kilometres,  find  the  ratio  of  the  known  to  the 
unknown  volume,  supposing  the  earth  to  be  a  sphere  of 
6370-9  kilometres  radius. 

4.  On  the  same  supposition,  how  much  of  the  earth!s 
surface  could  a  person  see  who  was  at  a  height  of  4  kilo- 
metres above  the  sea  level  ? 

5.  If  the  atmosphere  extend  to  a  height  of  70  kilo- 
metres, what  is  the  ratio  of  its  volume  to  that  of  the  solid 
and  liquid  earth  ? 

6.  Compare  the  earth's  surface  (taken  as  100)  with  the 
torrid,  temperate,  and  frigid  zones  of  the  earth,  supposing 
the  first  to  extend  to  an  angular  distance  of  23c30  from 
the  equator,  and  the  last  to  a  distance  of  23c30'  from  each 
pole. 

7.  Two  sectors  of  circles  have  equal  areas,  and  the  radii 
are  as  1  to  2  ;  find  the  ratio  of  the  angles. 

8.  A  gravel  walk  of  uniform  breadth  is  made  round  a 
rectangular  grass-plot,  the  sides  of  which  are  20  and  30 
metres  ;  find  the  breadth  of  the  walk,  if  its  area  be  three- 
tenths  of  that  of  the  grass-plot. 

9.  Find  the  number  of  litres  of  air  in  a  room  whose 
dimensions  are  12*50  m.,  545  m.,  and  3"70  m. 

10.  Find  in  radians  the  angle  of  a  sector  of  a  circle,  the 
radius  of  which  is  20  metres,  and  the  area  a  deciare. 

11.  The  horizontal  parallax  of  the  sun  (i.e.  the  angle 
subtended  by  the  earth's  radius  at  the  sun)  is  8"-85,  and 
of  the  moon  57'  3" ;  find  the  distances  of  these  bodies  in 
terms  of  the  earth's  radius. 

12.  Find  also,  in  terms  of  a  great  circle  of  the  earth, 
the  areas  of  the  moon's  orbit  and  of  the  ecliptic,  supposing 
these  to  be  circles. 


11 

13.  Find  the  circumference  and  area  of  the  circle  of 
latitude  passing  through  Kingston.  Ont.,  latitude  44°  13', 
(See  ex.  3). 

14.  A  pendulum  whose  length  is  1|  metre  swings 
through  an  arc  whose  chord  is  a  decimetre  ;  find  the  angle 
and  the  length  of  the  arc  of  oscillation. 

15.  What    must    be    the   diameter  and   surface    of    a 
spherical  balloon  that  its  capacity  may  be  150000  litres? 


Answers. 
When  no  unit  is  appended  to  an  answer,  the  units  of 
the  C.  G.  S.  or  F.  P.  S.  system  arc  to  be  understood. 
When  the  answer  cannot  be  expressed  exactly  by  a  num- 
ber, the  answer  given  is  true  to  the  last  figure. 

1.  485-850  ares;  904-313  ares;  2-80195  megasteres. 

2.  12741-4   kilom.  ;    5-10019X1012  ares;    T08306X1012 
cub.  kilom.      3.1:265.      4.  160018  sq.  kilom.     5.1:30. 

6.  100:  40:  52:  8.      7.  4:1.      8.  168-6.      9.  2520625. 
10.1/20.     11.  23307;  60-3.     12.  3631;  5-432x10*. 

13.  28689-5 kilom.;  654991  XlO7  sq.  kilom. 

14.  3°  49'  13"-7;  10002.       15.  659;  1-365  are. 


Chapter  II. 
Motion.  Velocity. 

13.  Motion  is  change  of  position.  Although  the  ideas 
conveyed  by  the  terms  matter  and  motion  are  quite  differ- 
ent, yet  it  is  evident  that  all  the  motions  we  are  cognizant 
of  are  the  motions  of  matter  directly,  or  are  indirectly  pro- 
duced by  motions  of  matter.  Thus  the  motion  we  see  when 
a  boy  throws  a  stone  is  the  motion  of  the  stone  directly. 
A  wave,  on  the  other  hand,  which  is  motion  of  form,  is  not 
directly  the  motion  of  the  medium  through  which  the 
wave  is  passing,  but  is  indirectly  produced  by  the  motion 
of  this  medium.  What  of  the  motion  of  a  shadow,  or  of 
tlie  sphere  of  the  heavens  ? 

14.  The  opposite  (or  the  zero)  of  motion  of  rest.  All 
the  motion  or  rest  of  a  body  that  we  can  know  of  is  rela- 
tive, i.e.  with  respect  to  some  other  body.  In  infinite 
space  absolute  motion  or  rest  is  indeterminable,  if  indeed 
conceivable.  When  we  speak  of  rest  and  motion  we  gen- 
erally mean  either  relatively  to  our  own  bodies,  or  rela- 
tively to  our  abode  in  space,  the  Earth.  Every  body  is 
simultaneously  at  rest  and  in  motion.  When  a  person  is 
sitting  at  ease  in  a  railway  carriage,  he  is  said  to  be  at 
rest.  But  this  is  merely  relatively  to  the  train.  Rela- 
tively to  the  earth  he  is  moving  as  fast  as  the  train  is,  and 
when  we  consider  that  the  earth  is  rotating  about  its  axis, 
is  further  revolving  around  the  sun,  and  with  the  sun  and 
other  members  of  the  solar  system  careering  through 
space,  it  is  easily  seen  how  complex  is  the  person's  motion. 
The  aim  of  the 'physicist  is  to  determine  those  co>u1itions 
of  matter  and  motion  which,  a  port  from  the  world  of  sen- 
sation, thought,  and  consciousness,  constitute  the  life  of 
the  universe. 


13 

15.  Time  is  continuous  and  limitless  duration  or  exist- 
ence, marking  out  the  succession  of  events.  In  dynamical 
science  it  is  conceived  as  a  uniformly  increasing  quantity. 
It  might  also  be  denned  as  the  immeasurable  flow  or  con- 
tinuity of  instants,  and  is  provisionally  measured  by  the 
rotation  of  the  sphere  of  the  heavens. 

16.  Velocity  is  time-rate  of  motion,  i.e.  rate  of  change  of 
position  per  unit  of  time.  By  rate  is  meant  here  degree 
of  quickness.  When  two  bodies  are  moving,  and  one 
moves  over  a  greater  distance  in  the  same  time  than  the 
other,  the  velocity  of  the  former  is  said  to  be  the  greater. 
Velocity  has  direction  as  well  as  magnitude.  The  term 
sj>ee<l  is  used  for  magnitude  of  velocity  irrespective  of 
direction.  In  any  motion  of  a  body  the  velocity  may  be 
uniform,  i.e.  the  same  throughout  the  motion,  or  it  may  be 
variable,  i.e.  continuously  or  at  intervals  changing  during 
the  motion.  Similarly  a  speed  may  be  constant  or  varia- 
ble. The  velocities  of  all  bodies  that  we  see  moving  are 
really  variable.  The  motions  of  the  hands  of  a  chrono- 
meter, or  the  rotations  about  their  axes  of  the  different 
members  of  the  solar  system,  are  cases  of  motion  in  which 
the  speeds  are  nearly  constant.  The  test  of  constant 
speed  is  that  equal  distances  are  moved  over  in  equal 
times,  however  small  these  times  may  he. 

17.  What,  however,  we  naturally  ask,  are  equal  times  ? 
We  look  at  our  clocks  or  watches  and  say  that  they  tell  us 
equal  times.  Some  watches  go  slow,  others  go  fast,  and 
how  are  we  to  know  which  go  right  ?  It  is  well-known 
that  our  clocks  and  watches  are  regulated  by  the  apparent 
motion  of  the  sun  in  the  sphere  of  the  heavens.  This  mo- 
tion is  the  resultant  of  two  motions,  viz.,  (1)  the  apparent 
rotation  of  the  sphere  of  the  heavens,  produced  by  the  real 
rotation  of  the  earth,  which  takes  place  in  a  sidereal  day  : 
and  (2)  the  apparent  revolution  of  the  sun  in  the  ecliptic 
in  a  sidereal  year,  produced  by  the  real  revolution  of  the 


14 

earth  in  its  orbit  around  the  sun.  As  the  sidereal  year  is 
estimated  in  sidereal  days,  we  find  that  ultimately  the  ap- 
parent rotation  of  the  sphere  of  the  heavens  is  our  stand- 
ard measurer  of  time,  and  we  define  equal  times  as  times  in 
which  the  sphere  of  the  heavens  apparently  rotates 
through  equal  angles.  Whether  the  term  equality  is 
rightly  applied  to  such  times  or  not  is  a  legitimate  en- 
quiry. 

The  mean  or  average  time  in  which  the  sun  appar- 
ently rotates  about  the  earth  is  called  a  mean  solar  day, 
and  our  unit  of  time,  the  second,  is  a  well-known  fraction 
of  the  mean  solar  day.  In  the  C.  G.  S.  and  F.  P.  S.  sys- 
tems of  units  of  measurement,  the  unit  of  time  is,  like  the 
unit  of  length,  one  of  the  fundamental  units. 

18.  Speed  is  measured  by  the  number  of  units  of  length 
passed  over  in  a  unit  of  time.  The  unit  of  speed  is  deriv- 
ed immediately  from  the  units  of  length  and  time  ;  it  is 
the  speed  in  which  a  unit  of  length  is  passed  over  in  a 
unit  of  time.  Hence  the  C.  G.  S.  unit  of  speed  is  1  centi- 
metre per  second.  It  will  be  convenient  to  call  this  a 
tacit.  The  F.  P.  S.  unit  of  speed  is  1  foot  per  second,  and 
is  called  a  vel.  If  s  be  the  distance  in  centimetres  or  feet 
described  in  /  seconds  by  a  body  moving  with  a  constant 
speed  of  v  tachs  or  vels,  then  s  =  vt,  and  v  =  s/t. 

19.  When  a  body  is  moving  with  variable  speed  it  has 
of  course  a  definite  speed  at  every  instant,  which  is  mea- 
sured by  the  number  of  units  of  length  which  iron  Id  he 
passed  over  in  a  unit  of  time,  if  for  such  a  period  from  the 
instant  in  question  the  speed  did  not  change.  Hence  we 
talk  of  a  ship  sailing  at  the  rate  of  12  knots  an  hour,  or  of 
a  man  walking  at  the  rate  of  4  miles  an  hour,  although 
the  speed  of  the  ship  or  of  the  man  may  not  be  the  same 
for  any  two  consecutive  seconds.  When  a  body  is  moving 
with  variable  speed,  the  equation  r  =  s/t  gives  the  mean 
speed  during  the  time  /,  and,  by  taking  t  «*mall  enough, 


15 

we  can  approximate  in  any  degree  of  exactitude  to  the 
speed  at  any  instant. 

20.  A  velocity  can  be  completely  represented  by  a 
straight  line,  the  direction  of  the  line  representing  the 
direction  of  the  motion  (the  tangent  to  the  path  of  the 
moving  particle  at  the  instant  in  question),  and  the  length 
of  the  line  representing  the  speed.  Since  a  body  may 
move  in  two  directions  along  a  line,  the  one  being  opposite 
to  the  other,  it  is  convenient  to  distinguish  these  by  the 
signs  +  and  — ,  as  is  customary  in  the  applications  of 
algebra  to  geometry.  If  AB  be  a  straight  line,  and  a 
velocity  in  the  direction  of  AB  be  called  + ,  a  velocity  in 
the  direction  BA  will  be  called  — . 

Angular  Motion. 

21.  Angular  velocity  is  rate  of  change  of  direction  (of 
one  point  with  respect  to  another)  per  unit  of  time. 

Example. — When  a  particle  moves  in  a  circle  the  time- 
rate  of  change  of  the  angle,  which  the  radius  through  the 
particle  makes  with  a  fixed  radius,  is  the  angular  velocity 
of  the  particle  about  the  centre  of  the  circle. 

If  the  angles  described  by  the  radius  through  the  par- 
ticle be  equal  in  equal  times,  however  small  these  may  be, 
then  the  angular  velocity  is  uniform  and  is  measured  by 
the  angle  described  in  a  unit  of  time.  The  unit  of  angu- 
lar velocity  is  that  in  which  a  unit  of  angle  is  described  in 
a  unit  of  time,  i.e.,  1  radian  per  second. 

When  the  angular  velocity  is  variable,  the  angular 
velocity  at  any  instant  is  measured  by  the  angle  which 
would  he  described  in  a  unit  of  time,  if  for  such  a  period 
from  the  instant  in  question  the  angular  velocity  did  not 
change. 

Corresponding  to  the  equation  .<?  =  vt  (Art.  18),  we  evi- 
dently have  the  equation  i=ot,  in  which  i  is  the  angle 
described  in  time  t  with  angular  velocity  o. 


16 

22.  From  the  formula  a  =  ri  (Art.  9)  it  follows  at  once 
that  if  v  represent  in  tachs  or  vels  the  speed  of  a  particle, 
moving  in  the  circumference  of  a  circle,  r  the  radius  in 
centimetres  or  feet,  and  o  the  angular  velocity  about  the 
centre  in  radians  per  second, 

v  =  ro,  and  o  —  v\r. 

23.  If  the  angular  velocity  be  like  that  of  the  hands  of 
a  watch,  it  is  represented  by  the  -  sign,  and  if  unlike,  by 
the  +  sign.  Let  it  be  carefully  observed,  however,  that 
the  sign  given  to  the  angular  velocity  of  a  body  depends 
upon  the  side  of  the  plane  of  motion  from  which  the  mo- 
tion is  observed.  Thus,  if  we  could  see  the  motion  of  the 
hands  of  a  watch  through  the  back  of  the  watch,  the  an- 
gular velocity  would  be  + .  If  we  look  northwards  at  the 
rotation  of  the  sphere  of  the  heavens  it  seems  to  be  + , 
and  if  we  look  southwards  it  seems  to  be 

Just  as  -  -  linear  motion  is  the  plane  image  (i.e.  the 
image  in  a  plane  mirror)  of  +  motion,  so  -  angular  mo- 
tion is  the  plane  image  of  + ,  and  vice  versa. 

Angular  velocity  is  completely  represented  by  a  num- 
ber with  the  sign  +  or  -  prefixed  to  it. 


Examination  II. 

1.  Define  motion,  rest,  velocity,  speed. 

2.  What  is  a  wave  ?  How  is  it  produced  ?  Give  ex- 
amples. 

8.  Illustrate  the  meanings  of  the  terms  relative  and 
absolute  with  respect  to  extension,  motion,  and  direction. 

4.  Distinguish  between  uniform  and  variable  velocity  s 
and  define  the  speed  of  a  body  at  any  instant  when  the 
velocity  is  variable. 

5.  What  is  the  test  of  constant  speed  ? 

(').  Defino  time,  equal  times,  and  the  unit  of  time. 


17 

7.  Distinguish  between  fundamental  and  derived  units, 
and  give  examples  of  each. 

8.  Name  and  define  the  C.  G.  S.  and  F.  P.  S.  units  of 
speed. 

9.  Give  the  relation  between  s,   v,  f  in  linear  motion, 
and  between  i,  o,  f  in  angular  motion. 

10.  Define  a  sidereal  and  a  mean  solar  day,  and  give  the 
numerical  relations  between  them  and  a  sidereal  year. 

11.  How  may  velocity,  speed,  and  angular  velocity  be 
completely  represented  ? 

12.  Define  angular  velocity,  and  the  unit  thereof. 

13.  Give  and  prove  the  relation  between  the  speed  and 
angular  velocity  about  the  centre  of  a  circle  of  a  body 
moving  in  the  circumference. 

14.  Distinguish  between  -f  and  -  angular  velocity. 
How  are  they  related  to  one  another  ? 


Exercise  II. 

1.  A  body  has  a  speed  of  10  tachs,  how  long  will  it 
take  to  pass  over  600  metres  ? 

2.  Which  is  greater  a  speed  of  72  tachs  or  one  of  252 
metres  per  hour,  and  by  how  much  ? 

3.  Express  a  speed  of  72  kilometres  per  hour  in  deci- 
metres per  minute. 

/jUIf  a  line  a  foot  long  represent  a  velocity  of  3*75 
miles  per  hour,  what  length  of  line  would  represent  a 
velocity  of  80  yards  per  minute  ? 

5.  Two  bodies  start  from  the  same  point,  the  one  10 
minutes  after  the  other,  and  travel  in  perpendicular  direc- 
tions with  speeds  of  120  tachs  and  100  metres  per  minute. 
How  far  apart  will  they  be  in  an  hour  from  the  starting  of 
the  first  ? 

6.  Two  travellers  leave  the  same  place  at  the  same  time 
in  directions  inclined  to  one  another  s^  an  angle  of  tt/3, 


18 

and  each  travels  with  a  speed  of  166  tachs.  how  far  apart 
will  they  be  in  two  hours  ? 

7.  A  man  two  metres  high  walks  in  a  straight  line  at 
the  rate  of  6  kilometres  an  hour  away  from  a  lighted  lamp 

3  metres  high  ;  find  in  tachs  the  speed  of  the  end  of  his 
shadow,  and  the  rate  at  which  his  shadow  lengthens. 

8.  If  3  minutes  be  the  unit  of  time,  and  50  decimetres 
the  unit  of  length,  what  number  measures  the  average 
rate  of  walking  of  a  person  who  goes  over  40  kilometres  in 
12  hours  ? 

9.  If  7  metres  per  3  minutes  be  the  unit  of  speed,  and 

4  decimetres  the  unit  of  length,  what  must  be  the  unit  of 
time  ? 

10.  If  3  metres  per  7  minutes  be  the  unit  of  speed,  and 
4  seconds  the  unit  of  time,  what  must  be  the  ur.it  of 
length  ? 

11.)  A  body  moving  uniformly  in  a  circle  describes  the 
circumference  twice  in  3  minutes,  what  is  the  measure  of 
its  angular  velocity  about  the  centre  ? 
/12,)  What  is    the  angular  velocity  of  any  body  on  the 
earth's  surface  due  to  the  earth's  rotation  ? 

13.  The  diameter  of  the  driving  wheel  of  a  locomotive 
is  2  metres,  what  is  the  angular  velocity  of  a  point  on  the 
wheel  about  the  centre,  when  the  train  is  moving  at  the 
rate  of  80  kilometres  an  hour  ? 

14.  A  body  moving  in  the  circumference  of  a  circle  of 
radius  10  has  unit  angular  velocity  about  the  centre  ;  find 
the  space  described  in  10  seconds,  and  the  time  taken  to 
complete  a  revolution. 


ANSWERS. 

1.     100  min.      2.     72  tachs  ;  65  tachs.  3.     12000. 

4.     T«T  ft.       5.     660775.       6.     11952m.  7.     500;  333-3. 

8.     33-3.      9.     10  I  sec.       10.     2  f  cm.  11.     tt/45 

12.     Tr/43200.        J3.     22-2.        14.     lm.;  2  tt  sec.  ' 


() 


Chapter  III. 
Acceleration. 
24.  Just  as  a  body's  position  may  change,  giving  rise  to 
motion,  so  a  body's  velocity  may  change,  giving  rise  to 
acceleration. 

Acceleration  is  change  of  velocity,  not  merely  change 
f  speed.  A  body's  velocity  may  change  in  magnitude 
only,  or  in  direction  only,  or  in  both  magnitude  and  di- 
rection. The  total  acceleration  during  any  time  is  the 
whole  change  of  velocity  during  that  time.  The  accelera- 
tion at  any  instant  is  the  rate  of  change  of  velocity  per 
unit  of  time  at  that  instant. 

The  rate  at  which  a  body's  velocity  changes  may  be 
slow  or  fast.  Compare  the  accelerations  of  trains  in  a  long 
railway  like  the  Canada  Pacific,  in  which  the  stations  are 
far  apart,  with  the  accelerations  of  trains  in  large  cities, 
run  for  the  convenience  of  passengers  hurrying  from  one 
part  of  the  city  to  another,  such  as  on  the  Underground 
Railroad  in  London  or  on  the  Elevated  Railroad  in  New 
York. 

25.  Acceleration  has  direction  as  well  as  magnitude, 
and  may  be  uniform  or  variable.  An  acceleration  is  uni- 
form when  equal  changes  of  velocity  take  place  in  equal 
times,  however  small  these  times  may  be.  and  is  then 
measured  by  the  velocity  acquired  in  unit  of  time. 

The  direction  of  a  body's  acceleration  may  or  may  not 
be  the  same  as  the  direction  of  its  motion.  We  shall  first 
consider  acceleration,  the  direction  of  which  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  body's  motion  or  opposite  thereto.  The 
effect  of  such  an  acceleration  is  evidently  to  change  a 
body's  speed  without  changing  its  direction  of  motion.  If 
the  direction  of  motion  be  considered  + ,  then  the  accel- 
eration will  be  +  or  -  according  as  the  speed  is  increasing 
or  decreasing. 


20 

26.  The  systematic  unit  of  acceleration  (in  magnitude) 
is  unit  of  speed  per  unit  of  time.  Hence  the  C.  GK  S.  unit 
of  acceleration  is  1  tach  per  second,  and  the  F.  P.  S.  unit 
is  1  vel  per  second. 

Observe  carefully  that  the  unit  of  acceleration,  by  in- 
volving the  units  of  speed  and  time,  involves  the  unit  of 
length  once  and  the  unit  of  time  twice.  This  must  be 
particularly  attended  to  if  in  the  solution  of  a  problem  the 
units  require  to  be  changed.  Thus  a  tach  is  represented 
by  t6q°q-  if  a  metre  and  minute  be  the  units  of  length  and 
time,  but  with  the  same  units  1  tach  per  second  will  be 
represented  by  6yo%°-  One  of  the  most  important  cases 
of  the  motion  we  are  now  considering  is  that  of  a  body 
moving  vertically  upwards  or  downwards  in  vacuo.  Such 
a  body  has  a  uniform  acceleration  vertically  downwards. 
Its  value,  denoted  by  g,  depends  upon  position,  the  mean 
value  over  the  earth's  surface,  at  the  sea  level,  being  980*5 
tachs  per  sec,  or  32^  vels  per  sec,  nearly. 

If  a,  represent  the  acceleration  of  a  body  uniformly  ac- 
celerated in  the  direction  of  its  motion  (  +  ly  or  -  ///). 
and  v  denote  the  whole  change  of  speed  in  time  /,  then 

r  =  at,  and  a  =  r  f. 

27.  A  body  may  have  a  uniform  acceleration  which  is 
different  in  direction  from  the  direction  of  motion.  The 
resultant  motion  of  the  body  in  this  case  is  very  different 
from  that  of  the  preceding  case.  Such  would  be  the  mo- 
tion of  a  body  near  the  earth's  surface  moving  in  vacuo  in 
any  but  a  vertical  direction;  it  is  very  nearly  that  of  a 
leaden  bullet  projected  in  the  air  in  any  but  a  vertical  di- 
rection, and  with  a  small  speed.  Such  a  body's  speed  will 
be  always  changing,  though  not  at  a  constant  rate,  and  the 
direction  of  motion  will  be  always  changing,  so  that  the 
path  described  will  be  a  parabola  with  its  axis  in  the  di- 
rection  of  acceleration.  The  parabolic  path  is  well  seen  in 
the  motion  of  a  jet  of  water. 


21 

28.  Again,  a  body  may  have  an  acceleration  constant  in 
magnitude  but  not  in  direction.  Any  body  revolving  uni- 
formly in  a  circle  (which  is  approximately  the  motion  of 
the  moon  in  its  orbit)  has  such  an  acceleration.  If  o  denote 
the  angular  velocity  of  the  body  about  the  centre,  and  r 
the  radius  of  the  circle,  it  can  be  shewn  that  the  magni- 
tude of  acceleration  is  measured  by  ro2,  but  the  direction 
of  acceleration  is  always  towards  the  centre  of  the  circle, 
and  therefore  changing  at  every  instant. 

29.  When  a  body's  acceleration  is  variable,  the  accelera- 
tion at  any  instant  is  measured  by  the  number  of  units  of 
velocity  by  which  the  body's  velocity  would  he  changed  in 
a  unit  of  time,  if  for  such  a  period  from  the  instant  in 
question  the  acceleration  remained  uniform.  When  the 
acceleration  is  variable,  the  formula  a  —  v/t  gives  the  aver- 
age acceleration  during  the  time  t,  and  by  taking  t  small 
enough  we  can  approximate  as  closely  as  we  please  to  the 
acceleration  at  the  beginning  of  time  /. 

30.  A  bullet  shot  vertically  upwards  with  great  speed  is 
an  example  of  a  body  whose  acceleration  is  constant  in 
direction,  but  variable  in  magnitude  on  account  of  the 
varying  resistance  of  the  air.  If  the  ball  be  shot  in  any 
but  a  vertical  direction  we  have  a  case  of  motion  in  which 
the  acceleration  is  always  changing  both  in  magnitude 
and  direction. 

31.  Acceleration,  like  velocity,  is  completely  represented 
by  a  straight  line,  the  direction  of  the  line  being  the  di- 
rection of  acceleration,  and  the  length  of  the  line  repre- 
senting the  magnitude  of  the  acceleration. 


Examination  III. 

1.  Define  acceleration,  total  acceleration,  and  accelera- 
tion at  any  instant. 

2.  Define  the  unit  of  acceleration,     What  fundamental 
units  does  it  involve  ? 


22 

3.  What  is  the  acceleration  of  a  falling  body  ?  What 
of  a  body  rising  upwards  ? 

4.  Under  what  conditions  is  the  formula  v  =  at  true  ? 
What  is  the  test  of  uniform  acceleration  ? 

5.  How  is  acceleration  measured  when  variable  ? 

6.  Give  examples  of  bodies  having  accelerations,  (a) 
uniform;  (6)  variable,  1)  in  direction  only,  2)  in  magni- 
tude only,  3)  in  both  direction  and  magnitude. 

7.  Shew  that  an  acceleration  of  a  metre  per  minute  per 
second  is  equal  to  an  acceleration  of  a  metre  per  second 
per  minute. 

Exercise  III. 
In  the  following  examples  the  acceleration  is  supposed 
to  be  uniform  a  in  I  in  the  direction  of  motion. 

1.  A  body  has  an  acceleration  of  20  tachs  per  sec;  find 
in  decimetres  per  minute  the  speed  acquired  in  an  hour. 

2.  Express  the  acceleration  of  a  body  falling  in  vacuo 
(980*5)  in  units  of  a  metre  and  hour. 

3.  The  acceleration  due  to  the  weight  of  a  body  is  32| 
vels  per  sec. ;  find  the  same  in  units  of  a  yard  and  minute. 

4.  A  body  is  thrown  vertically  upwards  with  a  speed  of 
6000  tachs;  what  is  its  velocity  at  the  end  of  4  and  of  8 
seconds,  neglecting  the  resistance  of  the  air  ? 

5.  A  body  uniformly  accelerated  starts  with  a  speed  of 
6  metres  per  minute,  and  in  half  an  hour  has  a  speed  of 
36  kilometres  per  hour;  find  the  acceleration  in  tachs  per 
second. 

(').  Compare  the  acceleration  2  tachs  per  sec.  with  that 
in  which  a  speed  of  1800  metres  per  hour  is  acquired  in 
an  hour. 

7.  Compare  an  acceleration  3  when  a  yard  and  minute 
are  the  fundamental  units  with  an  acceleration  1  when  a 
foot  and  second  are  the  fundamental  units. 


8.  If  1  tach  per  10  seconds  were  the  unit  of  accelera- 
tion, what  would  be  the  measure  of  an  acceleration  of  10 
tachs  per  second  ? 

(  9.  If  6  kilometres  per  second  per  minute  were  the  unit 
of  acceleration,  and  1  metre  the  unit  of  length,  what  would 
be  the  unit  of  time  ? 

10.  If  1  decimetre  per  hour  per  second  were  the  unit  of 
acceleration,  and  1  metre  per  minute  the  unit  of  speed, 
what  would  be  the  units  of  length  and  time  in  a  scientific 
system  of  units  ? 

'  11.  What  is  the  difference  between  an  acceleration  of  a 
metre  per  hour  per  second  and  one  of  a  metre  per  minute 
per  minute  ? 

12.  Find  in  tachs  per  second  the  difference  between  an 
acceleration  of  24  metres  per  minute  -per  second  and  one 
of  21 '6  kilometres  per  minute  per  hour. 

'13 j  If  216  kilometres  per  minute  per  hour  be  the  unit  of 
acceleration,  and  a  second  be  the  unit  of  time,  what  must 
be  the  unit  of  length  ? 

^14)  If  the  unit  of  speed  be  96  metres  per  15  minutes, 
and  10  seconds  be  the  unit  of  time,  express  in  C.  G.  S. 
measure  the  unit  of  acceleration. 

15.  If  the  unit  of  speed  be  5  tachs,  and  3  metres  be  the 
unit  of  length,  express  in  kilometres  per  hour  per  hour 
the  unit  of  acceleration. 

16.  /If  7  metres  be  the  unit  of  length,  and  3  minutes  the 
unit  of  time,  what  speed  in  tachs  will  a  body  acquire  in 
half  an  hour  with  an  acceleration  18  ? 

17.  A  body  starts  with  a  speed  of  120  tachs,  and  has  an 
acceleration  of  6  metres  per  minute  per  minute  ;  another 
starts  at  the  same  time  from  rest  with  an  acceleration  of 
36  kilometres  per  hour  per  hour;  when  will  their  speeds  be 
equal  ? 


24 

18.  If  5  inches  represent  an  acceleration  of  10  tachs  per 
minute,  what  length  of  line  will  represent  an  acceleration 
of  6  when  a  metre  and  minute  are  the  units  of  length  and 
time  ? 

19.  A  body  is  thrown  vertically  upwards  with  a  speed 
of  10  kilotachs;  after  how  many  seconds  will  it  be  moving 
downwards  with  a  speed  of  5  kilotachs  ? 

20.  The  values  of  g  were  represented  by  two  different 
nations  by  12  and  25,  and  the  speed  of  sound  in  air  at  0° 
by  numbers  which  were  as  6  :  5;  find  the  ratios  of  their 
units  of  length  and  time. 

21.  If  g  be  represented  by  1754T^r  and  an  acre  by  10  in 
a  system  of  units;  find  what  must  be  the  units  of  speed 
and  time. 


Answers. 

1.  432000.       2.     127072800.       3.     38600. 

4.  2078  upwards;  1844  downwards.     5.     ||.      6.     144:1. 

7.  1:400.       8.     100.       9.     ^  sec.       10.     10  m.;  10  min. 

11.  0.       12.     30.       13.     1  m.       14.     106.       15.     10'8. 

16.  700.        17.     18  min.        18.     5  inches.        19.     153. 

20.  1:3;  2:5.         21.     11  vel;  1  minute. 


Chapter  IV. 

Uniformly  Accelerated  Motion 

32.  We  shall  in  this  chapter  consider  more  fully  the 
nature  of  the  motion  of  a  body  which  is  uniformly  accel- 
erated in  the  direction  of  its  motion.     If  u  be  the  velocity 

;at  any  instant  and  a  the  acceleration,  the  velocity  at  the 
I  end  of  any  time  t  will  evidently  be  u  +  at;  denoting  this 
by  v  we  get  the  first  equation  of  motion, 

v  —  u  +  at. 

33.  To  determine  the  space  described  in  th(j  time  t. 
Since  the  velocity  during  the  time  /  increases  uniform- 

'.  I y  from  u  to  u  +  at,  the  average  velocity  is  \\u  +  (u  +  at)  \ 
or  u  +  ^at.     If  a  body  moved  uniformly  during  the  time  t 
with  this  speed,  the  space  described  would  be  (u-\-\at)t, 
!  or  ut+\at2.      This  will  evidently  be  also    the  space  de- 
I  scribed  during  the  time  t  by  a  body  whose  velocity  increases 
'  uniformly  from  u  to  u  +  at  in  that  time.     Hence  if  a  body 
has  an  initial  velocity  u,  and  an  acceleration  a  in  the  di- 
!  rection  of  its  motion,  and  if  s  denote  the  distance  describ- 
ed in  the  time  t, 

s  =  ut  +  |  at2. 

34.  The  following  may  be  considered  by  the  student  a 
more  rigorous  proof  of  the  same  result: 

Let  the  time  t  be  divided  into  any  large  number  of  equal 
j  parts.     If  n  denote  the  number,  the  duration  of  each  little 
interval  will  be  t/n.     The  velocities  at  the  beginning  of 
I  each  of  the  little  intervals  will  be 

t  «    t  ,       ^     t 

i  u  ,  u  + a — ,  w  +  2a— , u-\-(n  —  l)a— . 

n  n'  v  '    n 

The  velocities  at  the  end  of  each  of  the  little  intervals 

•  will  be 

*  o       *  n       *  t 

I  u  +  a — ,  u  +  let — ,  it  +  oa — ,   u  +  na — . 

n '  n  *  n '  n 


Si  = 


26 

Suppose  now  that  a  body  A  moved  uniformly  during 
each  little  interval  with  the  velocity  indicated  above  at  the 
beginning  of  each  interval;  if  sx  be  the  whole  distance 
moved  over  during  the  n  intervals,  i.e.  during  the  time  t, 

■-—  |  m+  {u+a— )  +  (u  +  2a— )  +  . .  O+w-la—  j 

=  ut  +  a~Y  .   j  1  +  2  +  3+  n-1  I 

I2      n(n-l)  ,  (  1 

=  ut+a^--      -g-  ~  =  nt  +  $al2    j  1  -  — 

Similarly  if  s2  be  the  whole  distance  moved  over  by  a 
body  B,  which  moved  uniformly  during  each  little  inter- 
val with  the  velocity  indicated  above  at  the  end  of  each 
interval, 

s2  =  ut  +  ^af2  ]  1  +  —  [ 

Now  if  s  be  the  whole  space  described  during  the  time  t 
by  the  body  uniformly  accelerated,  it  is  evident  that  s  is 
greater  than  s-y  and  less  than  s2,  for  the  body  A  moved 
during  each  little  interval  with  the  least  velocity,  which 
the  body  uniformly  accelerated  had  during  that  interval, 
and  the  body  B  with  the  greatest. 

.-.  s  >ut  +  %at2  j  1  -  —  | 


<ut  +  iat*\  1  +•— j 


Now  these  two  quantities  between  which  s  lies  differ 
only  in  the  sign  of  l/>/.  What  is  n  ?  n  is  any  number 
whatsoever,  and  may  be  made  as  large  as  you  please.  But 
by  taking  n  large  enough,  1  -1/n  and  1  +  1/n  may  be  made 
to  differ  from  1  by  as  small  a  fraction  as  you  please. 
Hence  when  n  becomes  indefinitely  great,  the  motions  of 
A  and  B  do  not  differ  from  the  motion  of  the  body  uni- 
formly accelerated,  and  the  three  quantities  s,  slt  s2  be- 
come id  +  \at2. 


27 

35.  From  the  equations  of  uniformly  accelerated  motion 
just  determined 

v  =u  +  at (1) 

8  =ut  +  %at2 (2) 

we  derive  by  algebraic  analysis  the  following  useful  though 
not  independent  equation  : 

v2  =  u?  +  2as (3) 

Cor.  1.  If  the  acceleration  be  opposite  in  direction  to 
that  of  motion  it  must  be  represented  by— a,  and  the 
equations  become 

v   =u-  at (4) 

s   =  ut-\af (5) 

v2=u2-2as .(6) 

Cor.  2.  If  the  body  start  from  rest,  u=0  and  the  equa- 
tions become 

v  =at (7) 

s   =Jr«i2 (8) 

v2=2as (9) 

Comparing  (2)  or  (5)  with  (8)  we  might  say  that  ut  is 
the  distance  described  in  virtue  of  the  speed  u,  and  \at  2 
that  described  in  virtue  of  the  acceleration  a. 

36.  As  already  stated  in  art.  26,  the  motion  of  a  body 
moving  freely  in  a  vertical  direction  is  of  the  character  we 
have  been  considering.  Strictly  speaking,  this  applies 
only  to  bodies  moving  in  vacuo,  but  unless  the  velocity  be 
great  we  may  often  neglect  the  action  of  the  atmosphere. 

Let  us  consider  the  motion  of  a  body  thrown  vertically 
upwards  with  a  velocity  u. 

1).  How  long  will  it  rise  ? 

It  rises  until  its  velocity  is  zero.  Hence  from  equation 
(4)  we  get     0  =  u  -  gt,  ..  t  =  u/g  . 

2).    What  is  the  greatest  height  readied  ? 


28 

In  equation  (5)  putting  t  =  u/g  we  get 

u  \    u   )  2       u2 

s=u7~i9u\  =27' 

We  might  get  the  same  result  more  simply  from  equa- 
tion (6).     When  the  body  ceases  to  rise,  v  =  0 
.-.    0  =  u2-2gs.     .-.     s  =  u2/2g. 

3).    When  will  the  body  return  to  the  point  of  projec- 
tion 9 

The  distance  described  from  the  point  of  projection  in 
the  required  time  is  zero  ;  hence  from  equation  (5), 

0=ut-%gt2,     .-.     t=0or2u/g. 

Comparing  this  result  with  1),  we  see  that  the  time 
taken  for  a  body  to  fall  from  the  greatest  height  reached, 
back  again  to  the  point  of  projection,  is  just  the  same  as 
that  taken  by  the  body  to  reach  its  greatest  height. 

4).  What  is  the  velocity  of  the  body  after  returning  to 
the  point  of  projection? 

From  equation  (4),  v  —  u  —  g  \  —  J-  =  —  u, 

<  9    > 
that  is,  the  velocity  is  the  same  in  magnitude  as  that  at 

starting,  but  opposite  in  direction.     Now,  since  any  point 

in  the  path  might  be  considered  a  point  of  projection,  we 

infer  from  this  result  that  the  return  or  downward  motion 

of  the  body  is  a  plane  image  of  the  upward  motion. 

37.  The  distances  described  in  successive  seconds  (or 
other  equal  inter  rah  of  time)  by  a  body,  which  starts  from 
rest  and  is  uniformly  accelerated,  are  as  the  odd  numbers. 

The  distances  described  in  1,  2,  3, (w-1),  n  seconds 

are  £a(l)2,  £a(2)2,  £a(3)2 \a  (n-\)\\an\ 

.-.  the  distances  described  in  the  1st,  2nd,  3rd wth 

seconds  are  \a,  fa,  fa, |a(2ra-l).     Thus  the 

distance  described  in  the  nth  second,  where  n  is  any  num- 
ber whatsoever,  is  equal  to  $a(2n-l),  which  varies  as 
(2m -1)  the.Mth  odd  number. 


29 

Ex.  A  body  is  thrown  vertically  upwards  with  a  ve- 
locity of  3922  tachs;  find  1)  the  time  taken  to  describe 
58*83  metres,  2)  the  velocity  at  that  height,  3)  the  greatest 
height  reached,  4)  the  time  of  ascent,  5)  the  distance  de- 
scribed in  the  half  second  following  the  fifth  second  from 
the  instant  of  starting,  6)  the  distance  described  in  10 
seconds. 

1).  Let  /sec.  =  time  required.     From  equation  (5), 
5883  =  3922  *-J(980'5)*2,  .-.  t  =  2  or  6. 

2).  From  equation  (4),  velocity  at  tliQ  end  of  2  seconds 
=  3922-2  (980-5)  =  1961  tachs;  velocity  at  the  end  of  6 
seconds  =  3922  -  6  (980-5)  =  - 1961  tachs. 

We  thus  see  from  1)  and  2)  that  the  body  in  its  ascent 
has  risen  58'83  metres  in  2  seconds;  that  after  6  seconds  it 
is  at  the  same  height,  but  is  then  descending;  that  at  both 
times  the  speed  is  the  same. 

3).  From  2),  art.  36,  the  greatest  height  reached 

=■_;    „_.:  „  =  7844  centimetres. 
2  X  980-5 

4).  From  1),  art.  36,  the  time  of  ascent  =  =4  sec. 

980 'o 

5).  Distance  described  in  5^  seconds 

=  3922  ( V )  - 1(980-5)  x  ( V ) 2 

Distance  described  in  5  seconds  =  3922  X  5-^(9805)  X52 
.-.  the  required  distance 

=  3922x|- 1(^80-5) XV=  -612if  cm. 

The -sign  tells  us  that  the  body  has  descended  down 
this  distance  in  the  11th  half  second  of  its  motion. 

6).  From  equation  (5)  the  distance  required  is 
3922  X 10  -  1(980-5)  X 102  =  -  9805  cm. 

The -sign  tells  us  that  the  body  is  below  the  point  of 
projection. 


30 

Examination  IV. 

1.  Determine  the  equations  of  motion  of  a  body  uni- 
formly accelerated  in  the  direction  of  its  motion. 

2.  Deduce  the  formula  v2  =  u2  -2as. 

3.  A  body  starts  from  a  given  point  with  a  velocity  u. 
and  has  an  acceleration  a  opposite  in  direction  to  n;  de- 
termine 1)  after  what  time  will  the  velocity  be  zero?  2) 
After  what  time  will  the  body  return  to  the  point  of  pro- 
jection ?  3)  What  is  the  velocity  on  returning  to  the 
point  of  projection  ?  4)  What  is  the  greatest  distance 
travelled  over  '? 

4.  Give  the  three  equations  of  motion  of  a  body  let  fall 
to  the  ground,  neglecting  the  resistance  of  the  air. 

5.  Prove  that  the  distances  described  in  successive  equal 
intervals  of  time  by  a  body,  which  starts  from  rest  and  is 
uniformly  accelerated,  are  as  the  odd  numbers. 

6.  Trace  the  motion  of  a  body  projected  vertically  up- 
wards, and  shew  that  the  downward  return  motion  is  a 
plane  image  of  the  upward. 


Exercise  IV. 

In  the  following  crumples  the  directions  of  velocity 
nml  deceleration  are  the  same,  and  in  the  ease  of  bodies 
moving  vertically  the  resistance  of  the  air  is  neglected. 
In  all  examples  in  the  text-book  take  (/  =  980'5  or  32\  mi- 
les* otherwise  stated. 

Log  980-5  =  2-9914476,  log  321  =  15074061. 

1.  A  stone  is  observed  to  fall  to  the  bottom  of  a  pre- 
cipice in  9  seconds;  what  is  the  depth?     Given  f/  =  980. 

2.  The  height  of  the  piers  of  Brooklyn  Bridge  is  277 
feet:  how  long  will  a  stone  let  fall  from  the  top  take  to  fall 
into  the  water? 


31 

3.  A  body  is  projected  vertically  upwards  with  a  velo- 
city of  320  vels.  1).  How  long  will  it  rise  ?  2).  How  far 
will  it  rise  ?  3).  When  and  where  will  its  speed  be  150 
miles  per  hour  ?  4).  How  long  will  it  take  to  rise  1000 
ft.?  5).  What  will  its  speed  be  at  that  height?  6).  How 
far  will  it  travel  in  the  seventh  second?     Given  g  =  32. 

1.  A  body  starts  with  a  speed  of  1  metre  per  second, 
and  has  an  acceleration  of  10  tachs  per  second;  what  will 
its  speed  be  after  traversing  6^  metres? 

5.  How  long  would  a  body  which  is  projected  with  a 
downward  velocity  of  150  tachs  take  to  fall  through  15 
kilometres,  if  there  were  no  atmospheric  resistance? 

6.  The  speed  of  sound  in  air  is  constant,  and  at  10=  C. 
is  equal  to  33833  tachs.  The  depth  of  the  well  in  the  fort- 
ress of  Konigstein  in  Saxony  is  195  metres.  In  what  time 
should  the  splash  of  a  stone  dropped  into  the  well  be 
heard,  if  there  were  no  atmospheric  resistance  ? 

^7JWhen  a  bucket  of  water  is  poured  into  this  well,  the 
splash  is  heard  in  15  seconds;  what  is  the  average  accel- 
eration produced  in  the  water  by  the  resistance  of  the  air? 

8.  A  body  whose  acceleration  is  10,  traverses  6  metres 
in  10  seconds;  what  is  the  initial  speed? 

9.  A  body  uniformly  accelerated  moves  over  31'3  metres 
in  the  fourth  second  of  its  motion  from  rest;  find  the  ac- 
celeration. 

10.  A  person,  starting  with  a  velocity  of  1  metre  per 
second,  and  accelerating  his  velocity  uniformly,  traverses 
960  metres  in  a  minute;  find  his  acceleration. 

11.  A  body  starts  from  a  given  point  with  a  uniform 
velocity  of  9  kilometres  per  hour;  in  an  hoar  afterwards 
another  body  starts  in  pursuit  of  the  first  with  a  velocity 
of  2  metres  per  second,  and  an  acceleration  of  5  decatachs 
per  hour;  when  and  where  will  the  second  body  overtake 
the  first? 


32 

12.  A  body  projected  vertically  upwards  passes  a  point 
10  metres  above  the  point  of  projection  with  a  velocity  of 
9805  tachs;  how  high  will  it  still  rise,  and  what  will  be  its 
speed  on  returning  to  the  point  of  projection? 

13.  A  body  uniformly  accelerated  describes  65  metres 
and  4*5  metres  in  the  fourth  and  sixths  seconds  of  its  mo- 
tion; find  the  initial  speed  and  acceleration. 

14.  Two  bodies  uniformly  accelerated  in  passing  over 
the  same  distance  have  their  speeds  increased  from  a  to  bf 
and  from  c  to  <l  respectively;  compare  their  accelerations. 

15.  Find  the  acceleration  when  in  one-tenth  of  a  second 
a  speed  is  produced,  which  would  carry  a  body  over  10 
metres  every  tenth  of  a  second. 

16.  A  particle  is  projected  vertically  upwards,  and  the 
time  between  its  leaving  a  point  21  feet  above  the  point  of 
projection  and  returning  to  it  again  is  observed  to  be  10 
seconds;  find  the  initial  velocity.     Given  r/  =  32. 

17.  Two  bodies  are  let  fall  from  the  same  place  at  an 
interval  of  two  seconds;  find  their  distance  from  one  an- 
other at  the  end  of  five  seconds  from  the  instant  at  which 
the  first  was  allowed  to  fall. 

18.  Two  bodies  let  fall  from  heights  of  40  metres  and 
169  decimetres  reach  the  ground  simultaneously;  find  the 
interval  between  their  starting.     Given  g  =  980. 

19.  Two  bodies  start  from  rest  and  from  the  same  point 
on  the  circumference  of  a  circle;  the  one  body  moves  along 
the  circumference  with  uniform  angular  velocity  about 
the  centre,  and  the  other,  starting  at  the  same  time,  moves 
along  a  diameter  with  uniform  acceleration;  they  meet  at 
the  other  extremity  of  the  diameter;  compare  their  speeds 
at  that  point. 

20.  A  body,  starting  from  rest  with  an  acceleration  of 
20  tachs  per  second,  moves  over  10  metres;  find  the  whole 
time  of  motion,  and  the  distance  passed  over  in  the  last 
second. 


33 

21.  A  body  moves  over  9  ft.  whilst  its  velocity  increases 
uniformly  from  8  to  10  vels;  how  much  farther  will  the 
body  move  before  it  acquires  a  velocity  of  12  vels? 

22.  The  path  of  a  body  uniformly  accelerated  is  divided 
into  a  number  of  equal  spaces.  Shew  that,  if  the  times  of 
describing  these  spaces  be  in  A.P.,  the  mean  speeds  for 
each  of  the  spaces  are  in  H.P. 

23.  A  body  falling  freely  is  observed  to  describe  24^ 
metres  in  a  certain  second;  how  long  previously  to  this  has 
it  been  falling?     Given  g  =  980. 

24.  A  body  is  dropped  from  a  height  of  80  metres;  at 
the  same  instant  another  body  is  started  from  the  ground 
upwards  so  as  to  meet  the  former  half  way;  find  the  initial 
velocity  of  the  latter  body,  and  the  speeds  of  the  two 
bodies  when  they  meet. 

25.  A  body  has  a  uniform  acceleration  a.  If  p  be  the 
mean  speed,  and  q  the  change  of  speed  in  passing  over  any 
portion  s  of  the  path,  shew  that  pq  =  as. 

26.  A  body  uniformly  accelerated  is  observed  to  move 
over  a  and  b  feet  respectively  in  two  consecutive  seconds; 
find  the  acceleration. 


Answers. 
1.     3969m.  2.     415.  3.     10;  1600;  3&  or  16J, 

843|;  39  or  161;  19596;  112.  4.     150. 

5.     54-9.         6.     6-9.         7.     793.        8.     10.         9.    980. 
10.     50.  11.     4h.  18min.  59-8sec;  47849-6m. 

12.     49025;  9904-5.       13.   1000,-100.        14.    b^a2:d^c2. 
15.     105.        16.     164-15.        17.     7844.        18.     1. 
19.     ?r:4.        20.     10;  190.        21.     11.         23.     2. 
24.     2800:  2800,0.         26.     b— a. 


Chaptek  V. 
Inertia.         Mass. 

38.  Inertia  is  the  inability  of  a  body  to  alter  its  own 
condition  of  motion  or  rest.  If  a  body  be  at  rest,  it  re- 
mains so;  if  it  be  in  motion,  it  goes  on  moving  with  the 
same  velocity,  i.e.,  with  constant  speed  in  a  straight  line; 
and  if  it  be  rotating,  it  goes  on  rotating  with  the  same 
angular  velocity,  about  the  same  axis,  which  maintains  a 
constant  direction ;  unless  some  other  body  interfere  with 
it.  To  change  the  state  of  rest  or  motion  of  a.  body  re- 
quires the  presence  of  another  body.  The  term  force  is 
applied  to  the  action  of  a  body  in  altering  the  status  quo 
of  another  body. 

39.  Inertia  may  be  called  a  negative  property,  and  yet 
it  is  one  of  the  most  obtrusive  properties  of  matter.  It 
is  lucidly  illustrated  in  railway  and  horse-riding  accidents, 
in  vaulting,  jumping,  and  circus-riding,  in  shaking  the 
dust  from  off  a  book,  in  the  difficulty  of  driving  over 
smooth  ice,  and  in  the  action  of  a  fly-wheel,  which  is  used 
to  regulate  either  an  irregular  driving-power,  as  in  a  foot- 
lathe,  or  an  irregular  resistance,  as  in  a  circular  saw  cut- 
ting wood.  The  tendency  of  bodies  moving  in  circles,  to 
fly  off  at  every  instant  along  the  tangent,  commonly  but 
misleadingly  called  centrifugal  force,  is  just  inertia. 
Herein  we  have  an  explanation  of  the  spheroidal  form  of 
the  earth,  and  of  the  decrease  of  a  body's  weight,  as  we 
approach  the  equator.  On  letting  a  bullet  fall  from  the 
top  of  a  high  tower  or  down  a  deep  mine,  it  will,  on  account 
of  its  inertia,  be  found  to  fall  somewhat  to  the  east  of  the 
point  vertically  below  that  from  which  it  fell,  thus  afford- 
ing an  ocular  demonstration  of  the  earth's  rotation  from 
west  to  east.     The  rotations  of  the  earth  and  other  mem- 


35 

bers   of   the   solar   system    afford    beautiful   examples   of 

[inertia  as  regards  rotation.     The  constancy  of  direction  of 

the  earth's  axis,  (except  in  so  far  as  it  is  interfered  with 

by  the  sun  and  moon)  furnishes  the  most   important  step 

in  the  explanation  of  the  changes  of  the  seasons.     By  its 

inertia   that  interesting  physical  toy,  the  gyroscope,   will 

prove  that  it  is  the  earth  and  not  the  sphere  of  the  heavens 

which  daily  rotates.     The  same  principle,  applied  to  the 

j plane  of  oscillation  of  a  pendulum,  enabled  Foucault  to 

|give  one  of  the  most  convincing  experimental  proofs  of  the 

earth's  rotation  from  west  to  east. 

40.  Sir  Isaac  Newton  clearly  enunciated  the  inertia  of 
[matter  in  his  First  Dynamical  Law; 

Every  body  remain*  in  its  state  of  rest  or  of  uniform 
[motion,  except  in  so  far  as  it  may  he  compelled  by  im- 
| pressed  force  to  change  that  state. 

In  a  scholium  he  referred  to  inertia  as  regards  rotation. 
Here  indeed  there  is  a  difficulty,  for  evidently  the  individ- 
ual small  particles  of  the  rotating  body  move  in  circles, 
and  must  therefore  be  acted  on  by  forces  amongst  them- 
selves: else,  on  account  of  inertia,  they  would  move  in 
straight  lines.  However,  when  by  internal  forces  the 
relative  positions  of  the  particles  are  fixed,  the  body  will 
be  as  inert  in  its  rotation  as  in  its  motion  of  translation. 

41.  Every  body  offers  resistance  to  any  change  of  its 
state  of  rest  or  motion.  When  the  same  force  acts  on 
different  bodies  it  is  found  that  the  changes  from  the  pre- 
vious states  of  rest  or  motion  are  different,  and  this  fact 
is  expressed  by  saying  that  the  bodies  differ  in  mass. 
Mass,  thus,  is  a  property  in  which  bodies  may  differ,  just 
as  they  may  differ  in  colour,  volume,  or  weight.  It  might 
be  defined  as  the  dynamical  measure  of  a  body's  inertia. 
or  as  the  capacity  of  a  body  to  resist  change  of  state  of 
rest  or  motion. 


36 

42.  The  difference  in  mass  of  different  bodies  {e.g.  of 
balls  of  wood,  ivory,  lead,  and  iron,  of  different  radii)  may 
be  lucidly  illustrated  by  suspending  the  bodies  by  strings, 
and  allowing  the  same  spring,  bent  through  the  same 
angle,  to  act  upon  them  in  succession  so  as  to  give  the 
bodies  a  horizontal  motion.  It  will  be  found  that  the 
accelerations  imparted  will  be  very  different. 

The  accelerations  so  produced  would  be  the  same  if  one 
of  the  bodies  were  at  the  surface  of  the  moon,  another  at 
the  sun's  surface,  and  a  third  at  the  surface  of  Jupiter, 
where  their  weights  would  be  respectively  \th,  28  times, 
and  2|  times  as  great  as  at  the  earth's  surface. 

43.  How  is  mass  measured?  When  the  same  force  is 
applied  to  different  bodies,  the  masses  of  the  bodies  are 
defined  as  inversely  proportional  to  the  accelerations  pro- 
duced. 

Hence  if  the  same  force  acts  upon  two  bodies,  and  pro- 
duces equal  accelerations,  the  masses  of  the  bodies  are 
defined  as  equal  to  one  another  ;  but  if  the  accelerations 
be  in  the  ratio  of  m:n,  the  masses  are  defined  to  be  in  the 
ratio  of  n:m. 

The  C.  Gr.  S.  unit  of  mass  is  called  a  gram.  It  is  the 
mass  of  a  cubic  centimetre  of  water  at  4C  C  (under  the 
mean  atmospheric  pressure).  The  French  unit  of  mass  is 
the  kilogramme,  and  is  the  mass  of  a  litre  of  water  at  4°C. 
The  English  and  the  F.  P.  S.  unit  of  mass  is  a  pound 
(avoirdupois).  The  pound  was  chosen  perfectly  arbitrar- 
ily. The  present  standard  pound  is  a  cylinder  of  platin- 
um with  a  groove  near  one  end.  It  is  denoted  as  the  P. 
S.  or  Parliamentary  Standard,  and  is  carefully  preserved 
in  London.  The  unit  of  mass  is  the  third  of  the  funda- 
mental units  in  the  C.  G.  S.  and  F.  P.  S.  systems. 

44.  Let  it  be  observed  that  by  means  of  one  force  the 
masses  of  all  bodies  can  be  theoretically  determined. 
When  the  same  force  acts  upon  bodies  of  the  same  mate- 


37 

rial,  e.g.  two  pieces  of  iron  at  the  same  temperature,  it  is 
found  that  the  accelerations  are  inversely  as  their  vol- 
umes, (take  as  an  illustration  the  opening  of  doors  of  the 
same  kind  of  wood  but  of  different  sizes)  ;  but  not  so  for 
bodies  of  different  material,  (take  as  an  illustration  the 
opening  of  a  wooden  and  of  an  iron  door).  Hence  it 
follows  that  the  masses  of  bodies  of  the  same  materia] 
{and  at  the  same  temperature  and  press  are)  are  directly 
proportional  to  their  volumes,  but  not  so  for  bodies  of 
different  material. 

45.  These  facts  lead  to  the  consideration  of  density  and 
specific  mass.  The  density  of  a  substance  is  the  mass  per 
unit  of  volume.  Hence  in  using  C.  Gr.  S.  units  the  density 
of  water  at  4°  will  be  represented  by  1.  A  cub.  cm.  of 
gold  at  0C  is  found  to  be  193  grams,  of  rock-crystal  266 
grams,  of  mercury  136  grams,  of  sea-water  1027  grams,  of 
dry  air  (under  the  mean  atmospheric  pressure)  0'0012932 
gram.  These  facts  are  expressed  by  saying  that  the  den- 
sity of  gold  is  19*3,  of  rock-crystal  266,  of  mercury  136, 
of  sea-water  1-027,  of  dry  air  00012932. 

46.  The  density  of  water,  as  of  all  other  substances, 
varies  with  temperature,  and  (under  the  mean  atmospheric 
pressure)  is  a  maximum  at  4C  C.  Hence  it  is  that  in  de- 
fining unit  of  mass,  the  water  is  taken  at  this  tempera- 
ture. The  density  of  water,  as  of  all  liquids,  is  very  little 
changed  by  ordinary  changes  of  pressure,  so  that  it  is 
hardly  necessary  to  state,  in  defining  unit  of  mass,  that 
the  water  is  supposed  to  be  under  the  mean  atmospheric 
pressure,  the  changes  of  atmospheric  pressure  making  only 
immeasurably  small  changes  of  density. 

47.  The  density  of  a  body  may  be  uniform,  i.e.  every 
part  having  the  same  density,  or  it  may  be  variable.  In 
the  latter  case  we  may  speak  of  the  density  at  any  point 
of  the  body,  or  of  the  mean  density  of  the  whole  body. 


38 

48.  The  specific  mass  of  a  substance  is  the  ratio  of  the 
mass  of  any  volume  of  the  substance  to  the  mass  of  an 
equal  volume  of  water  at  4°C.  Whatever  units  be  used, 
the  specific  masses  of  substances  will  evidently  be  repre- 
sented by  the  same  numbers,  and  with  the  C.  G.  S.  units 
the  density  and  specific  mass  of  any  substance  will  be 
represented  by  the  same  number.  Hence  the  terms  density 
and  specific  mass  are  frequently  used  indiscriminately,  in 
the  sense  of  specific  mass,  and  almost  always  so  when 
F.  P.  S.  units  are  used. 

The  specific  volume  of  a  substance  is  the  ratio  of  the 
volume  of  any  mass  of  that  substance  to  the  volume  of  an 
equal  mass  of  water  at  4°C,  and  is  evidently  the  reciprocal 
of  the  specific  mass.  The  rarity  of  any  substance  or 
medium  is  the  volume  per  unit  of  mass.  Like  density  and 
specific  mass  the  terms  rarity  and  specific  volume  are 
generally  used  indiscriminately.  Thus  (Art.  45)  the  rarity 
or  specific  volume  of  dry  air  at  0°  is  773*3. 

49.  Using  C.G.  S.  units,  the  relation  between  the  mass 
(m),  the  volume  (F),  and  the  density  (d)  of  a  body  is  given 
by  the  equation  m=  Vd.  Using  F.P.S.  units,  ra=62'4  Vd 
expresses  the  same  relation,  since  a  cubic  foot  of  water  at 
4°  is  62'4  pounds  nearly.  In  the  above  equations  we  see 
what  an  immense  advantage  the  C.  G.  S.  system  has  over 
the  F.  P.  S.  system  of  units. 

50.  The  mass  of  a  body  is  sometimes  defined  as  the 
measure  of  the  quantity  of  matter  in  it,  or  as  the  dynam- 
ical measure  of  the  quantity  of  matter  in  it.  Since  we 
do  not  know  the  ultimate  nature  of  matter  this  can  hardly 
be  scientifically  correct.  We  only  know  the  properties  of 
matter,  and  can  only  measure  its  properties.  Why  then 
should  quantity  of  matter  be  measured  by  one  of  these 
properties,  mass,  rather  than  by  any  other.  We  might 
reason  thus:  when  the  same  quantity  of  heat  is  applied  to 
bodies  of  the  same  substance,  the  changes  of  temperature 


39 

produced  are  inversely  proportional  to  their  volumes;  but 
when  applied  to  bodies  of  different  substances,  the  changes 
of  temperature  are  not  inversely  proportional  to  their 
volumes.  We  express  this  fact  by  saying  that  bodies 
differ  in  thermal  capacity,  and  we  define  the  thermal 
capacities  as  inversely  proportional  to  the  changes  of  tem- 
perature produced.  Just  then  as  with  mass  we  might 
define  the  thermal  capacity  of  a  body  as  the  thermal 
measure  of  the  quantity  of  matter  in  it.  We  should  then 
find  the  thermal  measure  and  measurement  by  mass  were 
quite  different. 

So  long  as  we  are  dealing  with  bodies  of  one  substance 
there  are  many  ways  in  which  we  may  measure  quantity 
of  matter  quite  intelligibly,  e.g.  by  volume,  by  weighing 
in  the  same  place,  in  the  case  of  food  by  the  length  of 
time  it  will  supply  nourishment,  in  the  case  of  fuel  by  the 
amount  of  water  it  will  boil  away,  or  by  the  amount  of  oxy- 
gen gas  necessary  for  its  complete  combustion,  and  all 
these  measurements  would  be  found  to  agree  with  one  an- 
other as  well  as  with  the  measurement  by  mass.  But 
when  we  come  to  deal  with  bodies  of  different  substances, 
none  of  these  measurements  will  be  found  to  give  results 
consistent  with  one  another. 

51.  The  reason  doubtless  why  mass  is  stated  to  measure 
the  quantity  of  matter  in  a  body,  is  that  this  is  the  most 
familiar. and  most  easily  measured  of  the  few  properties 
of  matter  which  remain  measurably  invariable  through 
whatever  changes  the  body  may  pass.  Thus  whilst  by 
pressure,  motion,  heat,  chemical  action,  or  other  agencies, 
we  can  easily  alter  the  other  measurable  properties  of  a 
body,  such  as  its  volume,  weight,  elasticity,  or  thermal  capa- 
city, its  mass,  through  whatever  changes  the  body  may 
pass,  remains  unchanged.  This  may  be  clearly  illustrated 
by  many  experiments,  e.g.  by  dissolving  a  piece  of  sugar 
in  tea,  by  freezing  a  body  of  water,  by  mixing  alcohol  and 


40 

water,  and,  generally,  in  all  chemical  combinations. 
Whence  the  great  law  which  forms  the  foundation  of 
chemical  science,  the  Conservation  of  Mass  : — Through 
whatever  changes  matter  may  pass,  the  total  mass  remains 
unchanged.  Hence  the  total  mass  of  the  universe  is  in- 
variable. 


Examination  V. 

1.  Define  inertia,  and  state  the  different  forms  thereof. 

2.  Give  various  illustrative  examples  of  inertia. 

3.  What  is  centrifugal  force  ?     Suggest  a  better  name 
for  it,  and  give  illustrations  thereof. 

4.  How  may  the  earth's  rotation  from  west  to  east  be 
proved  by  ocular  demonstration  ? 

5.  Enunciate  Newton's  First  Dynamical  Law. 

6.  Define  mass.     How  is  it  measured  ? 

7.  Describe  a  simple  experiment  to  shew  difference  of 
mass  in  different  bodies. 

8.  Name  and  define  the  units  of  mass  in  the  C.  G.  S. 
and  F.  P.  S.  systems  of  units. 

9.  What  relation  exists  between  the  volumes  and  masses 
of  bodies  of  the  same  material  ?     How  is  this  proved  ? 

10.  Define  density,  specific  mass,  specific  volume,  and 
rarity.  Give  the  densities  of  a  few  common  substances, 
and  the  rarity  of  air. 

11.  Why  is  water  at  4°  taken  as  the  standard  substance 
in  measuring  mass  and  density?. 

12.  Give  algebraical  equations  connecting  the  mass, 
volume,  and  density  of  a  body.  In  the  case  of  a  body  of 
variable  density  how  do  you  express  the  relation? 

13.  Criticise  the  usual  definition  of  mass  as  the  measure 
of  the  quantity  of  matter  in  a  body.  / 

14.  How  did  the  above  definition  probably  arise? 

15.  Enunciate  the  principle  of  the  Conservation  of  Mass. 


41 

Exercise  V. 

1.  A  rectangular  block  of  limestone  is  2  metres  long, 
15  metre  broad,  and  1  metre  thick.  If  2-7  be  its  density, 
find  its  mass. 

2.  The  sides  of  a  canal  shelve  regularly  from  top  to  bot- 
tom. The  width  of  a  section  at  the  top  is  10  metres,  at  the 
bottom  5  metres,  and  the  depth  is  3  metres.  If  the  canal 
be  filled  with  water  to  a  depth  of  25  metres,  find  the  mass 
of  water  per  kilometre  of  length. 

3.  If  the  density  of  sea-salt  is  2-2  and  of  sea-water 
r027,  find  the  mass  and  volume  of  salt  obtained  in  evap- 
orating 100  litres  of  sea-water,  if  no  contraction  took  place 
in  solution. 

4.  The  density  of  copper  is  8*8,  of  zinc  7,  and  of  brass 
formed  from  these  8'4;  find  the  quantity  of  copper  in  100 
grams  of  brass. 

5.  The  mass  of  a  sphere  of  rock-crystal  is  400'5,  and 
its  radius  3*3;  find  its  density. 

6.  Find  the  mass  of  the  earth,  supposing  it  to  be  a 
sphere  of  radius  6371  kilometres,  and  of  mean  density  567. 

/7J Equal  masses  of  copper  and  tin,  whose  densities  are 
88  and  7-3,  are  melted  together;  what  would  be  the  density 
of  the  alloy  if  no  contraction  or  expansion  took  place? 

'8.  When  63  litres  of  sulphuric  acid,  whose  density  is 
1'84  is  mixed  with  24  litres  of  water,  the  volume  of  the 
mixture  is  86  litres;  find  the  mass  and  density  of  the 
mixture. 

9.  The  mass  of  a  nugget  of  gold-quartz  is  350,  and  its 
density  it  7'4;  find  the  mass  of  gold  in  it.     See  art.  45. 

10.  The  density  of  sea-water  is  1027;  100  litres  of  sea- 
water  are  frozen,  and  20  kilograms  of  ice  free  from  salt 
formed  therefrom;  what  is  the  density  of  the  residue? 

11.  What  is  the  density  of  mercury,  if  9  cubic  inches 
have  a  mass  of  4'42  lbs? 


42 

12.  The  density  of  milk  is  103;  how  much  water  must 
have  been  added  to  10  gallons  of  milk  to  reduce  its  density 
to  102. 

13.  From  the  summit  of  the  Eiffel  tower  at  Paris  (lat.  48: 
50'.  r/  =  981)  a  bullet  is  let  fall  300  metres  ;  neglecting  the 
resistance  of  the  air,  find  how  far  to  the  east  of  the  point, 
which  is  vertically  under  the  point  from  which  the  bullet 
was  dropped,  it  reaches  the  ground.  Will  the  atmosphere 
increase  or  diminish  the  eastward  deflection  '?     How  ? 

14.  When  a  vessel  is  filled  with  equal  volumes  of  two 
liquids,  the  density  of  the  mixture  is  9/8  of  what  it  is 
when  the  vessel  is  filled  with  equal  masses  of  the  same 
liquids  ;  find  the  ratio  of  the  densities  of  the  two  liquids. 

15.  Two  liquids  whose  densities  are  as  1:2  are  mixed  to- 
gether, (1)  by  masses  in  the  ratio  of  the  volumes  of  equal 
masses,  (2)  by  volumes  in  the  ratio  of  the  masses  of  equal 
volumes  ;  find  the  ratio  of  the  densities  of  the  mixtures. 


Answers. 

1.  8100  kilogrs.       2.     17708-3  tonnes.       3.     4950;  2250. 

4.  815.      5.     266.       6.     61418 XlO17  tonnes.       7.     7"98 

8.  139920;  1-63.       9.     260.       10.     1-034.        11.     136. 

12.  5  gals.       13.     11-23.       14.     1:2.       15.     18:25. 


Chapter  VI. 

Moment  urn.  Force. 

52.  The  momentum  of  a  particle  is  a  property  depend- 
ing upon  its  velocity  and  mass,  the  direction  of  momentum 
being  the  direction  of  motion,  and  the  magnitude  of 
momentum  being  defined  as  proportional  to  the  mass  and 
speed  conjointly.  The  term  quantity  of  motion  was  used 
by  Newton  for  momentum. 

To  vividly  realize  momentum  let  a  person  bathe  close 
to  a  waterfall,  say  200  ft.  high,  when  he  will  feel  the  <lroj)s 
of  water,  which  separate  from  the  main  mass,  strike  his 
body  as  if  they  were  sharp  stones.  If  he  attempted  to 
enter  the  main  mass  of  falling  water  he  would  be  roughly 
thrown  on  the  ground. 

53.  In  a  scientific  system  of  units,  the  unit  of  momen- 
tum is  best  defined  as  the  momentum  of  a  particle  of  unit 
mass  moving  with  unit  speed.  Hence  the  C.  G.  S.  unit  of 
momentum  is  a  gromUieh,  which  is  the  momentum  of  1 
gram  moving  with  a  speed  of  1  tach.  Similarly  the  F.P.S. 
unit  of  momentum  is  a  pound 'ret,  the  momentum  of  1 
pound  moving  with  a  speed  of  1  vel.  The  unit  of  momen- 
tum evidently  involves  each  of  the  three  fundamental 
units  of  length,  mass,  and  time,  the  first  two  directly  and 
the  third  inversely. 

The  equation  M  —  mr  expresses  the  numerical  relation 
between  the  momentum,  mass,  and  speed  of  a  moving 
particle. 

54.  The  time-rate  of  change  of  momentum  at  any  in- 
stant will  evidently  be  measured  by  the  acceleration  of  the 
moving  particle  at  that  instant,  and  its  mass  conjointly, 
and  is  called  the  acceleration  of  momentum. 


44 


( 


Force  is  that  aspect  of  any  external  influence  exerted 
on  a  body  which  is  manifested  by  change  of  momentum. 
Whenever  the  momentum  of  a  body  changes,  a  force  is 
said  to  act  on  the  body. 

If  a  definite  change  of  momentum  takes  place  in  an 
immeasurably  short  time,  {e.g.,  when  a  cricket  ball  is 
struck  by  a  bat),  the  action  is  called  an  impulse,  the  term 
force  being  usually  applied  when  a  finite  time  is  required 
to  produce  a  finite  change  of  momentum,  {e.g.  when  a 
body  falls  to  the  ground).  All  forces  can  be  conceived  to 
be  made  up  of  immeasurably  small  impulses,  just  as  a 
curved  line  can  be  conceived  to  be  made  up  of  immeasur- 
ably short  straight  lines. 

55.  An  impulse  is  measured  in  magnitude  and  direc- 
tion by  the  whole  change  of  momentum  produced.  A 
force  is  measured  in  magnitude  by  the  acceleration  of 
momentum,  and  its  direction  is  the  direction  of  the  change 
of  momentum.  This  is  what  Newtou  taught  in  his  Second 
Dynamical  Law: 

Change  of  momentum  is  proportional  to  the  impressed 
force  and  takes  place  in  the  direction  of  the  straight  line 
in  which  the  force  acts. 

By  impressed  force  Newton  meant  external  to  the  body 
concerned.  It  is  well  in  defining  force  to  avoid  the  word 
cause.  All  that  we  are  aware  of  is  a  change  of  momentum 
and  the  word  force  is  conveniently  used  as  a  measure  of 
the  rate  of  this  change.  Under  energy,  one  of  the  most 
important  properties  of  matter,  the  student  will  learn  that 
force  may  be  defined  as  the  space-rate  of  transference  of 
energy,  i.e.  the  rate  of  expenditure  of  energy  per  unit  of 
length. 

56.  The  unit  of  force  is  that  force  which  produces  unit 
of  momentum  per  unit  of  time.  Hence  the  C  G.  S.  unit 
of  force  is  that  force  which  produces  1  gramtach  per 
second,  or  that  force  which  acting  upon  a  particle  whose 


45 

mass  is  a  gram  gives  it  an  acceleration  of  1  tach  per 
second.  This  is  called  a  dune.  Similarly  the  F.P.S.  unit 
of  force  is  that  force  which  produces  1  poundvel  per 
second,  or  the  force  which  acting  upon  a  particle  whose 
mass  is  a  pound  gives  it  an  acceleration  of  1  vel  per 
second,  and  this  is  called  a  poundal. 

When  a  force  of  /  dynes  or  poundals  acts  upon  a 
particle  whose  mass  is  m  grams  or  pounds,  and  produces 
an  acceleration  of  a  tachs  or  vels  per  second,  the  equation 
which  expresses  the  numerical  relation  between/,  m  and  a  is 

/=  ma 

Force  like  velocity,  acceleration,  and  momentum,  is 
completely  represented  by  a  straight  line. 

57.  What  does  Newton's  second  dynamical  law  really 
teach  ? 

1).  It  defines  the  measurement  of  mass  and  force. 
Just  as  it  is  theoretically  possible  to  measure  all  masses 
by  means  of  one  force,  so  is  it  possible  to  measure  the 
magnitude  of  all  forces  theoretically  by  one  mass. 
When  different  forces  act  upon  the  same  body,  the 
magnitudes  of  the  forces  are  by  definition  directly 
proportional  to  the  accelerations  produced.  It  is  indeed 
evident  that  the  mass  of  any  body  is  measured  in  grams 
by  the  reciprocal  of  the  acceleration  in  tachs  per  second 
produced,  when  a  dyne  acts  upon  it  ;  and  any  force  is 
measured  in  dynes  by  the  acceleration  in  tachs  per  second 
produced,  when  it  acts  upon  a  body  whose  mass  is  a  gram. 
2)"  It  enunciates  the  important  experimental  fact:  With 
whatever  force  different  masses  be  measured,  and  with 
whatever  mass  different  forces  be  measured,  the  measure- 
ments will  always  be  alike.  3).  It  asserts  that  the  effect 
of  a  force  depends  in  no  way  upon  the  motion  of  the  body, 
and  that  when  more  than  one  force  is  acting  on  the  body, 
each  force  produces  its  effect  quite  independently  of  the 
others. 


46 

58.  It  has  been  pointed  out  (Art  38).  that  whenever  a 
force  acts,  there  are  always  two  bodies  concerned.  We 
generally  speak  of  one  of  the  two  as  receiving  a  change  of 
momentum,  and  of  the  other  as  being  concerned  in  the 
production  of  this  change.  Newton  clearly  pointed  out  in 
his  Third  Dynamical  Law  that  the  action  was  a  mutual 
one  ;  that  change  of  momentum  was  received  by  both 
bodies,  equal  in  magnitude  but  of  opposite  direction: 

To  every  action  there  is  always  an  equal  and  contrary 
reaction  ;  or  the  mutual  actions  of  any  two  bodies  are 
always  equal  (in  magnitude)  and  opposite  in  direction. 

The  word  force  is  properly  used  when  we  consider  the 
effect  of  the  action  between  any  two  bodies  in  changing  the 
momentum  of  one  of  them  only.  Stress  is  a  term  applied 
to  the  mutual  action  between  any  two  bodies,  when  there 
is  special  reference  to  the  dual  character  of  that  action, 
as  enunciated  by  Newton.  This  third  law  tells  us  that  all 
dynamical  actions  between  bodies  are  of  the  nature  of 
stresses.  When  a  body  falls  to  the  ground  under  the 
action  of  its  weight,  the  earth  rises  to  meet  it  with  an 
equal  momentum.  Since,  however,  the  mass  of  the  earth 
is  so  very  much  greater  than  that  of  any  body  on  its  sur- 
face, the  motion  of  the  earth  is  so  small  that  it  may  be 
neglected.  When  two  like  magnetic  poles,  free  to  move. 
arc  brought  near  one  another,  it  will  be  found  that  the 
repulsion  is  mutual.  WThen  the  loadstone  attracts  a  piece 
of  iron,  the  iron  attracts  the  loadstone  with  an  exactly 
equal  force.  When  the  table  is  pressed  by  the  hand,  we 
fee!  that  the  hand  is  likewise  pressed  by  the  table.  When 
a  horse  draws  a  canal  boat  by  means  of  a  stretched  rope, 
the  horse  is  drawn  backwards  with  as  great  a  force  as  the 
boat  is  drawn  forwards.  This  may  easily  be  proved  by 
cutting  the  rope,  when  immediately  the  horse  falls  for- 
wards. This  is  further  seen,  when  we  reflect  that  relatively 
to  the  boat  the  horse  does  not  move  at  all.     If   two    boats 


47 

are  floating  and  one  is  drawn  towards  the  other  by  means 
of  a  rope,  the  latter  is  also  drawn  towards  the  former  with 
an  equal  momentum  ;  i.e.  the  same  rope  is  pulling  both 
boats  at  the  same  time,  and  with  equal  force  but  in 
opposite  directions.  When  two  railroad  trains  or  other 
bodies  collide,  the  change  of  momentum  in  the  one  is  just 
equal,  and  opposite  indirection,  to  the  change  of  momentum 
in  the  other  whatever  be  the  original  direction  or  rate 
of  motion  of  either  train. 

59.  Since  momentum  has  direction  as  well  as  magni- 
tude, it  at  once  follows  from  the  above  law,  that  the  total 
momentum  of  two  bodies  is  not  altered  by  their  mutual 
action.  From  this  the  important  principle  called  the 
Conservation  of  Momentum  is  at  once  deduced: 

The  total  momentum  of  any  body,  or  system  of  bodies, 
cannot  be  altered  by  the  mutual  actions  of  its  several  parts. 

As  an  illustration  of  this  principle  let  us  consider  the 
kick  of  a  gun.  Here  we  have  a  system  consisting  of  3 
bodies,  the  gun,  the  gas  formed  from  the  gunpowder,  and 
the  ball ;  it  will  be  at  once  seen  that  the  backward  momen- 
tum of  the  gun  is  just  the  equivalent  of  the  forward 
momentum  of  the  ball. 

The  total  momentum  of  the  universe  is  a  constant 
quantity  is  an  immediate  deduction  from  the  same 
principle. 

60.  Different  names  are  given  to  different  aspects  of 
force,  such  as  pressure,  tension,  attraction,  weight,  repul- 
sion, friction. 

Pressure  calls  up  the  idea  of  pushing.  This  term  is 
applied  to  a  stress  between  particles  close  together,  when 
the  direction  of  each  force  is  towards  the  particle  acted 
upon,  eg.  the  pressure  of  a  fluid  on  the  containing  vessel. 

Tension  calls  up  the  idea  of  pulling.  This  term  is 
applied  to  a  stress  between  particles  close  together  when 


48 

the  direction  of  each  force  is  away  from  the  particle  acted 
upon,  e.g.  the  tension  of  a  stretched  cord. 

Attraction  is  a  term  applied  to  forces  exerted  between 
bodies,  when  there  is  no  sensible  material  medium  through 
which  the  force  is  exerted,  and  in  consequence  of  which 
the  bodies  approach  one  another.  The  force  between  two 
unlike  magnetic  poles  is  a  familiar  case  of  attraction. 

Weight,  a  well  known  form  of  attraction,  is  applied  to 
the  force  exerted  by  the  earth  on  any  body  at  its  surface. 
Forces  are  often  conveniently  measured  by  the  weights  of 
bodies  of  known  mass.  Thus,  when  a  force  of  p  grams  is 
spoken  of,  a  force  equal  to  the  weight  of  a  body  whose 
mass  is  p  grams  is  meant.  It  would  be  better  to  speak  of 
a  force  of  p  grams-weight. 

Repulsion  is  a  term  generally  applied  to  forces  between 
bodies,  when  there  is  no  sensible  material  medium  through 
which  the  force  is  exerted,  and  in  consequence  of  which 
the  bodies  recede  from  one  another.  The  force  between 
two  like  magnetic  poles  is  a  familiar  example  of  repulsion. 

Resistance  is  a  term  frequently  applied  to  any  force 
opposing  the  motion  of  a  body,  i.e.  producing  a  negative 
acceleration.  One  of  the  most  familiar  and  important  of 
such  resistances  is  the  ubiquitous  force  of  friction,  a  term 
applied  to  that  force  which  is  called  into  play,  when  one 
body  moves  or  tends  to  move  over  the  surface  of  another 
body.  It  is  principally  the  force  of  friction  which  a  loco- 
motive works  against  in  pulling  a  trai?!  along.  The  resist- 
ance which  bodies  experience  in  falling  through  the  air  is 
largely  the  force  of  friction  between  the  bodies  and  the 
aerial  particles  they  rub  against. 

61.  In  modern  nomenclature  the  science  of  force  is 
called  Dynamics.     It  is  divided  into  Statics  and  Kinetics. 

Statics  treats  of  equilibrium  or  the  balancing  of  forces. 
It  is  chiefly  concerned  in  determining  the  relations  which 
must  exist  amongst  a  set  of  forces  which  keep  a  body  at  rest. 


49 

Kinetics  investigates  the  forces  acting  on  bodies  having 
varying  motions.  The  exact  determination  of  the  motions 
of  the  Solar  System  is  the  grandest  problem  in  Kinetics, 
and  is  commonly  known  as  Physical  Astronomy. 

Kinematics  is  the  science  of  motion,  when  studied  with- 
out any  reference  to  mass.  It  forms  an  appropriate  intro- 
duction to  Kinetics.  Chapters  II.,  III.,  IV.  belong  to 
Kinematics. 

Mechanics  treats  of  the  construction  and  uses  of 
machines,  and  the  relations  of  the  forces  applied  to  them. 
It  forms  the  practical  side  of  Dynamics. 


Examination  VI. 

1.  Define  momentum  ;  name  and  define  the  unit  of 
momentum  in  the  C.G.S.  and  F.P.S.  systems  of  units  ;  and 
write  down  the  numerical  relation  between  momentum, 
mass,  and  speed. 

2.  Define  force  and  impulse,  and  give  the  measures  and 
units  of  these  in  the  two  systems  of  units. 

3.  Enunciate  Newton's  Second  Dynamical  Law,  and 
state  fully  all  that  it  teaches.  Express  the  law  in 
algebraical  form. 

4.  Enunciate  Newton's  Third  Dynamical  Law  and 
give  several  illustrations  thereof. 

5.  Enunciate  and  illustrate  the  Conservation  of 
Momentum. 

6.  Define  the  terms  pressure,  tension,  attraction,  weight, 
repulsion,  resistance,  friction. 

7.  What  is  meant  by  a  force  of  10  pounds,  or  a  force  of 
10  kilograms  ?     Give  better  expressions  for  these. 

8.  Define  the  terms  Dynamics,  Statics,  Kinetics,  Kine- 
matics, Mechanics. 

9.  How  can  momentum  be  strikingly  felt  ? 


50 


Exercise  VI. 
1.  A  kilodyne  acts  upon  a  body  at  rest  whose  mass  is 
50  grams  ;  find  the  speed  and  distance  passed  over  at  the 
end  of  10  seconds. 

2  A  body  whose  mass  is  5,  has  an  acceleration  2.  At 
one  instant  the  speed  is  10  ;  what  is  the  momentum  a 
minute  afterwards  ? 

3.  Find  the  acceleration  produced  by  a  megadyne  act- 
ing on  a  solid  sphere  whose  diameter  is  a  decimetre  and 
density  10. 

4.  A  force  of  50  kilodynes  acts  upon  a  body  which 
acquires  in  10  seconds  a  speed  of  a  kilotach  ;  find  the  mass 
of  the  body. 

5.  The  mean  radius  of  the  earth  is  20,902,000  feet,  its 
mean  density  567,  its  mean  distance  from  the  sun  927 
million  miles,  and  the  time  of  its  revolution  around  the 
sun  365j  days  ;  compare  its  momentum  with  that  of  a  train 
of  10,000  tons,  rushing  along  at  60  miles  an  hour. 

6.  The  distance  of  Jupiter  from  the  sun  is  5*2  times 
thai  of  the  earth,  its  period  1X'!21,  days,  its  mass  310  times 
that  of  the  earth  ;  compare  the  momenta  of  Jupiter  and 
of  the  earth. 

7.  A  body  of  10  grams  has  a  uniform  acceleration  of 
10  m.  per  min.  per  min.;  what  force  is  acting  upon  it  ? 

8.  A  body  acted  on  by  a  uniform  force  is  found  to  be 
moving,  at  the  end  of  the  first  minute  from  rest,  with  a 
speed  which  would  carry  it  through  20  kilometres  in  the 
next  hour  ;  compare  the  force  with  the  weight  of  the 
body  which  would  give  it  an  acceleration  g  —  9805. 

9.  A  kilogram  is  supported  by  a  string  20  m.  long. 
The  string's  mass  is  2  grams  per  metre.  Find  the  tension 
at  the  middle  point,  and  at  5  decim.  from  the  upper   end. 

10.  Compare  the  momentum  of  a  man,  whose  mass  is 
150  lbs.  and  latitude  that  of  Kingston,  Ont.  (44s  13'), 
arising  from  the  earth's  rotation,  with  that  of  a  steamship 


51 

pf  10,000  tons,  going  at  the  rate  of  15  miles  an  hour.     A 
(sidereal  day  =  86.164'1  sec.     See  also  ex.  5. 

11.  A  body,  acted  on  by  a  force  of  100  kilodynes,  has 
}!its  speed  increased  from  6  to  8  kilometres  per  hour  in 
Jpassing  over  84  metres  ;  find  the  mass  of  the  body. 

12.  A  body  of  1  kilogram  is  acted  on  by  a  uniform 
[force  in  the  direction  of  its  motion,  and  is  found  to  pass 
lover  905  and  805  cm.  in  the  10th  and  20th  second  of  its 
Imotion  from  rest  ;  find  the  force  acting  upon  it  and  its 
•initial  speed. 

13".  Two  bodies,  acted  on  by  equal  forces,  describe  the 
pame  distance  from  rest,  the  one  in  half  the  time  the  other 
does  ;  compare  their  final  speeds  and  momenta. 

•  14.  Two  bodies  of  equal  mass  uniformly  accelerated 
ijfrom  rest,  describe  the  same  distance,  the  one  in  half  the 
Itime  the  other  does;  compare  the  forces  acting  on  the  bodies. 

^15J  Two  balls,  one  of  silver  and  the  other  of  ivory, 
iwhose  diameters  are  as  1  to  2,  are  subjected  to  equal 
fimpulses  ;  the  speeds  produced  are  as  22  to  15  :  compare 
[the  densities  of  silver  and  ivory. 

16.  If  a  ship  be  sailing  with  uniform  velocity,  what 
Srelation  must  exist  between  the  driving  force  and  the 
iresistances  of  the  air  and  water  ? 

17.  The  density  of  lead  is  11*4  and  of  cork  024.  Two 
| balls  of  these  substances,  whose  diameters  are  as  1  to  10. 
jare  acted  upon  by  equal  forces  during  the  same  time  ; 
1  compare  their  momenta  and  speeds. 


Answers. 

1.  200;  10m.         2.     650.        3.     191.        4.     500. 

5.  74937  X101H.        6.     1359:10.        7.     25/9. 

8.  1 :  105-894.         9.     1020  grs.  -  wt. ;  1039  grs.  -  wt. 

10.  1:2685.       11.    77760.      12.    10  kilodynes;  1  kilotach. 

13.  2:1;  1:2.         14.     4:1.         15.    60:11.         16.    Equal. 

17.  Equal:  400:19. 


Chapter  VII. 

Weight.         Gravitation. 

62.  Weight  is  the  attraction  of  the  earth  for  every  body 
on  its  surface,  in  virtue  of  which  any  body,  unless  it  is 
supported,  falls  to  the  ground.  It  is  also  called  the  force 
of  gravity.  According  to  their  weights  bodies  are  called 
heavy  or  light.  All  bodies  at  the  same  place  are  found  to 
fall  in  the  same  direction  relatively  to  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  and  bodies  falling  in  contiguous  places  (practically. 
within  a  decametre  of  one  another)  fall  in  parallel  straight 
lines.  The  direction  in  which  a  body  falls  at  any  place  is 
called  the  vertical  direction  at  that  place,  and  is  easily 
found  by  means  of  a  plumb-line.  Any  direction  at  right 
angles  to  the  vertical  is  called  horizontal.  The  surface  of 
any  liquid  (practically,  within  an  are  of  area),  at  rest 
relatively  to  the  earth,  is  a  horizontal  plane,  except  just 
where  it  meets  the  vessel  containing  it. 

63.  When  different  particles  fall  at  the  same  place  and 
in  vacuo,  the  vertical  acceleration  is  found  to  be  the  same 
for  all.  This  is  proved  by  the  guinea  and  feather  experi- 
ment. A  simple  but  very  instructive  experiment  which 
illustrates  this  fact,  may  be  made  by  cutting  out  a  piece  of 
paper  just  sufficient  to  cover  the  mouth  of  a  tin  lid  of  a 
small  box,  and  then  allowing  the  lid  and  piece  of  paper  to 
fall  simultaneously  from  the  same  level,  1)  when  they  are 
apart.  2)  when  the  paper  covers  the  mouth  of  the  lid. 
Hence  (Art.  56)  we  deduce  the  very  important  fact: 

The  masses  of  bodies  are  directly  proportional  to  their 
weights  at  the  same  place. 

w=mg,   g  is  constant,    .'.  moc  ic 

64.  The  following  extract  from  Lucretius,  De  rerum 
natura,  shows  that  the  fact,   that  all  bodies   would  fall 


53 

equally  fast  in  vacuo,  was  believed  in,  though  not  proved, 
2000  years  ago: 

In  water  or  in  air  when  weights  descend, 

The  heavier  weights  more  swiftly  downwards  tend; 

The  limpid  waves,  the  gales  that  gently  play, 

Yield  to  the  weightier  mass  a  readier  way; 

But  if  the  weights  in  empty  space  should  fall, 

One  common  swiftness  we  should  find  in  all. 

65.  Weight  is  measured  like  any  other  force  in  dynes 
or  poundals.  Thus  the  weight  of  a  body  whose  mass  is  1 
gram  is  g  or  980'5  dynes,  and  the  weight  of  a  pound  of 
matter  is  g  or  32^  poundals.  Forces  are  often  conveniently 
measured  in  terms  of  the  weights  of  known  masses.  Thus 
we  read  of  a  force  of  a  kilogram-weight  or  a  force  of  10 
lbs.  wt.,  and  these  expressions  are  generally  abbreviated 
into  a  force  of  a  kilogram  or  a  force  of  10  lbs.  The 
measure  of  a  force  in  terms  of  weight  is  called  its  gravita- 
tion measure,  that  in  dynes  or  poundals  being  called  in 
contradistinction  its  absolute  measure.  Since  g  varies 
with  latitude,  it  is  evident  that  the  gravitation  measure  of 
a  force  has  not  a  definite  value,  unless  the  place  be  stated. 
The  dyne  or  poundal  on  the  other  hand  is  independent  of 
place  and  time,  and  is  hence  called  an  absolute  unit. 

66.  The  simple  relation  between  the  weights  of  bodies 
at  the  same  place  and  their  masses  gives  the  best  practical 
method  of  measuring  the  masses  of  bodies,  as  is  done  in  a 
common  balance.  Observe  that  in  a  common  balance,  by 
comparing  the  weights  of  bodies  with  those  of  standard 
masses,  we  really  measure  mass;  whereas  in  a  spring  bal- 
ance we  directly  measure  weight. 

The  law  which  explains  to  us  the  measurement  of 
weight  by  means  of  a  spring  balance  is  known  as  Hooke's 
law:  The  extension,  compression,  or  distortion  of  a  solid 
body,  icithin  the  limits  of  elasticity,  or  the  compression  of 


54 

a  liquid,  is  directly  proportional  to  the  force  which  pro- 
duces it. 

67.  The  direct  proportionality  between  the  masses  of 
bodies  and  their  weights  explains  why  mass  and  weight 
are  constantly  confounded  with  one  another.  The  follow- 
ing illustrations  in  which  these  two  properties  of  matter 
are  contrasted,  will  assist  the  student  to  apprehend  their 
difference: 

1.  a).  The  mass  of  a  body  is  the  same  at  whatever  part 
of  the  earth's  surface  it  be. 

6).  The  weight  changes  with  change  of  place,  and  is 
different  at  the  Equator,  at  either  Pole,  or  at  the  summit 
of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  from  what  it  is  in  the  class-room. 

2.  a.)  The  opening  of  a  room  door  is  essentially  a 
question  of  mass  ;  and,  however  heavy  the  door  may  be,  if 
the  hinges  are  truly  vertical  and  well  oiled,  a  small  child 
may  open  it,  though  slowly. 

6).  If  the  same  door  formed  the  lid  of  a  box,  and  swung 
on  horizontal  hinges  well  oiled,  the  child  could  not  open 
it,  unless  he  had  strength  enough  to  exert  muscular  force 
equal  to  at  least  half  the  weight  of  the  door. 

In  either  case  the  child  has  to  overcome  the  force  of 
friction,  which,  though  greater  in  the  first  than  in  the  sec- 
ond case,  is  in  either  case  small. 

3.  a).  In  moving  a  cart  along  a  level  road  the  horse 
has  to  exert  a  greater  force  at  starting  than  afterwards, 
because  he  has  to  exert  force  to  give  the  mass  a  given 
velocity,  i.e.  to  produce  momentum.  After  having  started 
he  has  only  to  balance  the  force  of  friction. 

b).  When,  however,  he  comes  to  a  hill  he  has  again  to 
put  forth  his  strength,  for  now  he  has,  in  addition  to  the 
force  of  friction,  to  overcome  part  of  the  weight  oi  the  cart, 

4.  «).  The  action  of  a  fly-wheel,  or  of  a  small  hammer, 
depends  entirely  upon  its  mass. 


55 

6).  The  action  of  a  large  steel  hammer,  such  e.g.  as  the 
125  ton  hammer  at  Bethlehem,  Pennsylvania,  worked  by 
steam,  and  used  in  shaping  large  and  massive  bodies, 
depends  essentially  upon  its  weight. 

5.  a) .  In  athletic  sports  the  "  long  jump  "  is  essentially 
a  question  of  mass. 

b).  In  the  "  high  jump  "  weight  in  addition  has  to  be 
considered.  Hence  the  actual  distance  of  the  high  jump 
is  never  so  great  as  that  of  the  long  jump. 

6.  a).  In  an  undershot  water-wheel  the  miller  depends 
upon  the  momentum  (and  hence  also  the  mass)  of  the 
running  water  to  drive  the  wheel. 

b).  In  an  overshot  water-wheel  he  depends  upon  the 
weight  of  the  water  which  enters  the  buckets  of  the  wheel. 
68.  How  is  g,  the  acceleration  due  to  the  force  of  gravity, 
at  any    place  measured  ?     The  most  accurate  method  of 
finding  this  important  physical  quantity  is  by  means  of 
pendulum  experiments.     There  is,  however,  one  method  of 
finding  a  fairly  accurate  value  of  g,  which  at  this  stage  the 
student  can  understand.     This  is  by  means  of  the  well- 
known    physical    instrument   called    Attwood's    machine. 
The  essential  part  of  the  apparatus  is  a   grooved   wheel 
which  turns  upon  an  axle,  each  end  of  which  rests  on  two 
other  wheels  called  the  friction  wheels, so  that  the -friction 
on  the  axle  of  the  first  wheel  is  reduced  to  a  minimum  ; 
over  this  wheel  passes  a  fine  thread  connecting  two  bodies 
of  different  weights.     If  m  and  m!  be  their  masses,  and  m 
be  the  greater,  the  bodies  will    move  on  account   of  the 
greater  weight  of  m  with  an  acceleration  equal  to  (m  -  m')  g 
-T- (m-\-m'),  if  we  neglect  friction  and  the  masses  of  the 
wheels  and  thread.     This    acceleration  can    evidently  be 
made  as  small  as  the  experimenter  pleases,  by  making  the 
difference  between  m  and  m'  small  enough.  By  a  clock  and 
suitable  adjuncts    the  acceleration  of  the  moving  bodies 
can  be  accurately  measured,  and  therefore  g  approximately 
determined. 


56 

The  following  values  of  g  at  the  sea-level  have  been 
determined  by  experiment  and  calculation  : 

Latitude.  Value  of  g. 

Equator 0=  0' .978-1 

Sydney,  N.S.W 33°51' 979-6 

Tokyo 35°40' 979-8 

Washington 38°54' 980-1 

Rome 41=51' 9803 

Kingston,  Out 44c13' 980-5 

paris 18°50 980-9 

London 51c30' 981-2 

Berlin 52°30 981-3 

Edinburgh 55°57' 981 -5 

St.  Petersburgh 59°55' .981-9 

Pole 90=  0' 9831 

From  the  above  values  of  g  it  is  seen  that  the  maxi- 
mum variation  over  the  earth's  surface  is  about  \  p.c.  of 
the  mean  value. 

69.  The  profound  investigations  of  Sir  Isaac  Newton 
into  the  attractions  between  a  few  of  the  larger  particles 
of  matter  in  the  universe,  in  order  to  explain  the  motions 
of  the  planets  and  their  satellites,  and  especially  the 
motion  of  the  moon,  the  nearest  neighbour  in  the  universe 
to  our  own  abode  the  earth,  led  this  remarkable  philos- 
opher to  the  inevitable  conclusion  that  it  is  the  weight  of 
the  moon  which  keeps  her  revolving  around  the  earth,  and 
that  weight  is  but  a  particular  case  of  gravitation,  which 
pervades  the  whole  universe,  and  which  acts  according  to 
the  following  law. 

Law   of   Universal  Gravitation:      Every  particle  of. 
matter  in  the  universe  attracts  every  other  with  a  force, 
whose  direction  is  that  of  the  line  joining  the  particles,  and 
whose  magnitude  is  directly  as  the  product  of  their  masses 
au<l  inversely  as  the  square  of  their  distance. 


57 

Weight  is  thus  only  a  particular  case  of  a  force  which 
has  been  found  to  govern  the  motions  of  every  body  in  the 
universe.  Since  Newton  published  his  law  to  the  world, 
its  truth  has  been  confirmed  by  every  astronomer  who  has 
lived  after  him.  By  means  of  it,  not  only  have  the  mi- 
nutest perturbations  in  the  motions  of  the  heavenly  bodies 
been  rationally  explained,  but  eclipses,  transits,  return  of 
comets,  and  other  heavenly  phenomena  have  been  pre- 
dicted years  before  they  took  place,  and  actually  did  take 
place  a  few  seconds  within  the  times  predicted.  The 
nautical  almanac,  which  guides  our  ships  across  trackless 
oceans,  is  but  a  book  of  predictions  depending  on  the 
truth  of  this  law.  A  great  triumph  in  its  application  was 
the  discovery  of  Neptune,  the  most  distant  planet  of  our 
solar  system,  which,  though  invisible  to  the  naked  eye, 
was  discovered  by  mathematical  calculations,  which  in- 
structed the  astronomer  how  to  direct  his  telescope.  Nor 
is  this  law  confined  to  our  own  small  solar  system,  but 
extends  to  systems  millions  of  millions  of  millions  of  miles 
beyond  our  own,  where  not  only  does  satellite  revolve 
around  planet,  and  planet  around  sun,  but  where  one  sun 
revolving  around  another  has  its  motions  governed  by  this 
same  grand  law. 

70.  We  may  express  the  law  algebraically  by  the  for- 
mula f—G. — ;— ,  where  m  and  m'  are  the   masses  of  two 

particles,  r  their  distance  apart,  and  /  the  gravitation  be- 
tween them.  G  is  a  constant,  and  measures  the  gravitation 
between  two  particles,  each  of  unit  mass,  and  unit  distance 
apart.  To  determine  G,  in  C.  Gr.  S.  measure,  we  may 
observe  that,  by  comparing  the  attraction  of  the  whole 
earth  with  that  of  a  large  leaden  ball,  and  by  other  means, 
the  mean  density  of  the  earth  has  been  calculated  to  be 
5"67.  Hence,  taking  the  earth's  mean  radius  r  to  be  6,371 
kilometres,  and  the  mean  attraction  of  the  earth  for  a  gram 


58 

of  matter  at  the  sea-level  (allowing  for  centrifugal  force) 
to  be  982"3  dynes,  we  get 

982-3  =  G.  i^L?!*?"?7  =  G  |  n X 637,100,000 x 5-67 

.-.  G=6-5xl0-8 
Hence  two  particles,  one  centimetre  apart,  and  each  of  one 
gram  mass,  attract  one  another  with  a  force  of  6*5  X  10-8 
dyne. 

Examination  VII. 

1.  Define  weight.  By  what  other  name  is  it  known  ? 
How  is  the  direction  of  weight  practically  found  ? 

2.  How  is  it  proved  that  g  is  the  same  for  all  bodies  at 
the  same  place? 

3.  Define  the  terms  vertical  and  horizontal,  and  give  an 
illustration  of  each. 

4.  Prove  that  the  weights  of  bodies  at  the  same  place 
are  directly  proportional  to  their  masses. 

5.  Explain  wh-at  is  meant  by  an  absolute  unit  of  force, 
and  express,  in  absolute  units,  forces  of  a  pound-weight 
and  of  a  kilogram-weight. 

6.  How  would  you  prove  to  a  person  that  the  weight  of 
a  body  is  less,  the  nearer  it  is  to  the  equator? 

7.  How  are  mass  and  weight  practically  measured? 

8.  (iive  illustrations  of  weight  and  mass,  which  contrast 
with  one  another,  to  shew  the  difference  between  these  two 
properties  of  matter. 

9.  How  is  the  value  of  g  experimentally  determined? 
Describe  the  essential  parts  of  Attwood's  machine. 

10.  Enunciate  the  law  of  universal  gravitation,  and 
shew  how  to  determine  approximately  the  gravitation 
between  two  grams  of  matter  at  the  distance  of  a  centi- 
metre from  one  another. 


59 

11.  Give  the  values  of  (j  at  the  Equator,  Kingston  Out., 
Paris,  and  the  North  Pole,  true  to  a  decitach  per  second. 

12.  Enunciate  Hooke's  Law,  and  apply  it  to  the  spring 
balance. 

13.  If  a  merchant  buys  goods  in  London  by  means  of 
a  spring  balance,  and  with  the  same  balance  sells  in  King- 
ton Ont.,  will  he  gain  or  lose  in  the  transaction  ?  Why  ? 
By  how  much  p.c.  ? 

14.  Show  that  a  poundal  is  nearly  half  an  ounce-weight; 
and  that  a  dyne  is  nearly  a  milligram-weight. 

Exercise  VII. 
1.  A  body  whose  mass  is  10  grams  is  falling  in    vacuo; 
what  is  the    force  acting  on  it,  and  its  momentum  at  the 
end  of  10  seconds  from  rest? 

(%)  A  force  of  50  grams  weight  acts  upon  a  body  which 
acquires  in  10  seconds  a  speed  of  3922  tachs;  find  the 
mass  of  the  body. 

3.  A  force  produces  in  a  sphere  of  radius  10  cm.  and 
density  10  an  acceleration  of  100  tachs  per  second  ;  find 
what  weight  the  force  could  balance. 

4.  If  250  lbs.  be  hung  to  the  lower  end  of  a  rope  80  ft. 
long,  find  the  tensions  at  the  ends,  the  middle  point,  and 
20  ft.  from  the  upper  end,  the  mass  of  the  rope  being  4  oz. 
per  foot. 

5.  Jin  Attwood's  machine,  if  10  kilograms  be  the  mass  of 
one  Taody,  and  15  kilograms  that  of  the  other  ;  find  the  ac- 
celeration of  momentum,  and  the  speed  at  the  end  of  two 
seconds. 

(5.  A  force  of  1^  pounds-weight  acts  upon  a  mass  <>f  '2 
pounds  ;  what  is  the  speed  after  traversing  a  mile  ? 

7.  A  mass  of  10  pounds  is  acted  on  by  a  uniform  force, 
and  in  4  seconds  passes  over  200  feet  ;  express  in  gravita- 
tion measure  the  force  acting. 


60 

8.  If  the  earth's  mean  radius  be  20,900,000  feet  and 
the  mean  attraction  of  the  earth  for  a  pound  of  matter  at 
the  sea  level  be  32'23  poundals,  find  the  gravitation 
between  two  pounds  of  matter  one  foot  apart. 

9.  In  Attwood's  machine  one  mass  is  known  to  be  10 
lbs.,  and  the  distance  described  in  2  sec.  is  found  to  be  16 
ft.  1  in.;  find  the  other  mass. 

10.  Find  the  diameters  of  two  equal  spheres  of  gold, 
such  that  the  gravitation  between  them,  when  they  just 
touch,  is  a  dyne. 

11.  Find  the  unit  of  time,  if  a  metre  be  the  unit  of 
length,  a  gram  the  unit  of  mass,  and  a  gram-weight  the 
unit  of  force,  in  a  scientific  system  of  units. 

12.  Find  the  unit  of  length,  if  a  second,  gram,  and 
gram-weight  be  the  units  of  time,  mass,  and  force. 

13.  Find  the  unit  of  mass,  if  a  second,  centimetre,  and 
gram-weight  be  the  units  of  time,  length  and  force. 

14.  A  sphere  of  rock-crystal  of  density  2*66  has  a  diam- 
eter 65  cm.;  find  its  volume,  mass,  and  weight  at  Rome. 

15.  A  body  of  6  lbs.  pulls  by  its  weight  another  body 
of  4  lbs.  along  a  smooth  horizontal  table  ;  find  the  time 
taken  to  move  through  965  ft.  from  rest,  and  the  distance 
passed  over  in  the  last  second. 

16.  Find  the  tensions  of  the  three  parts  of  a  string, 
which  supports  at  different  heights  bodies  of  12,  6,  and  4 
lbs.  respectively. 

17.  Oxygen  combines  chemically  with  hydrogen  to  form 
steam  in  the  proportion  of  8  parts  by  mass  of  oxygen  to  1 
of  hydrogen.  If  the  gases  be  weighed  by  means  of  a 
spring  balance  graduated  at  Edinburgh,  how  many  milli- 
grams-weight of  oxygen  at  the  Ecpaator  will  combine  with 
100  milligrams-weight  of  hydrogen  at  Edinburgh  to  form 
steam? 


61 

18.  Determine  the  mass  of  steam  so  formed,  and  its 
weight  at  Kingston  Ont.,  as  indicated  on  the  above  spring 
balance. 

19.  Answer  the  above  (17  and  18)  when  the  gases  are 
weighed  in  a  common  balance,  and  explain   your  answers. 

/20J  If  a  kilogram  be  placed  on  a  horizontal  plane,  which 
is  made  to  descend  vertically  with  an  acceleration  of  100 
tachs  per  second;  find  in  gravitation  measure  the  pressure 
on  the  plane. 

21.  If  10  lbs.  be  placed  on  a  horizontal  plane,  which  is 
made  to  ascend  vertically  with  an  acceleration  of  20  vels 
per  sec;  find  in  lbs.-wt.  the  pressure  on  the  plane. 

22.  If  the  speed  of  each  of  the  bodies  in  Attwood's 
machine  be  20  vels,  when  they  are  at  the  same  height 
above  the  ground,  and  if  at  that  instant  the  string  be  cut, 
find  how  far  apart  the  bodies  will  be  in  5  seconds. 

23.  If  in  ex.  20  and  21  the  motions  be  vertical  velocities 
of  100  tachs  and  20  vels  respectively,  instead  of  accelera- 
tions, find  the  pressures  on  the  planes. 

24.  One  spring  is  stretched  2  cm.  for  every  kilogram 
appended  to  it;  another.  4  cm. ;  if  4  kilograms  be  appended 
to  both,  how  far  will  they  both  be  stretched? 


Answeks. 

1.  9805;  98050.        2.     12500.        3.     4272  grams. 

4.  250,270,260,  and  265  lbs.  wt.        5.     4902500;  392-2. 

6.  1427.        7.    7-772  lbs.-wt.        8.    104X10-°  poundal. 

9.  6  or  16|  lbs.         10.     197  cm.         11.     032  sec. 

12.  980-5  cm.         13.     9805  grams. 

14.  1438;  382-5;  374955.         15.     10;      18335. 

16.  22,10,  and  4  lbs.-wt.        17.     797-2. 

18.  9decigrs.:  899-1  milligrs.         20.     898-01  grs.-wt. 

21.  16-22.         22.    200  ft.         24.     5^  cm. 


Chapter  VIII. 
A  rch  imedes"  Principle. 

71.  Since  the  weights  of  bodies  at  the  same  place  are 
directly  proportional  to  their  masses,  and  since  different 
bodies  differ  in  their  specific  masses,  therefore  they  will 
also  have  different  specific  weights,  or,  as  they  are  also 
called,  specific  gravities. 

The  specific  weight  of  a  body  is  the  ratio  of  its  weight 
to  the  weight  of  an  equal  volume  of  water  at  4°  C  (its 
maximum  density  point)  at  the  same  place. 

Specific  weight,  being  a  ratio  of  quantities  of  the  same 
kind,  viz.  weight,  is  like  angle  and  specific  mass  merely  a 
number,  and  is  independent  of  all  units. 

The  specific  weight  of  water  at  4°  C  will  evidently  be 
represented  by  unity,  and  it  is  evident  that  the  numbers 
which  represent  the  specific  mass  and  specific  weight  of 
the  same  substance  are  the  same. 

In  the  case  of  a  body  whose  specific  weight  is  not  uni- 
form throughout,  the  above  definition  gives  the  mean 
specific  weight  of  the  body. 

72.  The  most  convenient  methods  of  determining  the 
specific  weights  of  liquid  and  solid  bodies  depend  upon 
the  Principle  of  Archimedes  : 

Every  hod//  immersed  in  a  fluid  is  subjected  to  a 
vertically  upward  pressure  equal  to  the  weight  of  the  fin  id 
displaced. 

The  truth  of  this  principle  is  at  once  seen  when  we 
think  that,  if  the  body  were  replaced  with  a  portion  of 
fluid  of  the  same  kind  without  any  other  change,  the 
weight  of  the  fluid  would  be  supported.  Its  truth  is 
sensibly  felt  in  bathing  on  a  shingly  beach,  when  it  is 
found  that,  the  deeper  one  enters  the   water,  the  less  are 


63 

the  soles  of  the  feet  hurt  by  the  pressure  of  the  stones  on 
[them.  It  can  be  proved  directly  by  immersing  in  a  liquid, 
i  body,  whose  volume  can  be  measured  exactly  (such  as  a 
3ube,  cylinder,  or  sphere),  observing  the  apparent  loss  of 
weight  of  the  body,  and  then  weighing  the  amount  of 
[liquid  displaced.  In  the  case  of  a  floating  body,  the 
weight  of  fluid  displaced  will  be  found  to  be  equal  to  the 
antire  weight  of  the  floating  body.  Convenient  experi- 
ments to  show  these  facts  are  given  in  books  on  Experi- 
mental Physics. 

According  to  Newton's  Third  Law  (Art.  58),  the  fluid, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  subjected  to  a  vertically  downward 
[pressure  equal  to  the  weight  of  the  fluid  displaced.  This 
3an  easily  be  shewn  experimentally  by  balancing  a  vessel 
containing  water  in  a  common  balance,  and  immersing  in 
the  water  a  body  held  by  a  cord.  The  equilibrium  will  be 
immediately  destroyed,  and  the  force  necessary  to  restore 
equilibrium  will  be  found  to  be  equal  to  the  weight  of 
water  displaced. 

73.  The  occasion  which  led  Archimedes  to  the  dis- 
covery of  this  principle  was  the  giving  to  him  by  King 
Hiero  of  Syracuse  the  problem: — to  discover  the  amount 
of  alloy  which,  the  king  suspected,  had  been  fraudulently 
put  into  a  crown,  which  he  had  ordered  to  be  made  of  pure 
gold.  It  is  said  that  Archimedes  saw  the  solution  of  the 
problem  one  day  on  entering  the  bath,  and  probably  it  was 
by  his  observation  of  the  buoyancy  of  the  water.  It  may 
have  been,  however,  by  his  noticing  that  the  volume  of  the 
water  which  he  displaced  would  just  be  equal,  by  the 
principle  of  impenetrability  (Art  2).  to  the  volume  of  the 
immersed  part  of  the  body.  Indeed,  one  of  the  most  im- 
iportant  applications  of  the  principle  of  impenetrability  is 
to  determine  the  volume  of  any  irregularly  shaped  body, 
by  immersing  it  in  a  liquid  contained  in  a  measuring  glass. 
and  noting  the  change  of  level  which  takes  place. 


64 

74.  Archimedes'  principle  is  applied  practically  in  many 
ways;  e.g.  in  finding  the  volumes  of  irregularly  shaped 
bodies  like  King  Hiero's  crown,  in  floating  balloons  in  the 
air  and  iron  ships  in  the  sen,  in  lifting  ships  over  bars 
formed  at  the  mouths  of  rivers,  in  removing  piles  used  in 
the  construction  of  docks,  as  well  as  in  determining  specific 
weights,  as  explained  in  the  following  article. 

75.  There  are  three  instruments  used  in  finding  specific 
weights  accurately,  viz.  the  balance,  hydrometer,  and 
specific  gravity  bottle.  For  less  accurate  values  a  measur- 
ing glass  may  be  used,  and  for  liquids,  also  specific  gravity 

beads. 

I.  Liquids,  to  an  approximation  of  the  first  degree: 

a).  By  means  of  a  balance. 

Weigh  a  body  which  is  not  attacked  either  by  water  or 
the  liquid,  e.g.  a  piece  of  agate  or  a  platinum  ball,  firstly 
in  air,  secondly  in  water,  thirdly  in  the  liquid  whose 
specific  weight  is  required: 

Let  w-i   =  weight  of  the  body  in  air, 

w2  =        water, 

w3  =        the  liquid. 

then  s.  w.  of  the  liquid 
b).  By  means  of  hydrometers. 


'f'i  -  w2 


These  instruments,  also  called  areometers,  are  essentially 
closed  tubes,  weighted  at  one  end,  for  determining  specific 
weights  by  observing  how  far  they  sink  in  water  and  other 
liquids,  or  by  observing  what  weight  will  make  them  sink 
to  a  certain  depth.  The  latter  are  called  hydrometers  of 
constant  immersion,  the  former  hydrometers  of  variable 
immersion. 

1.  By  means  of  a  hydrometer  of  constant  immersion. 
e.g.  Nicholson's. 


65 

Let  Wx= weight  of  the  hydrometer  in  air, 

w2  =  weight  required  to  sink  the  hydrometer  to  the 

marked  depth  in  water, 
M?3=     ditto,         ditto,         ditto,  in  the  liquid. 

then  s.  w.  of  the  liquid  =         ,     3 

wx-\-w2 

2.  By  means  of  hydrometers  of  variable  immersion. 

These  are  called  salimeters  or  alcoholimeters,  according 
as  they  are  used  for  liquids  of  greater  or  less  specific 
weight  than  that  of  water.  Both  kinds  have  scales  attach- 
ed to  them,  which  tell  either  the  specific  weight  directly  for 
any  immersion,  or  the  volume  immersed,  in  which  case  the 
specific  weight  must  be  calculated.  A  thermometer  is  fre- 
quently attached  to  tell  the  temperature  of  the  liquid. 

c).  By  means  of  a  specific  gravity  bottle. 

Let  wx  =  weight  of  the  s.  g.  bottle  empty, 

w2  =        full  of  water, 

w3  =        full  of  the  liquid, 

then  s.  w.  of  the  liquid  =  —5 x 

w2-  wx 

II.  Solids,  to  on  approximation  of  the  first  degree: 

o  ).  By  means  of  a  balance. 

Let  u\  =  weight  of  the  body  in  the  air, 

.  w%  =        water, 

then  s.  w.  of  the  body   = - — 

wx  -  w2 

h).  By  means  of  a  hydrometer  of  constant  immersion. 
Let  w-i  =  weight  of  the  body  in  air. 

w2  =  weight    required    to  make    the    hydrometer 

itself  sink  to  the  marked  depth  in  water, 
?r;.  =  weight    required    to    make    the  hydrometer, 
with  the  body  attached  to  the  lower  part  of 
it,  sink  to  the  marked  depth  in  water, 

then  s.  w.  of  the  body  =  -       -1- 


6o 

for  evidently  if  w  denote  the  weight  of  the  hydrometer  in 
air,  then  w  +  w%  will  be  the  weight  of  water  displaced  by 
the  hydrometer,  and  w-\-  "i  +  ^'h  the  weight  of  water  dis- 
placed  by  the  hydrometer  and  body  together:  therefore  the 
difference  io1  +  w3  -  w2  will  be  the  weight  of  water  dis- 
placed by  the  body  alone  :  u^  can  easily  be  determined  by 
the  hydrometer,  although  it  is  simpler  to  measure  it  by 
means  of  a  common  balance.  This  method  is  useful  in  the 
case  of  bodies  like  cork  which  float  in  water, 
c).  By  means  of  a  specific  gravity  bottle. 
This  method  is  particularly  convenient  for  finding  the 
specific  weights  of  powders.  -j 

Let  w1  =  weight  of  the  powder,  ^  v> 

w2  =  weight  of  the  specific  gravity  bottle,  full  of 

water,  .v> 

w3  =  weight  of  specific  gravity  bottle,  after  the 
powder  has  been  inserted,  and  the  bottle 
thereafter  filled  up  with  water, 


then  s.w.  of  the  powder  = 


wx 


<7).  When  a  solid  body  is  soluble  in  water,  we  find  its 
specific  weight  relatively  to  a  liquid  in  which  it  is  insoluble, 
and  multiplying  this  by  the  specific  weight  of  the  liquid, 
we  get  the  specific  weight  of  the  body  relatively  to  water. 
As  an  example  let  us  take  common  salt,  and  adopt 
method  a). 

Let  Wi  =  weight  of  salt  in  air, 

«\j  =  weight  in  petroleum  or  turpentine,  of  a  vessel 

to  hold  the  salt. 
i/-3  =  weight  in  petroleum  or  turpentine  of  the  vessel 
containing  the  salt, 
s  =  the  s.  w.  of  petroleum  or  turpentine, 

then  s.  w.  of  the  salt  = -1  " 

/r,  -f  >r2  -  w3 

76.  The  following  propositions  follow  immediately  from 
Archimedes'  principle  : 


67 

1).  The  mass  of  a  floating  body  is  equal  to  the  mass  of 
the  displaced  fluid. 

2) .  When  a  body  floats  in  a  liquid,  the  volume  immersed 
is  to  the  whole  volume  as  the  specific  weight  of  the  body  is 
to  the  specific  weight  of  the  liquid. 


Examination  VIII. 

1.  Define  the  specific  weight  of  a  body,  and  prove  that 
the  numbers  which  measure  the  density  and  specific 
weight  of  any  body  are  the  same. 

2.  Enunciate  and  prove  Archimedes'  principle. 

3.  Describe  several  illustrative  experiments  which  prove 
the  same  principle,  and  state  several  practical  applications 
thereof. 

4.  Explain  why  a  boat  built  of  iron  can  float  in  water. 
What  is  the  s.  w.  of  iron? 

5.  Give  the  history  of  the  discovery  by  Archimedes  of 
his  principle. 

6.  What  are  the  three  chief  practical  methods  of 
determining  the  specific  weights  of  solid  and  liquid 
bodies? 

7.  Give  formulae  for  all  the  methods  in  the  case  of  both 
solid  and  liquid  bodies. 

8.  What  is  a  hydrometer?  Give  the  names  of  the  dif- 
ferent kinds,  and  their  respective  uses. 

9.  When  a  solid  body  is  soluble  in  water,  how  is  its 
specific  weight  found? 

10.  How  would  you  find  the  s.  w.  of  sulphuric  acid, 
sulphate  of  copper,  sand,  cork,  paper,  snow,  ice,  mercury? 

11.  Given  a  common  balance  with  a  hook  to  weigh 
bodies  in  water,  a  piece  of  cork,  and  a  piece  of  lead  suf- 
ficient to  sink  the  cork  in  water;  shew  (giving  a  formula  ) 
how  to  determine  the  specific  weight  of  the  cork. 

12.  How  can  the  volume  of  an  irregularly  shaped  stone 
be  accurately  determined? 


68 

Exercise  VIII. 

1.  A  piece  of  limestone  weighs  2021  grams  in  air,  and 
12'82  in  water;  find  its  specific  weight. 

2.  The  s.  w.  of  ice  is  092,  and  of  sea-water  1027;  find 
what  fraction  of  an  ice-berg  is  below  the  surface  of  the  sea. 

3.  Compare  1)  the  mass  of  an  ice-berg  below  the  sur- 
face of  the  sea  with  that  above,  2)  the  average  depth  of 
the  ice-berg  below  the  surface  with  the  average  height 
above. 

•^i^A  block  of  pine,  the  volume  of  which  is  4  litres,  340 
cub.  cm.,  floats  in  water  with  a  volume  of  2  litres,  240  cub. 
cm.  above  the  surface;  find  the  s.w.  of  the  pine. 

5.  A  person  whose  mass  is  150  lbs.  enters  the  sea  to 
bathe.  If  the  s.  w.  of  sea-water  be  1-027,  and  of  the  human 
body  0-9,  find  the  pressure  on  his  feet  when  5/6  of  his  body 
is  immersed. 

(6)  A  ball  of  platinum  whose  mass  is  a  kilogram,  when 
in  water  weighs  955  grams;  what  will  it  weigh  when  in 
mercury  (s.  w.  13'6)? 

^V)A  piece  of  iron  (s.w.  7'5)  floats  in  mercury;  find  what 
part  of  the  iron  is  above  the  surface  of  the  mercury. 

8.  When  1  lb.  of  cork  is  attached  to  21  lbs.  of  silver,  the 
whole  is  found  to  weigh  16  lbs.  in  water.  If  the  s.  w.  of 
silver  be  105,  find  that  of  cork. 

9.  A  vessel,  containing  water,  weighs  2034  grams;  a 
kilogram  of  bronze  (s.  w.  8'4)  is  held  in  the  water  by  a 
string  ;  find  what  will  now  be  the  apparent  weight  of  the 
vessel  and  water. 

10.  A  piece  of  cork  has  s.  w.  \,  and  mass  534  grams; 
find  the  pressure  necessary  to  keep  the  cork  under  sea- 
water,  whose  s.  w.  is  T027. 

11.  A  kilogram  of  lead,  whose  s.  w.  is  114,  is  suspended 
in  water  by  a  string;  find  the  tension  of  the  string. 

12.  Neglecting  friction,  with  what  acceleration  will  a 
silver  ball  (s.  w.  105)  sink,  and  an  elm  ball  (s.w.  0'7)  rise 
in  sea-water  (s.  w.  1"027)? 


69 

13.  Find  what  force  would  be  necessary  to  immerse  a 
kilogram  of  oak  (s.  w.  097)  in  mercury  (s.w.  13-6.) 

U.4?)  A  body  of  58  grams  floats  in  water  with  two-thirds 
of  its  bulk  submerged;  find  its  volume. 

15.  A  man  whose  mass  is  68  kilograms  can  just  float  in 
fresh  water;  find  the  maximum  weight  he  could  bear  up 
clear  of  the  water,  when  floating  in  the  sea  (s.  w.  T027.) 

/16^How  much  lead  (s.  w.  11 '4)  will  a  kilogram  of  cork 
(s.  wT^|)  keep  from  sinking  in  the  sea  (s.  w.  l-027)? 

(V?)  A  piece  of  hard  wood  of  mass  7*6  grams  is  attached 
to  the  lower  part  of  Nicholson's  hydrometer,  and  it  is  then 
found  that  the  force  required  to  sink  the  hydrometer  in 
salt  water  is  just  the  same  as  before  the  wood  was  attached, 
viz.,  12*6  grams-weight.  If  1*03  be  the  s.  w.  of  the  salt 
water,  find  that  of  the  wood. 

•fl^A  vessel  quite  full  of  mercury  weighs  725  kilo- 
gram^; a  kilogram  of  iron  is  put  into  the  vessel  and  held 
completely  immersed  in  the  mercury  ;  what  will  now  be 
the  apparent  weight  of  the  vessel  and  contents? 

(l9.)lf  in  ex.  18  the  iron  be  fixed  to  a  hook  at  the  bottom 
of  a  vessel,  what  will  be  the  weight  of  the  vessel  and  con- 
tents?    Explain  the  difference. 

20.  Answer  18.  when  the  vessel  is  only  partially  tilled 
witnwmercury,  and  no  mercury  is  spilled  in  completely 
immersing  the  iron. 

Answers. 
1.     2-735.        2.     0-90.        3.     86;  205.        4.     15/31. 
5.     72  lbs.-wt.        6.     388  grs.         7.     61/136.         8.     \. 
9.     2153  grs.         10.     1660  grs.-wt.  11.     912  grs.-wt. 

12.  884-6  and  458-0  tachs  per  sec. 

13.  13  kilogrs.-wt.         14.     87.        15.     1836  grs. 

16.     3415-7  grs.         17.     1*03.         18.     72-5  kilograms. 

19.     71686-6  grs.        20.     743133  grs. 


Chapter  IX. 
Pascal's  Principle.     The  Barometer. 

77.  Matter  is  divided  into  solid  and  fluid.  Asolide.f/. 
agate,  is  distinguished  from  a  fluid  in  offering  more  or  less 
resistance  to  change  of  form,  a  fluid  offering  little  or  none. 
Hence  fluids  under  the  action  of  weight  must  be  kept  in 
solid  vessels.  Fluids  again  are  divided  into  liquids  and 
gases.  A  liquid  is  a  very  incompressible  fluid,  and  can  be 
kept  in  an  open  vessel.  Water,  petroleum,  and  mercury 
at  ordinary  temperatures  are  liquids.  A  gas  is  a  very 
compressible  fluid,  and  must  be  kept  in  a  closed  vessel, 
inasmuch  as  it  will  fill  any  space  into  which  it  is  admitted, 
even  if  that  space  be  already  occupied  by  gas.  Air  is  a 
mixture  of  several  gases,  though  principally  of  two,  Nitro- 
gen and  Oxygen.  When  a  gas  is  near  its  point  of  con- 
densation, it  is  called  a  vapour.  Aqueous  vapor  or  steam 
is  one  of  the  components  of  air  or  the  atmosphere,  though 
the  quantity  is  comparatively  small  and  varies  with  time 
and  place. 

In  elementary  dynamics  a  solid  is  assumed  to  be  rigid. 
i.e.  that  its  parts  maintain  the  same  relative  positions, 
whatever  forces  may  be  acting  on  it;  a  liquid  is  supposed 
to  be  incompressible;  and  a  gas  as  obeying  Boyle's  law. 

78.  A  fluid  may  be  defined  as  a  body  which  will  change 
its  shape,  more  or  less  quickly,  under  the  action  of  any 
force  however  slight,  until  all  force  applied  to  it  is  normal 
to  its  surface  at  every  point. 

It  is  evident  that  a  fluid  cannot  remain  at  rest  under 
the  action  of  any  external  pressure,  unless  pressure  is 
applied  normally  at  every  part  of  the  surface.  Hence  in 
measuring  the  action  between  a  fluid  and  a  surrounding 
body  (which  may  itself  be  fluid  of  the  same  or  of  a  differ- 
ent kind),  it  is  necessary  to  get  the  pressure  per  unit  of 


71 

area  at  each  point  of  contact.  Again  when  we  think  of 
the  equilibrium  of  a  small  spherical  particle  of  a  fluid, 
whose  centre  is  at  a  given  point;  and  make  the  particle 
smaller  and  smaller,  we  see  that  there  is  pressure  in  every 
direction  af  any  point  of  a  fluid. 

That  the  pressure  at  any  point  of  a  fluid  is  the  same 
in  all  directions  may  be  accepted  as  an  experimental  fact. 
It  is  deduced  later  on  as  a  necessary  consequence  of  the 
fundamental  property  of  a  fluid,  viz.  that  hydrostatic 
pressure  on  any  surface  is  normal  to  that  surface. 

79.  The  pressure  at  any  point  of  a  fluid  is  the  pressure 
per  unit  of  area  on  any  plane  surface  containing  the  point, 
when  the  area  of  the  plane  is  indefinitely  diminished.     Or, 

The  pressure  at  any  point  of  a  fluid  is  the  pressure  per 
unit  of  area  which  would  be  on  any  plane  containing  the 
point,  if  the  pressure  at  every  point  of  the  plane  were  the 
same  as  at  the  point  in  question. 

The  systematic  unit  of  fluid  pressure  (or  of  hydro- 
static pressure,  or  of  pressure-intensity  in  general)  is 
unit  of  force  per  unit  of  area.  Hence  the  C.  G.  S.  unit  of 
fluid  pressure  is  1  dyne  persq.  cm.  This  is  called  a  barad. 
The  F.  P.  S.  unit  is  1  poundal  per  sq.  ft. 

80.  The  following  important  property  of  a  fluid  is  gen- 
erally known  as  Pascal's  principle: 

Pressure  applied  at  the  surface  of  a  fluid  contained  in 
a  closed  vessel  is  transmitted  without  change  to  every 
particle  of  the  fluid. 

The  student  may  compare  this  principle  with  the 
equality  of  tension  at  every  particle  of  a  stretched  cord, 
due  to  forces  applied  at  the  ends  of  the  cord.  Var- 
ious experimental  illustrations  can  be  found  in  books 
on  experimental  physics.  It  may  also  be  deduced  from  the 
fundamental  property  of  a  fluid  at  rest  (Art.  78).  Hence, 
if  a  fluid  were  at  rest,  and  subject  only  to  forces  applied 


/ 


72 

at  its  surface,  the  pressure  would  be  the  same  at  every 
point  of  the  fluid. 

81.  Pascal's  principle  is  admirably  illustrated  and  most 
usefully  applied  in  the  hydrostatic  or  Bramah  press,  a 
machine  by  means  of  which  great  mechanical  advantage 
is  acquired.  It  consists  essentially  of  two  hollow  cylinders 
connected  by  a  tube.  Water-tight  pistons  fit  into  these 
cylinders,  whilst  they  and  the  connecting  tube  are  filled 
with  water  or  oil.  Pressure  applied  to  the  smaller  piston 
is  transmitted  through  the  liquid  to  the  larger,  with  a 
mechanical  advantage  measured  by  the  ratio  of  the  areas 
of  the  bases  of  the  pistons.  The  moving  force  is  generally 
applied  to  the  smaller  piston  through  a  lever  which  further 
increases  the  mechanical  advantage  gained.  It  was  by 
means  of  this  machine  that  the  heavy  tubes  used  in  the 
construction  of  the  Britannia  bridge,  which  crosses  the 
Menai  Strait,  were  lifted  into  their  places.  The  student 
will  easily  satisfy  himself  that  the  principle  of  work 
applies  in  this  as  in  all  other  machines. 

Let  it  be  observed  that  Pascal's  principle  applies  to 
any  fluid  whether  homogeneous  or  not.  Thus  in  the  piez- 
ometer the  principle  is  applied  to  measure  the  compressi- 
bilities of  liquids,  when  in  general  the  compressed  fluids 
consist  of  two  different  liquids  and  a  gas,  The  Cartesian 
divers  is  an  amusing  physical  toy  which  illustrates  in  a 
unique  manner  the  principles  both  of  Pascal  and  Archi- 
medes; also  Boyle's  law  (Art.  94),  and  Art.  83. 

82.  Weight  is  a  force  which  acts  on  every  particle  of  a 
fluid  and  not  merely  at  its  surface.  Hence,  applying  Pas- 
cal's principle,  the  following  four  propositions  can  be  de- 
duced: 

In  a  fluid  at  rest  under  the  action  of  no  external I  force 
except  Had  of  weighty  surfaces  of  equal  pressure  are 
horizontal  planes. 


73 

In  large  fluid  bodies,  like  one  of  the  oceans  or  the 
atmosphere,  surfaces  of  equal  pressure  are  at  each  place 
perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  weight  at  that  place,  and 
are  nearly  spherical  surfaces  having  small  curvature. 

83.  In  a  liquid  of  uniform  temperature  under  the 
action  of  no  external  force  except  that  of  weight,  the  pres- 
sure increases  uniformly  with  the  depth. 

Take  a  vertical  right  cylinder  of  the  liquid,  the  area  of 
each  horizontal  base  being  s,  its  length  It.  and  the  density 
of  the  liquid  d.  It  is  evident  that  the  pressure  on  the 
lower  base  must  be  greater  than  that  on  the  upper  by  the 
weight  of  the  cylinder,  i.e.  in  C.G.S.  units  by  s  h  dg  dynes. 
Hence  the  increase  of  fluid  pressure  per  unit  of  depth  is 
gd  barads,  or  d  grams-wt.  per  sq.  cm.  In  F.P.S.  units  the 
increase  of  fluid  pressure  per  unit  of  depth  will  be  62'4#d 
poundals  per  sq.  ft.,  or  62'4  d  pounds-wt.  per  sq.  ft. 

This  proposition  was  experimentally  illustrated  by 
Pascal  by  bursting  a  large  barrel  by  means  of  a  long  fine 
column  of  water.  It  shows  us  that  in  the  supply  of  water 
from  a  reservoir  to  the  houses  of  a  town,  the  pipes  far  be- 
low the  level  of  the  reservoir  need  to  be  much  stronger 
than  those  near  the  level  of  the  reservoir.  In  Barker's 
mill  and  many  applications  of  turbine-wheels  the  principle 
is  taken  advantage  of  to  produce  motion  in  machinery. 

84.  When  two  or  more  fluids  of  different  specific 
weights,  which  do  not  mix  with  one  another,  are  j)ut  into 
the  same  vessel,  they  arrange  themselves  in  the  order  of 
their  specific  weights,  and  their  surfaces  of  separation, 
when  the  fluids  are  at  rest,  are  horizontal  planes. 

This  is  an  immediate  corollary  of  the  two  preceding- 
articles.  It  may  be  illustrated  by  putting  mercury,  water, 
benzine,  and  air  into  the  same  bottle.  In  this,  as  well  as 
in  the  following  article,  let  it  be  observed  that  just  where 
the  surfaces  of  separation  meet  the  containing  vessel,  they 


74 

are  not  horizontal  on  account  of  the  action  of  the  external 
molecular  force  of  adhesion. 

If  a  globule  of  oil  be  put  into  a  mixture  of  water  and 
alcohol,  having  the  same  s.w.  as  the  oil,  it  will  assume  the 
form  of  a  sphere  under  the  action  of  internal  molecular 
force. 

85.  The  free  surface  of  a  liquid  at  rest,  under  the 
action  only  of  weight,  an  I  the  jrressure  of  the  atmosphere, 
is  a  horizontal  plane. 

This  is  just  a  particular  case  of  last  article,  and  is 
lucidly  illustrated  by  putting  a  liquid  into  a  series  of  com- 
municating vessels  of  different  shapes.  The  adage  "water 
will  always  find  its  level  "  is  a  popular  way  of  expressing 
the  truth  of  the  proposition.  The  principle  is  most  use- 
fully applied  in  supplying  the  houses  of  cities  with  water, 
in  water  and  spirit  levels,  and  in  the  construction  of  foun- 
tains.    It  explains  the  action  of  Artesian  wells. 

If  two  liquids  of  different  specific  weights  be  contained 
in  different  vessels,  whose  bottoms  communicate  by  means 
of  a  tube  completely  filled  with  the  denser  of  the  liquids 
(art.  84),  the  free  surfaces  cannot  be  in  one  plane,  but 
will  be  at  heights  above  the  common  surface  of  separation 
which  are  inversely  proportional  to  the  specific  weights  of 
the  liquids  (art.  83.) 

86.  If  A  denote  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere,  and  d 
the  density  of  a  liquid,  the  pressure  on  any  horizontal 
plane  of  area  S  at  a  vertical  distance  z  below  the  free  sur- 
face of  the  liquid  is  (A+gdz)  S,  by  arts.  80  and  83. 

The  pressure  does  not  depend  in  any  way  upon  the 
form  of  the  vessel,  but  only  upon  z  and  S. 

This  is  beautifully  illustrated  by  the  famous  experi- 
ment of  Pascal's  vases. 

87.  The  student  must  not  confound  the  pressure  on  tne 
bottom  of  any  vessel  containing  a  liquid,  with  the  pressure 


75 

resulting  from  the  presence  of  the  liquid  on  the  body  sup- 
porting the  vessel.  The  latter  is  just  the  weight  of  the 
liquid,  whilst  the  former  may  be  greater  or  less  according 
to  the  shape  of  the  vessel.  This  fact  is  commonly  called 
the  hydrostatic  paradox.  It  is  easily  understood  when  it 
is  noticed  that  the  pressure  of  the  vessel  on  the  body  sup- 
porting it  is  the  weight  of  the  vessel  together  with  the 
resultant  of  the  pressures  of  the  liquid  on  the  whole 
interior  surface  of  the  vessel,  and  not  merely  the  resultant 
of  the  pressures  on  the  bottom. 

88.  The  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  at  any  place  is 
measured  by  the  length  of  a  vertical  column  of  mercury 
which  it  can  support,  as  shown  by  Torricelli  in  1643  in  his 
famous  experiment: — Fill  with  mercury  a  glass  tube  which 
is  closed  at  one  end  and  is  about  90  centimetres  long  and  1 
centimetre  in  diameter;  prevent  air  from  entering  the  tube 
by  placing  a  finger  over  the  open  end;  put  the  open  end 
into  a  vessel  of  mercury  and  remove  the  finger;  it  will 
then  be  found  that  the  mercury  will  sink  in  the  tube  till 
the  level  inside  is  about  76  centimetres  above  the  level  of 
the  mercury  outside.  This  column  of  mercury  Torricelli 
conclusively  proved  was  supported  by  the  pressure  of  the 
atmosphere.  It  was  the  first  barometer,  and  at  the  present 
day  is  the  most  perfect  barometer  which  can  be  made. 

89.  The  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  changes  both  with 
time  and  place.  The  mean  value  over  the  earth's  surface 
at  the  sea  level  is  the  same  as  would  be  produced  by  the 
weight  of  a  vertical  column  of  mercury  76  cm.  long,  at  0°( '., 
in  the  latitude  of  Paris.  The  pressure  per  sq.  cm.  is 
therefore  equal  to  the  weight  at  Paris  of  76  cub.  cm.  of 
mercury  at  0°,  i.e.  (since  136  is  the  density  of  mercury  at 
0°)  13-6x76,  or  1033-6  grams-wt.  at  Paris,  i.e.  (since  980-9 
is  the  value  of  g  at  Paris)  9809 X  136x76  barads,  or  1014 
megabarad. 


76 

90.  The  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  is  produced  by  its 
ucight.  This  was  conclusively  proved  in  1648  by  Pascal. 
Amongst  other  experiments  he  sent  a  Torricellian  barom- 
eter to  the  top  of  the  Puy  de  Dome,  and  found  that  there, 
the  length  of  the  mercurial  column  was  considerably 
shorter  than  it  was  at  the  bottom  of  the  mountain,  just  as 
he  had  predicted.  It  was  fully  9  centimetres  shorter.  As 
in  the  case  of  liquids  (art.  83),  it  is  evident  that  at  any 
altitude  the  length  of  Torricelli's  column  can  be  affected 
only  by  the  weights  of  the  aerial  particles  at  higher  levels. 
Hence  as  we  ascend  the  mercury  falls. 

The  very  great  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  (at  the  sea- 
level,  nearly  14'7  lbs.-wt.  per  sq.  inch,  over  1  ton-wt.  per 
sq.  ft.,  and  over  10  tonnes-wt.  per  sq.  metre)  may  be  strik- 
ingly shewn  by  means  of  the  Magdeburg  hemispheres.  It 
is  taken  advantage  of  in  a  useful  manner  in  the  suction- 
pump,  siphons,  pipettes,  and  other  appliances.  The  limit- 
ing height  (about  33  feet  or  10  metres)  to  which  water 
can  be  raised  by  means  of  a  suction-pump  was  accidently 
discovered  in  1640  by  some  Florentine  workmen,  and  it 
was  this  discovery  which  first  led  Galileo  to  suspect  that 
the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere  was  due  to  its  weight.  The 
very  name  suction-pump  recalls  the  old  explanation  of  the 
rise  of  the  water,  by  means  of  the  long  abandoned  axiom 
"  Nature  abhors  a  vacuum." 

91.  Hydrodynamics  is  the  dynamics  of  fluids,  and  is 
divided  into  hydrostatics  and  hydrokinetics.  Pneumatics 
is  a  term  frequently  used  to  denote  the  dynamics  of  gases, 
and  hydraulics  the  science  which  treats  of  machines  for 
the  conveyance  of  water  or  other  liquids.  Archimedes 
screw  is  one  of  the  oldest  of  hydraulic  machines.  It  is 
used  for  raising  water  or  any  other  liquid  from  one  level 
to  another,  in  a  most  ingenious  manner,  by  taking  advan- 
tage only  of  the  weight  and  fluidity  of  the  liquid  particles. 
It  consists  of  a  tube  wound  round  a  cylinder  into  a  helix 


77 

or  screw.  If  the  axis  of  the  cylinder  be  inclined  to  the 
vertical  at  a  greater  angle  than  the  angle  of  the  screw,  and 
the  lower  end  of  the  tube  be  immersed  in  water,  the  water 
can  be  raised  by  rotating  the  screw-tube  about  the  axis  of 
the  cylinder.  Such  machines  were  used  in  ancient  Egypt 
for  draining  the  land  after  inundations  of  the  Nile. 


Examination  IX. 

1.  Define  the   terms  solid,    fluid,    liquid,    gas.    vapor, 
rigid,  and  point  of  condensation. 

2.  Give  a  full  definition  of  fluid,  sufficient  for  the  study 
of  hydrostatics. 

3.  Explain  the  statement  that  the  pressure  at  any  point 
of  a  fluid  is  the  same  in  all  directions. 

4.  Define  the  pressure  at  any  point  of  a  fluid,  and  give 
the  C.G.S.  and  F.P.S.  units  of  fluid  pressure. 

5.  Enunciate  and  explain  Pascal's  principle.  Give  an 
important  practical  application  thereof. 

6.  Enunciate  and  prove  four  important  propositions 
regarding  the  action  of  weight  on  a  fluid  at  rest. 

7.  Explain  the  construction  of  a  Cartesian  diver.  What 
important  principles  does  it  illustrate? 

8.  Explain  the  bursting  of  Pascal's  barrel.  Give  im- 
portant applications  of  the  same  principle. 

9.  Calculate  the  mechanical  advantage  of  an  hydro- 
static press.  What  is  meant  by  saying  that  the  principle 
of  work  applies  to  it? 

10.  What  is  the  form  a  fluid  would  take  under  the 
action  of  internal  molecular  forces  alone?  How  would 
you  shew  this  experimentally? 


78 

11.  How  would  you  illustrate  experimentally  the  adage, 
"  water  will  always  find  its  level."  State  several  important 
practical  applications. 

12.  What  does  the  experiment  of  Pascal's  vases  prove? 
What  is  the  hydrostatic  paradox?     Explain  it. 

13.  Describe  Torricelli's  experiment  whereb)r  he  first 
measured  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere. 

14.  State  in  gravitation  and  in  absolute  measure  the 
mean  sea-level  atmospheric  pressure  over  the  earth's  sur- 
face. 

15.  How  did  Pascal  prove  that  the  pressure  of  the 
atmosphere  was  due  to  weight? 

16.  Describe  the  experiment  of  the  Magdeburg  hemi- 
spheres. 

17.  Explain  the  actions  of  the  suction-pump,  siphon, 
and  pipette. 

18.  If  the  barometer  be  inclined  at  an  angle  i  to  the 
vertical,  what  is  the  length  of  the  mercurial  column? 

19.  A  siphon  is  filled  and  held  with  its  legs  pointing 
downwards  and  the  ends  closed;  what  will  take  place,  when 
a)  one  end  is  opened,  b)  both  ends  are  opened,  1)  when 
the  ends  are  in  the  same  horizontal  plane,  2)  when  they  are 
not  in  the  same  horizontal  plane. 

20.  How  does  a  change  of  atmospheric  pressure  affect 
the  pressure  between  a  liquid  and  the  containing  vessel? 

21.  Does  a  change  of  atmospheric  pressure  affect  the 
action  of  a  siphon,  or  of  a  suction-pump? 

22.  Examine  the  effects  of  making  a  small  aperture  in 
different  parts  of  the  barometer-tube. 

23.  A  small  piece  of  glass  gets  into  a  barometer  and 
floats;  is  the  reading  vitiated  thereby? 


79 

Exercise  IX. 

1.  Find  in  lbs.-wt.  per  sq.  in.  at  what  rate  the  pressure 
increases  per  10  ft.  of  vertical  distance  from  the  reservoir 
in  the  water-pipes  of  a  town. 

"~2)  The  deepest  sounding  taken  on  the  "  Challenger " 
was  8184  metres  between  the  Carolines  and  Ladrones  in 
the  N.  Pacific  ocean.  Find  at  that  depth  the  pressures  in 
atmospheres,  and  in  tonnes-wt.  per  sq.(im.,  taking  1-027  as 
the  mean  s.  w.  of  the  water. 

'  3?)  The  legs  of  a  siphon  are  equal  in  length  and  inclined 
at^fi  angle  /;  how  should  the  siphon  be  placed  so  as  to 
remove  the  most  liquid? 

4.  Find  the  greatest  height  over  which  sulphuric  acid 
(s.w.  1*84)  can  be  carried  by  a  siphon  when  the  barometer 
is  at  30  inches. 

5.  If  a  mercurial  barometer  1  sq.  in.  in  section  stand  at 
30  inches,  what  will  be  the  height  of  a  sulphuric  acid 
barometer  of  section  1/1  84  sq.  inch? 

6JIf  the  coefficient  of  cubical  dilatation  of  a  barometer 
tube  were  the  same  as  that  of  mercury,  would  the  height 
of  the  mercurial  column  be  affected  by  change  of  tempera- 
ture?    Explain  your  answer. 

7.  The  scale  of  a  barometer  is  etched  on  the  glass  tube 
and  is  true  at  17°.  The  readings  of  the  barometer  and 
thermometer  are  7567  and  10°.  Find  the  reduced  barom- 
etic  pressure,  i.e.  the  length  of  the  Torricellian  column 
when  the  temperature  of  the  mercury  is  0°;  given  A's 
(coefficient  of  cubical  dilatation)  for  mercury  to  be 
1-8  XlO"4,  and  />-,  (coefficient  of  linear  dilatation)  for  glass 
tobe8xl0"6. 

8.  If  the  temperature  at  Edinburgh  be  15°,  and  the 
scale  of  the  barometer  (A'^l^X  10"5)  be  true  at  0°.  find 
the  reading  of  the  barometer  when  the  atmospheric  pres- 
sure is  a  megabarad. 


80 

9.  A  siphon-barometer  is  held  suspended  in  a  vessel  of 
water  by  a  string  attached  to  its  upper  end.  If  h  denote 
the  depth  of  the  upper  mercurial  surface,  and  A  gram-wt. 
per  sq.  cm.  the  atmospheric  pressure,  and  .s  the  internal 
section  of  the  tube,  find  the  difference  of  level  of  the  two 
mercurial  surfaces.  At  what  rate  does  the  tension  of  the 
string  change  as  the  barometer  is  lowered? 

10.  A  string  can  bear  a  tension  of  10  kilograms  wt.; 
determine  how  much  cork  (s.w.  \)  it  can  keep  below  the 
surface  of  mercury  (s.w.  13*6). 

11.  Two  bodies  of  1  and  2  kilograms  are  attached  to  a 
string  passing  over  a  smooth  pulley  ;  the  bodies  rest  in 
equilibrium  when  they  are  completely  immersed  in  water; 
if  the  specific  weight  of  the  first  body  be  2,  find  that  of 
the  second. 

12.  A  specific  gravity  bottle  when  entirely  filled  with 
distilled  water  has  a  mass  of  530  grains;  26  grains  of  sand 
are  put  into  the  vessel,  and  the  whole  then  weighs  546 
grains;  find  the  specific  weight  of  the  sand. 

13.  Two  liquids  which  cannot  mix  are  poured  into  a 
circular  tube  so  as  to  occupy  a  quadrant  each;  the  diameter 
joining  the  free  surfaces  is  inclined  at  \ti  to  the  vertical; 
find  the  ratio  of  the  densities  of  the  liquids. 


Answers. 

1.  U.         2.     813;  8405. 

3.  Legs  equally  inclined  to  the  vertical. 

4.  221-7  inches.         5.     18  ft.  5'7  inches.         6.     Yes. 
7.  7554.        8.     7510. 

(.).  ( A-{-  h )  H- 126 ;  s,  252  grams-wt.  per  cm. 

10.  187-3.  11.     4/3.  '         12.     2-6.  13.     373. 


Chapter  X. 
Specific  Weights  of  Gases. 

92.  We  are  aware  from  the  effects  of  wind  in  driving 
windmills,  ships,  &c,  that  air  has  mass.  That  it  has  weight 
like  solid  and  liquid  bodies  can  easily  be  proved  by  the 
following  experiments  : 

Exp.  1.  Weigh  a  globe  with  a  tightly  fitting  stop-cock, 
firstly  full  of  air,  secondly  after  the  air  has  been  extracted 
from  it  by  means  of  an  air-pump. 

Exp.  2.  Boil  water  in  a  flask  until  all  the  air  is  driven 
out,  cork  it  up  tightly,  weigh  when  cool,  admit  air  and 
weigh  again. 

Exp.  3.  Instead  of  extracting  air  from  the  globe  in 
exp.  1,  compress  air  into  it,  when  it  will  be  found  to  be- 
come heavier. 

Exp.  4.  Weigh  the  globe  in  exp.  1  when  filled,  firstly 
with  air,  secondly  with  hydrogen,  thirdly  with  carbonic 
acid. 

The  second  and  third  experiments  are  due  to  Galileo; 
from  the  third  the  specific  weight  of  air  may  be  approxi- 
mately measured  by  collecting  the  compressed  air  in  a 
pneumatic  trough.  The  fourth  experiment  proves  that 
gases  like  liquid  and  solid  bodies,  differ  in  specific  weight. 

93.  The  fact  that  gases  have  weight,  and  even  flame, 

which  is  essentially   incandescent  gas,  was  known  to  the 

Epicureans,  if  we  take  Lucretius  as  their  mouth  piece.  In 

his  great  poem,  "De  rerum  natura,"  written  about  56  B.C., 

he  says: 

See  with  what  force  yon  river's  crystal  stream 
Resists  the  weight  of  many  a  massy  beam  ; 
To  sink  the  wood,  the  more  we  vainly  toil, 
The  higher  it  rebounds  with  swift  recoil : 


82 

Yet  that  the  beam  would  of  itself  ascend, 

No  man  will  rashly  venture  to  contend  : 

Thus  too  the  flame  has  weight,  though  highly  rare 

Nor  mounts  but  when  compelled  by  heavier  air. 

94.  Before  considering  how  the  specific  weights  of 
gases  have  been  determined,  it  will  be  necessary  to  know 
how  the  density  of  a  gas  depends  upon  its  pressure.  The 
physical  law  which  tells  us  this  is  called  Boyle's  law,  and 
may  be  enunciated  in  either  of  the  following  ways  : 

The  density  of  a  gas  is  directly  proportional  to  its 
pressure,  if  the  temperature  be  far  above  the  point  of  con- 
densation, and  remain  constant,     d  oc  p. 

The  volume  of  a  gaseous  body  is  inversely  propor- 
tional to  the  pressure,  if  the  temperature  be  far  above  the 
point  of  condensation,  and  remain  constant.     pV  =  c. 

The  truth  of  Boyle's  law  depends  of  course  entirely 
upon  experimental  evidence.  Dry  air  is  an  example  of  a 
gas  far  above  its  point  of  condensation,  and  for  dry  air  at 
all  ordinary  pressures  and  temperatures  the  law  may  be 
said  to  be  exact.  When  the  temperature  approaches  the 
point  of  condensation,  the  product  pV  gradually  de- 
creases. In  the  case  of  solid  and  liquid  bodies  it  is  not 
necessary  to  consider  the  pressure  to  which  they  are  sub- 
jected, for  the  changes  of  density,  arising  from  the 
changes  of  pressure  to  which  bodies  are  in  general  exposed, 
would  be  immeasurably  small.  The  case  of  gases  is  very 
different. 

95.  It  was  the  great  French  physicist,  Regnault,  who 
first  overcame  the  experimental  difficulties  necessary  to  an 
exact  determination  of  the  specific  weights  of  gases.  The 
secret  of  his  success  depended  upon  counterbalancing  the 
globe  containing  the  gas  he  was  weighing,  with  another 
globe  of  equal  volume  and  weight  as  nearly  as  possible,  so 
that  it  was  unnecessary  for  him  to  make  any  corrections 
for  barometric,  thermometric,  or  hygrometric  changes  in 


83 

the  state  of  the  atmosphere  during  the  time  of  experiment- 
ation. Having  several  times  exhausted  one  of  these  globes 
and  filled  it  with  a  dried  gas  until  he  was  satisfied  that  the 
globe  was  thoroughly  dry,  he  put  the  globe  into  a  mixture 
of  ice  and  water  (0°  C),  and  filled  it  once  again  with  the 
dried  gas  at  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere,  say  P  cm.  of 
mercury.  He  then  partially  exhausted  the  globe,  to 
pressure  p  say,  keeping  it  at  the  same  temperature  0°  C, 
and  noted  the  change  of  weight.  This  change  of  weight 
(w)  will,  by  Boyle's  law,  be  the  weight  of  the  gas  at  0° 
which  would  fill  the  globe  at  pressure  P-p\  therefore  the 
weight  of  gas  at  0°  required  to  fill  the  globe  at  the  mean 
atmospheric  pressure  will  be  76  w-t-  (P  -p). 

In  this  way  Regnault  found  the  weights  of  equal  vol- 
umes of  dry  air  and  other  gases.  It  remained  for  him  to 
determine  the  specific  weight  of  dry  air  with  respect  to 
the  standard  substance,  water  at  4°  C.  If  w'  denote  the 
difference  of  weight  between  the  globe  when  filled  with 
water  at  0°,  and  when  filled  with  dry  air  at  0C  and  pressure 
P,  then  w,Jr{w  P-t-(P-p)  \  will  denote  the  weight  of  the 
water  which  the  globe  would  hold  at  0°.  If  therefore  s 
denote  the  s.  w.  of  water  at  0°,  the  s.w.  of  dry  air  at  0°  and 
under  the  mean  atmospheric  pressure  will  be 
76  w  s    .   r    ,  .    tvP   , 

If  it  be  necessary  to  take  into  consideration  the  buoy- 
ancy of  the  air  in  determining  w  and  w',  the  methods  indi- 
cated in  the  next  chapter  will  explain  how  this  can  be 
done.     The  following  table  gives  the  results  of  some  of 

Regnault's  experiments: 

Mass  of  1  litre  at  0°  and  76  cm.     Specific  volume. 

Air  (dry) 1293187 7733 

Oxygen  1429802 6991 

Nitrogen 1-256167 7961 

Carbonic  Acid 1977414 5057 

Hydrogen  0'089578 11.163 


84 

By  76  cm.,  or  dpressure  of  76  cm.  the  mean  atmospheric 
pressure  is  always  meant,  (Art  89). 

96.  On  account  of  the  small  densities  of  gases  it  is  gen- 
erally more  convenient  to  measure  their  specific  weights 
with  respect  to  dry  air  or  hydrogen  as  a  standard,  than 
with  respect  to  water  at  4°  C. 

The  specific  weight  of  a  gas  with  respect  to  dry  air  (or 
hydrogen),  is  defined  as  the  ratio  of  the  weight  of  any  vol- 
ume of  the  gas  at  0°  C  and  under  the  mean  atmospheric 
pressure,  to  the  weight  at  the  same  place  of  an  equal  vol- 
ume of  dry  air  (or  hydrogen)  at  the  same  temperature  and 
pressure. 

The  following  table  gives  the  specific  weights  of  the 
above  gases  with  respect  to  dry  air  and  hydrogen: 

Hydrogen 00693 1000 

Nitrogen 09714 14023 

Air  (dry) 10000 14436 

Oxygen 11056 15962 

Carbonic  Acid 1-5291 22075 

97.  The  numbers  in  the  last  column  and  similar  results 
have  enabled  chemists  to  establish  a  most  important  law, 
called  Avogadro's  law,  which  may  be  enunciated  in  the 
three  following  ways: 

The  specific  weights  of  gases,  at  the  same  temperature 
and  pressure,  are  directly  proportional  to  their  molecular 
weights,  if  the  temperature  be  far  above  the  points  of  con- 
densation. 

The  molecular  volumes  of  gases,  at  the  same  tempera- 
ture and  pressure,  are  all  equal  to  one  another,  if  the 
temperature  be  far  above  the  points  of  condensation. 

The  number  of  molecules  in  a  gaseous  body,  at  a  given 
pressure  and  temperature,  the  temperature  being  far 
above  the  point  of  condensation,  is  directly  proportional  to 
the  volume,  and  is  independent  of  the  nature  of  the  gas. 


85 


In  the  following  table  for  gases  the  specific  weights 
have  been  calculated  from  the  molecular  weights,  with  the 
exception  of  those  of  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  air,  and  oxygen, 
which  are  Regnault's  experimental  measurements. 

Table  of  Densities  and  Specific  Weights. 


I.  Solids  at  0°  C. 


Platinum,  stamped 22*10 

rolled 22-07 

cast 20-86 

Gold,  stamped 19-36 

"      cast 19-26 

Lead,  cast   1 1  '35 

Silver,  cast 10*47 

Copper,  hammered 8*88 

cast 8-79 

Bronze,  i  An 

R  ,  >  Average 8  -40 

Steel 7-82 

Iron,  wrought 7  '79 

"      cast 7"21 

Tin,  cast 729 

Zinc,  cast 7'00 

Aluminium 267 

Magnesium 1  '74 


Sapphire 4 

Diamond 3 


01 
52 


Glass     2-5  to  3-3 


Kingston  Limestone 2 

Rock-crystal  (Quartz) 2 

Ice 0 

Ivory 1 

Anthracite 1 

Ebony,  American 1 

Mahogany,    Spanish 1 

Box,  French 1 

Oak,  English 0 

Maple,  Canadian 0 

Elm 0 

Willow 0 

Poplar    0 

Cork 0 


70 
66 
92 
92 
80 
33 
06 
03 
97 
75 
70 
58 
38 
24 


Pith,  of  sun-flower 0-028 


II.  Liquids  at  0°  C. 


Mercury. 13  596 

Sulphuric    Acid 1  84 

Human    Blood 1  '05 

Milk,  of  Cow 1'03 

Sea-water 1  '027 


Water  at  4° 1  '000000 

"       at  0° 0-999873 

Olive  Oil   0-92 

Alcohol 0.80 

Ether 0"72 


III.     Oases  at  0°C  and  76  cm.  pressure. 


Hydrogen 0-0000896 

Ammonia 0'0007619 

Aqueous  Vapour   0 -0008044 

Steam  at  100° 0-0005887 


Nitroa-en 0  001 2562 

Air  (dry) 0-0012932 

Oxygen 00014298 

Carbonic   Acid 0  00 19658 


Carbonic  Oxide .  .00012510         Chlorine 0-0031684 


86 

98.  By  a  good  air-pump  hydrogen  can  be  rarified 
to  a  density  104  times  less  than  what  it  has  under  the 
atmospheric  pressure.  We  thus  see,  by  comparing  the 
density  of  platinum  with  that  of  rarified  hydrogen,  the 
great  range  of  density  there  is,  even  in  substances  which 
can  be  easily  obtained.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above 
table  that  the  density  of  a  solid  depends  to  a  certain 
extent  on  the  way  in  which  it  has  been  prepared.  Even 
in  the  case  of  natural  bodies  like  sapphires  and  diamonds, 
different  specimens  from  different  places  are  found  to  vary 
slightly  in  density.  In  mixtures  the  density  is  not  always 
the  mean  of  the  densities  of  the  component  parts.  Thus 
bronze  has  a  greater  density  than  the  mean  of  the  densities 
of  the  component  metals;  so  with  a  mixture  of  alcohol  and 
water.  In  the  case  of  woods  different  parts  of  the  same 
tree  vary  in  density,  as  well  as  specimens  from  different 
trees  of  the  same  species.  Liquids  can  be  obtained  more 
easily  in  a  state  of  purity,  but  in  such  liquids  as  blood, 
milk,  and  sea-water,  differences  of  density  are  found  in 
different  specimens. 

Examination  X. 

1.  How  do  we  become  aware  that  air  possesses  the 
property  of  mass?  Describe  three  experiments  to  prove 
that  air  has  weight. 

2.  Enunciate  Boyle's  law  in  two  ways,  and  show  that 
the  one  follows  from  the  other. 

3.  What  was  the  secret  of  Regnault's  success  in  weigh- 
ing gases?  Describe  fully  his  method  of  finding  the  spec- 
ific weight  of  dry  air. 

4.  Define  the  specific  weight  of  a  gas  with  respect  to 
dry  air,  and  also  with  respect  to  hydrogen,  and  give  the 
s.w.  of  dry  air,  1)  with  respect  to  water  at  4°,  2)  with  re- 
spect to  hydrogen. 

5.  Enunciate  Avogadro's  law  in  three  ways. 

6.  What  is  the  range  of  density  as  found  by  experiment. 


87 

Exercise  X. 

1.  Determine  the  mass  and  weight  at  the  equator  of  10 
litres  of  oxygen  at  0°,  and  at  a  pressure  of  74  cm.  of  mer- 
cury at  0°  at  the  equator. 

2.  Determine  the  pressure  in  barads  under  which 
chlorine  has  a  density  3  with  respect  to  air  at  0°  and  76  cm. 

3.  A  balloon  is  filled  with  hydrogen,  the  pressure  and 
temperature  being  76  cm.  and  0°.  If  the  capacity  of  the 
balloon  be  a  megalitre,  and  the  non-gaseous  material  have 
a  mass  of  500  kilograms,  and  a  mean  density  of  1,  find 
with  what  acceleration  the  balloon  will  begin  to  ascend. 

4.  A  flask  of  2  litres  capacity  was  found  to  weigh  1"6 
grams  more,  when  filled  with  carbonic  acid,  than  when 
filled  with  air  at  0° ;  find  the  pressure  of  the  atmosphere. 

5.  Find  what  the  volume  and  density  of  a  litre  of  air  at 
0°  and  76  cm.  will  become  at  the  bottom  of  the  deepest 
known  part  of  the  ocean  (s.w.  1*027),  viz.  8184  metres,  if 
the  air  obeyed  Boyle's  law  to  that  depth. 

6.  A  uniform  tube,  1  m.  long,  closed  at  one  end,  is  3/4 
full  of  mercury,  and  is  then  inverted  as  in  the  Torricellian 
experiment  into  a  vessel  of  mercury;  if  the  barometic 
column  be  75  cm.,  find  what  will  be  the  height  of  the  mer- 
cury in  the  tube. 

7.  A  uniform  tube,  1  m.  long,  open  at  both  ends,  is 
immersed  in  a  vessel  of  mercury  to  a  depth  of  90  cm.  If 
the  top  be  now  closed,  and  the  tube  raised,  until  the  length 
out  of  the  mercury  be  90  cm.,  find  the  height  of  the  mer- 
cury within  the  tube,  75  cm.  being  the  length  of  the  baro- 
ometric  column. 

8.  What  will  be  the  length  of  tube  out  of  the  mercury 
in  last  example,  when  the  air  within  the  tube  is  30  cm. 
long? 

9.  A  barometer  was  carefully  calibrated,  and  it  was 
found  that  on  account  of  a  small  bubble  of  air  getting  into 


88 

the  tube,  the  reading  was  75  cm.,  when  the  true  pressure 
was  76  cm.,  and  that  the  space  occupied  by  the  air  was 
equivalent  to  10  cm.  of  tube;  what  would  be  the  true 
pressure,  at  the  same  temperature,  when  the  reading  was 
76  cm.,  and  what  would  be  the  reading  when  the  true 
pressure  was  75*4  cm.? 

10.  If  75  cm.  be  the  height  of  the  mercurial  barometer, 
find  how  far  a  conical  wine-glass  must  be  immersed  mouth 
downwards  in  water,  so  that  the  water  may  rise  half-way 
up  in  it,  7  cm.  being  the  length  of  the  axis  of  the  cone, 
and  13#5  the  density  of  the  mercury  relatively  to  the  water. 

11.  Prove  that  the  atmosphere  must  be  at  least  5  miles 
high.     Is  this  true  from  whatever  level  you  measure? 

12.  A  cylindrical  diving-bell,  3m.  high,  is  lowered  to 
the  bed  of  a  river  12m.  deep.  If  75  cm.  be  the  baromet- 
rical pressure,  find  the  height  of  water  in  the  bell,  and 
compare  the  mass  of  air  in  the  bell  with  what  must  be 
forced  in  to  keep  the  water  out. 

13.  A  diving-bell  is  suspended  at  a  fixed  depth ;  a  man 
who  has  been  seated  in  the  bell  falls  into  the  water  and 
floats ;  find  the  effect  on  1 )  the  level  of  the  water  in  the 
bell,  2)  the  amount  of  water  in  the  bell,  3)  the  tension  of 
the  chain  holding  the  bell. 

14.  The  receiver  of  an  air-pump  is  4  times  as  capacious 
as  the  barrel.  Shew  that  after  3  strokes  the  pressure 
of  the  enclosed  air  is  reduced  to  nearly  f ,  and  that  it 
takes  another  3  to  reduce  the  pressure  to  |.  Given 
log.  2=0-3010300. 

15.  The  gauge  of  a  condensing  pump  consists  of  a 
glsss  tube  containing  air,  whose  volume  is  determined  by 
the  position  of  a  drop  of  mercury  C  in  the  tube.  If  A  be 
the  position  of  the  mercury  when  the  air  in  the  condenser 
is  uncompressed,  and  B  the  end  of  the  tube,  prove  that  if 
air  is  forced  uniformly  into  the  condenser,  the  ratio 
AC:  CB  increases  uniformly. 


89 

16.  A  condenser  and  suction-pump  have  the  same 
barrel  and  receiver,  the  capacity  of  the  barrel  being  y1^  of 
that  of  the  receiver.  Ten  strokes  are  given  to  the  con- 
denser; how  many  strokes  must  be  given  to  the  suction- 
pump,  so  that  the  pressure  of  the  air  in  the  receiver  may 
be  that  of  the  atmosphere.     Given  log.  11=0-0413927. 

17.  Two  barometers  of  the  same  length  and  the  same 
section  are  immersed  in  the  same  reservoir,  and  each  con- 
tains a  small  quantity  of  air;  their  readings  at  one  time 
are  d,  e,  and  at  another  time  h.  k;  if  /  denote  the  length 
of  each  tube  above  the  surface  of  mercury  in  the  reservoir, 
shew  the  quantities  of  enclosed  air  are  as 

d-e_h—k.  d-e     h-k 

i^k~i^e:  T^rri^d 

18.  A  gas  contained  in  a  cubical  vessel  is  compressed 
into  the  sphere  which  can  be  inscribed  in  the  cube,  shew 
that  the  total  pressures  on  the  two  confining  surfaces  are 
equal.  If  the  gas  be  allowed  to  expand  until  it  fills  the 
sphere  circumscribing  the  cube,  shew  that  the  total  pressure 
on  the  confining  surface  is  lessened  in  the  ratio  j/3: 1. 

19.  A  cylinder  with  a  closely  fitting  piston  is  full  of  gas; 
shew  that,  if  the  piston  be  pressed  into  the  cylinder  at  a 
constant  speed,  the  total  pressure  on  the  base  increases 
harmonically,  whilst  the  total  pressure  on  the  cylindrical 
surface  remains  constant. 

20.  A  water-tap  is  connected  with  a  mercurial  siphon- 
manometer,  and  on  opening  the  tap  the  difference  of  level 
of  the  surfaces  of  mercury  was  found  to  be  4  ft.  3  in. ;  find 
the  head  of  water,  and  the  available  water-pressure. 


Answers. 

1.  12556;  12281.  2.     1-2414x10°.  3.     11716. 

4.  90-4  cm.         5.     123,  105.  6.     42*4.  7.     54-1. 

8.  80.        9.    77-S-;  74'45.         10.     7091. 

12.  152;  51/60.        13.    1)  raised,  2)  lessened,  3)  lessened. 

16.  About  7J.         20.     57-8  ft.;  39-7  lbs.-wt.  per  sq.  in. 


Chapter  XI. 
Exact  Specific  Weights. 

99.  Since  the  principle  of  Archimedes  evidently  applies 
to  gases  as  well  as  to  liquids,  all  bodies  in  the  atmosphere 
are  subjected  to  a  vertically  upward  pressure  equal  to  the 
weight  of  the  air  displaced  by  them.  This  may  be  illus- 
trated experimentally  by  the  baroscope  and  balloons.  In 
determining  the  specific  weights  of  solid  and  liquid  bodies 
to  an  approximation  of  the  first  degree,  we  neglected  the 
buoyancy  of  the  surrounding  atmosphere.  Let  us  now 
determine  these  specific  weights  to  an  approximation  of 
the  second  degree.  This  is  done  by  taking  into  consider- 
ation the  buoyancy  of  the  air,  but,  without  noting  what 
may  be  its  barometric,  thermometric,  and  hygrometric 
states,  taking  as  its  s.w.  the  mean  s.w.  of  the  atmosphere 
at  the  place  where  the  weighings  are  made.  A  good  aver- 
age value  is  0,0012.  The  following  problem  will  illustrate 
the  process. 

100.  Given  wx,  w2,  w-s,  the  number  of  grams  which  bal- 
ance a  solid  body  in  air,  water,  and  another  liquid  respec- 
tively; to  determine  the  specific  weights  of  the  solid  body 
and  liquid  to  an  approximation  of  the  second  degree. 

Let  r  denote  0'0012  gram-weight.  The  approximate 
volume  of  the  solid  body  will  be  (w1-w2)  cub.  cm.,  and 
therefore  the  weight  of  air  displaced  by  the  solid  body  will 
be  (tv1-w2)  r  gram-weight  approximately. 

Let  s  denote  the  s.  w.  of  the  standard  masses  against 
which  the  body  is  weighed.  This  should  be  determined 
by  the  maker  of  the  standard  masses.  Then  wx/s  is  the 
volume  of  the  standard  masses  which  balance  the  body  in 
air,  and  therefore  (w>i/s)  r  the  approximate  weight  of  air 


91 

in  grams  displaced  by  them.     Therefore  the  approximate 
weight  of  the  solid  body  in  vacuo 

=Wi  -  (wx/s)  r-\-(ivl  -  w2)  r  grams-weight  =  Wx 

The  approximate  weight  of  the  solid  body  in  water 

=  w2  -  (w2/s)  r  grams-weight  =  W2 
The  approximate  weight  of  the  solid  body  in  the  liquid 

=  w3-  (w3/s)  r  grams-weight  =  W?> 

Then  the  specific  weight  of  the  solid  bodv=  -== — \FrF- 

Wx  -  W  2 

and liquid  body  =  — J — — ?- 

w  i  —  w  2 
each  to  an  approximation  of  the  second  degree. 

101.  To  get  the  specific  weight  of  a  body  to  an 
approximation  of  the  third  degree,  we  require  to  calculate 
the  density  of  the  air  at  the  pressure,  temperature,  and 
hygrometric  state  in  which  it  is  at  the  time  the  weighings 
are  performed,  as  well  as  to  allow  for  the  temperature  of 
the  water  in  which  the  body  is  weighed.  We  have  already 
learned  from  Boyle's  law  (art.  94)  how  the  density  of  a  gas 
depends  upon  its  pressure.  The  law  of  change  of  density 
of  a  gas,  arising  from  change  of  temperature,  was  first  dis- 
covered by  Charles.     It  may  be  enunciated  thus: 

The  dilatation  of  a  gas,  at  temperatures  far  above  its 
point  of  condensation,  and  at  a  constant  pressure,  is 
directly  proportioned  to  the  increase  of  temperature;  and 
the  coefficients  of  dilatation  are  the  same  for  all  gases. 

If  the  dilatation  be  reckoned  from  0°  C,  the  coefficient 
of    dilatation    is   very  approximately   0'003665   or    1/273. 
Hence  if  Vt  be  the  volume  at  temperature  t°,  and  V0  the 
volume  at  0C,  we  may  express  the  law  algebraically  thus: 
Vt  =V0  (1+0-003665  t),  or  Vt  =  V0  (l+f/273) 

If  now  temperature  be  reckoned  from  the  zero  of  the 
air  thermometer,  i.e.  from  — 273°C,  Charles'  law  may  be 
expressed  thus: 


92 

The  volume  of  a  gas  at  temperatures  far  above  its 
point  of  condensation,  is,  at  a  constant  pressure,  directly 
proportional  to  its  temperature  reckoned  from  the  zero  of 
the  air  thermometer.     Or  thus: 

The  density  of  a  gas  at  temperatures  far  above  its 
point  of  condensation,  is,  at  a  constant  pressure,  inversely 
proportioned  to  its  temperature  reckoned  from  the  zero  of 
the  air  thermometer.     Or  thus: 

The  pressure  of  a  gas  at  temperatures  far  above  its 
point  of  condensation,  is,  at  a  constant  volume,  directly 
proportioned  to  its  temperature  reckoned  from  the  zero  of 
the  air  thermometer. 

102.  Boyle's  and  Charles'  laws  can  be  conjointly  ex- 
pressed algebraically  by  either  of  the  following  equations : 

PV_  P  7. 

in  which  p,  v,  d,  and  /  denote  the  pressure,  volume,  den- 
sity, and  temperature  reckoned  from  the  zero  of  the  air 
thermometer.  The  quantities  c  and  k  are  constant,  so  long 
as  we  keep  to  the  same  gaseous  body.  If  v',  d!  denote  its 
volume  and  density  at  0°C  and  76  cm.  pressure,  then 

'  76  v'        J  ,.        76 


c= 


and  k  = 


273  273  d' 

103.  To  allow  for  the  hygrometric  state  of  the  air,  we 
require  first  to  know  the  law  of  Dalton  relating  to  the  pres- 
sure of  a  mixture  of  gases.     It  may  be  enunciated  thus  : 

When  two  or  more  gases,  which  do  not  act  chemically 
on  one  another,  are  enclosed  in  a,  vessel,  the  resultant 
pressure  is  the  sum  of  the  pressures  of  the  gases  when 
placed  singly  in  the  vessel. 

The  physical  principle  underlying  Boyle's  and  Dalton's 
laws  has  been  beautifully  expressed  by  Rankine  thus: 
When  one,  or  more  gases,  which  do  not  act  chemically  on 
one  another,  is  confined  in  a  vessel,  each  portion  of  gas, 
however  small,  exerts  its  pressure  quite  independently  of 
the  presence  of  the  rest  of  the  gas  in  the  vessel. 


93 


104.  Boyle's,  Charles',  and  Dalton's  laws  can  be  con- 
jointly expressed  algebraically  by  either  of  the  following 
equations: 

PV_  y\pv\  _76  V'  P_  =  y  jjj_\  _    76 

T"wi  li  '213'  DT  Xdti'  273Z)' 
in  which  p,  v,  d,  t  denote  the  pressure,  volume,  density  and 
temperature  of  any  one  of  a  number  of  gases  to  be  mixed 
together;  P,  V,  D,  T,  denote  the  pressure,  volume,  density, 
and  temperature,  of  the  mixture;  and  V' ,  D  denote  the 
volume  and  density  of  the  mixture  at  the  standard  tem- 
perature and  pressure,  0°  C  and  76  cm.  T  and  t  must  be 
reckoned  from  the  zero  of  the  air  thermometer. 

105.  The  amount  of  aqueous  vapor  in  the  atmosphere 
varies  with  time  and  place,  whilst  the  other  constituents 
are  found  in  almost  unvarying  proportions.  Dalton's  law 
tells  us  that  the  pressure  of  the  moist  air  is  just  the  sum 
of  the  pressures  of  the  dry  air  and  of  the  aqueous  vapor 
mixed  with  it.  From  the  classical  experiments  of  Reg- 
nault  the  pressure  of  the  aqueous  vapour  in  the  atmos- 
phere can  be  determined,  as  soon  as  the  dew-point  is 
known.  The  dew-point  is  the  temperature  at  which  the 
atmosphere  at  any  place  would  be  saturated  with  the 
aqueous  vapour  which  it  contains.  It  is  found  experi- 
mentally by  means  of  a  hygrometer. 

The  following  is  a  part  of  Regnault's  table  of  the  max- 
imum pressures  (or  pressures  of  saturation,  or  pressures  of 
condensation)  of  aqueous  vapour  at  different  temperatures. 
It  gives  the  pressure  of  the  aqueous  vapour  in  the  atmos- 
phere, in  millimetres  of  mercury  at  0°  at  the  latitude  of 
Paris,  for  dew-points  from  0°C  to  29°C. 

mm. 

23-6 
250 
265 

28-1 
29-8 


°c 

mm. 

°c 

mm. 

°C 

mm. 

°c 

mm. 

°c 

mm. 

°c 

0 

4-6 

5 

65 

10 

92 

15 

127 

20 

174 

25 

l 

4-9 

6 

70 

11 

9-8 

16 

135 

21 

185 

26 

2 

53 

7 

75 

12 

10-5 

17 

144 

22 

197 

27 

3 

57 

8 

8-0 

13 

11-2 

18 

154 

23 

20-9 

28 

4 

61 

9 

8-6 

14 

11-9 

19 

163  | 

|24 

22-2  J 

29  | 

94 

Observe,  that  whilst  the  pressure  of  a  gas  at  a  tempera- 
ture far  above  its  point  of  condensation  depends  upon  its 
temperature  and  volume,  the  pressure  of  the  same  gas  at 
its  point  of  condensation  (or,  in  contact  with  its  own  liquid) 
depends  upon  its  temperature  alone. 

106.  The  following  example  will  illustrate  how  the 
density  of  the  atmospheric  air  can  be  calculated  when  its 
barometric,  thermometric  and  hygrometric  states  are 
known. 

Ex.  The  reading  on  the  barometer  is  76*4,  the  temper- 
ature 20°,  the  dew-point  8°,  and  the  latitude  44°  13'  (King- 
ston, Ont.) ;  to  determine  the  density  of  the  air,  given  the 
coefficient  of  dilatation  of  the  barometer  scale,  which  is  true 
at  0°,  to  be  0-000008,  and  the  mean  coefficient  of  dilatation 
of  mercury  between  0°  and  20°  to  be  000018. 

The  barometric  pressure  in  centimetres  of  mercury  at 
0°  in  the  latitude  of  Paris  will  be 

76-4  (1+20x0-000008)      9805  =  76>n 
~  1+20x0-00018  980-9  " 

This  pressure  is  due,  according  to  Dalton's  law,  partly 
to  dry  air,  and  partly  to  aqueous  vapor  in  the  air.  Accord- 
ing to  Regnault's  tables  the  pressure  of  the  aqueous  vapor 
for  the  dew-point  8°  is  0'80  cm.  Therefore  the  pressure  of 
the  dry  air  in  the  atmosphere  is  7531  cm.  Hence  apply- 
ing Boyle's  and  Charles'  laws,  the  density  of  the  dry  air  in 
the  atmosphere 

=  i^932- X I*?*  x273  =0001194, 
1000         76        293 

the  density  of  the  aqueous  vapour  in  the  atmosphere 
=  8^44  x  0-80  x  273  =0>0000()8 
10000      76      293 
.-.  the  density  of  the  atmospheric  air  =l-202xl0-3. 
107.   To  determine  the  specific  weight  of  a  solid  and 
of  a  liquid,  body  to  an  approximation  of  the  third  degree. 


95 

Let  wlf  iv2,  w3,  denote  the  number  of  grams  which  bal- 
ance the  solid  body  in  air,  distilled  water  and  the  liquid 
respectively ;  the  reading  of  the  barometer  764,  the  tem- 
perature 20°,  the  dew-point  8°,  and  the  latitude  44°  13' ; 
the  coefficient  of  dilatation  of  the  barometer  scale  0*000008, 
the  mean  coefficient  of  dilatation  of  mercury  between  0°,  and 
20°.  according  to  Regnault.  0'00018,  and  the  density  of 
distilled  water  at  20°,  according  to  Despretz,  0-998213. 

Find,  as  in  art.  100,  Wl  the  approximate  weight  of  the 
solid  body  in  vacuo,  S  the  s.  w.  of  the  solid  body  of  an  ap- 
proximation of  the  second  degree,  and,  as  in  last  article,  R 
the  density  of  the  air.  Denote  by  s  the  s.  w.  of  the  stand- 
ard masses  against  which  the  body  is  weighed,  and  by  S' 
the  s.  w.  of  distilled  water  at  20°. 

The  weight  of  the  solid  body  in  vacuo  (in  grams)  is 
very  nearly  =  wx+  (  Wx/S  -  w1/s)  R-W1 

The  weight  of  the  body  in  distilled  water  at  20° 
=  W2-(w2/s)  R=  W" 

The  weight  of  the  body  in  the  liquid  at  20° 
=  w3-(w3/s)  R=  W"> 

Then  the  s.  w.  of  the  solid  body  at  20°  =  == ===-  6' 

W  -  W 

and  the  s.  w.  of  the  liquid  at  20°  =  — — ttttt^' 

each  to  an  approximation  of  the  third  degree. 

If  the  coefficients  of  dilatation  of  the  solid  body  and 
liquid  be  known,  the  specific  weights  at  any  other  temper- 
ature may  be  determined.  By  taking  the  specific  weight 
of  the  solid  body  just  determined  in  place  of  S,  and  W'  in 
place  of  Wx,  and  repeating  the  method  above,  we  could 
find  the  specific  weights  to  an  approximation  of  the  fourth 
degree  and  so  on  to  higher  degrees.  This  would  however 
be  useless,  as  the  errors  of  experimentation  would  certainly 
be  greater  than  any  errors,  from  the  exact  values,  of  the 
specific  weights  to  an  approximation  of  the  third  degree. 


96 

Examination  XI. 

1.  How  can  it  be  proved  experimentally  that  Archi- 
medes' principle  applies  to  gases?  Explain  the  rise  of 
smoke  in  the  air. 

2.  Given  the  weights  of  a  solid  body  in  the  air,  water, 
and  another  liquid,  to  determine  the  specific  weights  of  the 
solid  body  and  liquid  to  an  approximation  of  the  second 
degree. 

3.  Enunciate  in  four  ways  the  law  of  Charles,  and  de- 
duce each  one  from  the  others. 

4.  Enunciate  Dalton's  law  relating  to  the  pressure  of  a 
mixture  of  gases.  Give  Rankine's  statement  of  the  physical 
principle  underlying  Boyle's  and  Dalton's  laws. 

5.  What  are  the  various  corrections  to  be  made  in  de- 
termining the  specific  weight  of  a  body  to  an  approxima- 
tion of  the  third  degree?  What  are  the  physical  instru- 
ments used  for  this  purpose? 

6.  Define  the  dew-point.     What  does  it  tell  us? 

7.  Write  down  an  algebraical  equation  which  expresses 
conjointly  the  gaseous  laws  of  Boyle,  Charles,  and  Dalton. 

8.  A  merchant  buys  against  lead  standard  masses,  and 
sells  against  aluminium  standard  masses.  Does  he  gain  or 
lose  thereby?     By  how  much  p.c? 

9.  Which  is  more  favourable  for  purchasers  of  goods,  a 
high  or  a  low  barometer? 


Exercise  XI. 
1.  The  reading  of  the  barometer  in  a  room  is  77*34,  the 
thermometer  15°,  the  dew-point  10:,  the  latitude  44  13' ; 
the  coefficient  of  expansion  of  the  barometer  scale  is 
0000008,  and  the  mean  coefficient  of  expansion  of  mercury 
between  0^  and  15°,  according  to  Regnault,  000018;  the 
room  is  125m.  long,  545  m.  broad,  and  3'7  m.  high;  find 
the  volume,  mass,  and  weight  of  the  air  in  the  room. 


97 

2.  A  lump  of  gold  weighs  437,008  grams  in  air,  414357 
in  distilled  water,  and  420699  in  ether;  the  reading  of  the 
barometer  is  77*3  cm.,  of  the  thermometer  9°,  the  dew- 
point  4°;  the  latitude,  that  of  London;  the  s.  w.  of  the 
standard  masses  against  which  the  body  is  weighed  is  8*4, 
the  coefficient  of  linear  expansion  of  the  barometer  scale 
O'OOOOIS,  the  mean  coefficient  of  expansion  of  mercury 
between  0°  and  9C,  according  to  Regnault,  000018,  and 
the  density  of  distilled  water  at  9°,  according  to  Despretz, 
0'999812;  to  determine  the  specific  weights  of  gold  and 
ether  to  approximations  of  the  first,  second,  and  third 
degrees. 

3.  A  cubic  decimetre  of  aluminium  just  balances  a 
lump  of  lead  when  both  are  in  water;  which  will  weigh 
the  heavier  in  air?  Why?  Find  their  difference  in 
weight,  1)  in  vacuo,  2)  in  air  (s.  w.  00012),  3)  in  air  as 
indicated  by  a  common  balance,  the  s.  w.  of  the  standard 
masses  being  8*4. 

4.  Find  the  force  necessary  to  hold  down  a  balloon,  of 
which  the  capacity  is  150000  litres,  when  filled  with  hydro- 
gen, the  pressure  and  temperature  being  77  cm.  and  15 C, 
and  the  weight  in  the  air  (s.  w.  0'0012)  of  the  solid 
material  of  the  balloon  being  14'5  kilograms. 

5.  Two  hollow  spheres  (radii  1:2)  contain  equal 
masses  of  air  at  10  and  20 :  respectively;  compare  1)  the 
pressures  of  the  gases,  2)  the  total  pressures  on  the 
spheres. 

6.  Find  at  what  temperature  the  density  of  dry  air  is 
0'01  at  pressure  76  cm.,  and  at  what  pressure  the  density 
is  1  at  temperature  17°C? 

7.  Compare  the  densities  of  the  air  at  the  top  and  bot- 
tom of  a  mine  shaft,  the  temperatures  being  respectively 
11°  and  18°,  and  the  pressures  74  cm.  and  77  cm. 

8.  The  temperatures  at  the  bottom  and  top  of  the 
mountain  Fuji  in  Japan  were  respectively  20°  and  4°,  and 


98 

the  reduced  barometric  pressures  76*2  cm.  and  48  cm. 
Shew  that  the  density  of  the  air  at  the  top  of  the  moun- 
tain was  just  about  f  of  that  at  the  bottom. 

9.  Ten  litres  of  oxygen  at  74  cm.  and  18 c  are  mixed 
with  5  litres  of  hydrogen  at  75  cm.  and  15° ;  find  the  pres- 
sure of  the  mixture  when  the  volume  is  10  litres,  and  tem- 
perature 0°. 

10.  Compare  the  volumes  of  hydrogen  at  0°  and  77 
cm.,  and  of  oxygen  at  20°  and  74  cm.,  which  will  be  in 
proper  proportion  to  form  steam  (Ha0)  which  consists  of 
8  parts  by  mass  of  oxygen  to  1  part  of  hydrogen. 

11  A  vessel  filled  with  hydrogen  contains  some  water, 
and  the  pressure  at  0°  is  found  to  be  76  cm.:  find  what 
the  pressure  will  be  at  20°,  when  the  volume  of  the  gas  is 
reduced  one-half. 

12.  The  Torricellian  vacuum  is  40  cm.  long,  and  1  sq. 
cm.  in  section,  the  temperature  0°,  and  the  atmospheric 
pressure  76  cm.  Find  what  would  be  the  height  of  the 
mercurial  column  if  there  was  admitted  into  the  vacuum  1) 
a  centigram  of  dry  air,  2)  a  milligram  of  hydrogen,  3)  a 
decigram  of  water,  4)  a  gram  of  ether,  all  at  0°.  Given 
the  pressure  of  condensation  of  ether  at  0°  to  be  18"4  cm. 


Answers. 

1.  252,062,500;         312,084-6;         306  megadynes. 

2.  19293,  0-72001;  19271,  072035;  19267,  072023. 

3.  838-65  grs.-wt. ;  837'64  grs.-wt. ;  837'76  grs.-wt. 

4.  152,592-4  grs.-wt.         5.     2264:293;  566:293. 

6.  - 238°C  or  35°A;  821  atmospheres. 

7.  197:200  nearly.         9.     105  cm.         10.     1-786:1. 
11  163-89  cm.         12.     6457;  6067;  7553;  5759. 


Chapter  XII. 

Work.         Energy. 

108.  Work  is  the  production  of  motion  against  resist- 
ance. Energy  is  the  power  to  do  work.  Work  is  phys- 
ically manifested  either  in  accelerating  the  motions  of 
bodies,  or  in  changing  the  configuration  of  a  material 
system.  Thus  when  a  man  lifts  a  body  up,  he  does  work 
against  the  body's  weight,  and  by  the  work  done  produces 
a  change  of  configuration  of  the  earth.  Again,  when  he 
throws  a  cricket  ball,  he  does  work  in  giving  the  ball 
motion. 

We  have  firstly  defined  work,  then  energy.  The  order 
might  have  been  reversed,  thus:  Energy  is  the  power  to 
overcome  resistance  through  space;  work,  the  expenditure 
of  energy,  or  the  transference  of  energy  from  one  body  to 
another. 

By  the  configuration  of  a  material  system  at  any  in- 
stant is  meant  the  condition  of  the  system  as  regards  the 
relative  position  of  its  several  parts.  The  term  form  refers 
particularly  to  the  bounding  surface  of  any  body  or  system 
of  bodies.  Configuration  refers  to  all  parts  of  the  body  or 
system,  whether  internal  or  on  the  bounding  surface. 

109.  A  body  in  motion  has  energy  in  virtue  of  its  mass 
and  speed  (art.  112),  and  this  is  called  kinetic  energy. 
Such  is  the  energy  of  a  cannon  ball,  which  enables  it  to 
tear  down  a  rampart  against  the  resisting  molecular  forces. 
Similarly,  in  virtue  of  its  mass  and  speed,  a  running  stream 
can  drive  a  water-wheel  and  thus  grind  our  corn.  These 
are  examples  of  molar  kinetic  energy. 

110.  A  body  may  also  possess  energy  in  virtue  of  its 
mass,  and  of  its  position  with  respect  to  other  bodies,  and 
this  is  called  potential  energy.     It  is  found  by  experience 


100 

that  there  are  forces  which  act  between  every  pair  of  par- 
ticles in  the  universe.  The  force  of  gravitation,  the  mol- 
ecular forces  (cohesion,  elasticity,  crystalline  force,  &c), 
the  atomic  force  or  chemical  affinity,  are  different  aspects 
of  such  force.  When  work  is  done  against  such  force 
upon  a  body  which  forms  a  part  of  a  material  system,  so 
as  to  alter  the  configuration  of  that  system,  the  body  in 
virtue  of  its  new  position  has  energy  which  it  did  not  pre- 
viously possess.  Thus  a  head  of  water  has  energy  in 
virtue  of  its  position  with  respect  to  the  earth.  The 
wound  up  spring  of  a  clock  can  keep  it  going  for  a  week 
or  longer.  Compressed  air,  such  as  is  used  for  the  con- 
veyance of  letters  in  large  cities,  is  a  store  of  energy  in 
virtue  of  the  configuration  of  the  aerial  particles.  These 
are  examples  of  molar  potential  energy. 

A  material  system,  such  e.g.  as  the  solar  system,  pos- 
sesses molar  energy;  firstly,  on  account  of  the  motions  of 
its  component  parts;  this  is  its  kinetic  energy;  secondly, 
on  account  of  its  configuration;  this  is  its  potential  energy. 
An  oscillating  pendulum,  or  a  vibrating  spiral  spring,  is  a 
beautiful  and  simple  example  of  a  body  whose  molar 
energy  is  constantly  passing  from  the  one  form  into  the 
other.  At  the  extremities  of  the  line  of  vibration,  the 
energy  is  wholly  potential;  at  the  middle  point,  it  is 
wholly  kinetic;  and  at  intermediate  positions  it  is  partly 
kinetic  and  partly  potential.  In  an  undershot  water- 
wheel  the  miller  depends  upon  the  kinetic  energy  of  the 
water  to  grind  his  corn;  in  an  overshot  water-wheel,  upon 
the  potential  energy  of  the  water  to  drive  the  wheel. 

111.  Work  is  measured  by  the  force  overcome  and  the 
distance  through  which  it  is  overcome  conjointly.  Thus 
in  measuring  the  work  done  in  raising  bricks  to  the  top  of 
a  house,  the  builder  multiplies  the  weight  of  the  bricks  by 
the  vertical  height  through  which  they  are  raised.  To 
raise  double  the  number  of  bricks  through  double  the 
height  will  evidently  require  four    times  as  much  work. 


101 

The  unit  of  work  is  that  in  which  unit  of  force  is  overcome 
through  unit  of  distance.  In  the  C.G.S.  system  the  unit 
of  work  is  the  work  of  overcoming  a  dyne  through  a  centi- 
metre, and  is  called  an  erg.  The  equation  w  =fs  evi-  ""T 
dently  gives  the  relation  between  the  work  done  in  ergs, 
the  force  overcome  in  dynes,  and  the  distance  in  centi- 
metres through  which  the  force  is  overcome. 

112,  To  determine  the  kinetic  energy  of  a  body  whose 
mass  is  m  and  speed  r. 

Let  the  body  move  against  a  uniform  resistance  /. 
This  will  give  the  body  an  acceleration  f/m,  opposite  in 
direction  to  the  body's  motion.  If  s  be  the  whole  distance 
through  which  the  body  can  act  against  this  resistance,  so 
that  after  passing  through  the  distance  s  the  speed  is 
zero,  by  equation  (6)  art.  35, 

0  =  v2 - 2 (f/m)s,  .-.  fs  =  \mv2 
but/s  is  evidently  the  total  work  done  by  the  body  against 
the  resistance/,  and  is  all  that  it  can  do, since,  after  doing 
this  work,  the  speed  is  zero.  Hence  ^mv2  measures  the 
body's  kinetic  energy,  or  the  amount  of  work  the  body  can 
do,  in  virtue  of  having  mass  m  and  speed  v.  If  m  be 
measured  in  grams,  and  v  in  tachs,  \mv2  measures  the 
body's  kinetic  energy  in  ergs.  Since  the  kinetic  energy 
of  a  body  varies  as  the  square  of  its  speed,  it  is  evident 
that  it  is  independent  of  direction;  in  this  respect  it  is 
well  to  note,  energy  differs  from  momentum  and  force. 

113.  As  an  illustration  of  the  preceding  article  let  us 
consider  the  case  of  a  body  of  weight  w  and  mass  m, 
thrown  vertically  upwards  in  vacuo  with  speed  u.  In  vir- 
tue of  its  kinetic  energy  it  raises  itself  against  its  own 
weight.  If  h  be  the  greatest  height  reached,  the  work 
done  is  wh.  Now  tv  =  mg  (art.  63),  and  h  =  u2+2g  (art.  36), 
therefore  wh  =  ^mir,  which,  as  might  be  expected,  is  the 
same  result  as  we  got  in  last  article. 

7s  the  energy  of  the  body  in  its  elevated  position  de- 
stroyed?    No,  it  is  merely  in  a  latent  form;  for,  without 


102 

imparting  any  more  energy  to  the  body,  we  can  get  out  of 
it,  in  virtue  of  its  new  position,  the  same  amount  of  work 
as  it  was  capable  of  doing  at  starting.  This  will  be  at 
once  understood  when  we  remember  that  by  letting  the 
body  fall  to  its  point  of  starting,  it  acquires  the  same  speed 
which  it  had  at  starting  (art.  36),  and  has  therefore  again 
the  original  kinetic  energy  imparted  to  it.  In  its  elevated 
position  the  energy  of  the  body  is  potential.  Such  is  the 
energy  of  a  head  of  water  used  to  drive  machinery,  or  of 
the  elevated  heavy  bodies  whose  energy  is  used  to  drive 
piles  into  the  ground. 

We  see  from  the  above  that  the  potential  energy  of  an 
elevated  body,  relatively  to  the  earth,  is  measured  by  wh, 
where  w  is  the  body's  weight,  and  h  its  height  above  the 
ground.  If  iv  be  measured  in  dynes  and  h  in  centimetres, 
then  wh  measures  the  potential  energy  in  ergs.  Also  from 
art  35,  equations  (3)  and  (6),  it  is  easily  seen,  that  in  any 
intermediate  position  of  the  body  between  the  ground  and 
height  h,  the  energy  of  the  body  is  partly  kinetic  and 
partly  potential,  and  that  the  total  energy  is  constant  and 
equal  to  wh  or  \mu2. 

114.  Just  as  it  is  convenient  in  many  practical  ques- 
tions to  have  a  gravitation  as  well  as  an  absolute  unit  of 
force,  so  in  the  practical  measurement  of  work  it  is  often 
convenient  to  use  a  gravitation  unit.  Such  a  unit  is  the 
kilogrammetre,  or  work  done  in  raising  a  body  of  1  kilo- 
gram vertically  upwards  against  its  weight  through  the 
height  of  1  metre.     Evidently  1  kilogrammetre  =  105(/  ergs. 

115.  The  F.P.S.  unit  of  work  is  that  required  to  over- 
come a  poundal  through  the  distance  of  a  foot,  and  may  be 
called  a  foot-poundal.  English  engineers  use  as  a  gravi- 
tation unit  of  work  a  foot-pound,  i.e.  the  work  done  in 
raising  1  pound  vertically  upwards  through  the  distance  of 
1  foot.  The  foot-pound  is  evidently  equal  to  g  or  nearly 
32^  foot-poundals. 


103 

If  m  be  the  mass  of  a  body  in  pounds  and  v  its  speed 
in  vels,  then  \mv2  measures  its  kinetic  energy  in  foot; 
p_oundals  (art.  112),  and  therefore  |rat>2-i-(/,  its  energy  in 
foot-pounds.  Similarly  if  a  body,  whose  mass  is  m  pounds 
and  weight  w  poundals,  be  at  a  height  of  h  feet  above  the 
earth's  surface,  it  has  potential  energy  measured  by  wh 
foot-poundals,  i.e.  mgh  foot-poundals,  or  mk  foot-pounds. 

116.  The  unit  rate  of  working,  or  the  unit  of  activity 
in  the  C.G.S.  system  is  1  erg  per  second.  If  H  denote  the 
rate  of  working  in  ergs  per  second,  /  the  resistance  in 
dynes,  and  v  the  speed  in  tachs  of  the  body  moved  against 
the  resistance,  then  H—fv.  This  formula  suggests  the 
name  dyntach  for  the  unit  of  activity.  Watt's  horse- 
power is  a  convenient  gravitation  unit  adopted  by  English 
engineers,  and  is  equal  to  550  foot-pounds  per  second. 
The  French  force-de-cheval  is  a  similar  gravitation  unit 
equal  to  75  kilogram  metres  per  second,  or  nearly  7'36xl09 
dyntachs.  These  were  supposed  to  be  rates  at  which  a 
good  horse  works,  but  are  now  allowed  to  be  too  high. 

117.  The  examples  of  energy  we  have  hitherto  taken  as 
illustrations  are  energies  of  systems,  the  motions  and  con- 
figurations of  whose  parts  are  manifest.  Our  grandest 
sources  of  energy  are,  however,  derived  from  systems,  the 
motions  and  configurations  of  whose  parts  are  impercept- 
ible. Whence  the  energy  which  enables  the  labourer  to 
dig  the  ground,  the  student  to  pursue  his  studies,  or  the 
horse  to  draw  his  load?  These  are  examples  of  vital 
energy  which  the  man  and  horse  derive  from  the  food  they 
eat  and  drink,  and  the  air  they  breathe.  The  energy  of 
gunpowder,  of  steam,  and  of  a  voltaic  battery  are  other 
examples  of  what  is  called  molecular  energy. 

118.  Food  and  fuel  are  our  principal  immediate  sources 
of  energy.  Thus  coal  and  the  oxygen  of  the  air  form  a 
system  which,  before  combustion,  in  virtue  of  the  separa- 
tion of  the  atoms  of  coal  and  the  atoms  of  oxygen,  pos- 
sesses potential   energy    of  atomic   separation.     During 


104 

combustion  the  energy  becomes  kinetic,  and  may  be  com- 
municated to  the  water  in  a  boiler  so  as  to  heat  the  water 
and  form  steam,  and  through  this  be  used  to  drive  an 
engine,  and  by  means  of  the  engine  do  all  sorts  of  me- 
chanical work.  Similarly  food  and  air  form  a  great  store 
of  potential  molecular  energy,  which  is  transformed  dur- 
ing digestion  into  the  vital  energy  by  means  of  which  we 
do  our  daily  work.  Winds  and  running  water,  including 
waterfalls,  such  as  Niagara,  and  the  ocean  tides,  are  other 
considerable  sources  of  energy  made  use  of  by  man. 

119.  Heat,  light,  and  electricity,  in  their  physical 
aspects  are  well  denned  as  forms  of  molecular  energy. 
Sound  forms  a  sort  of  connecting  link  between  molar  and 
molecular  energy.  The  Transformation  of  Energy  is  the 
enunciation  of  the  fact: 

Any  one  form  of  energy  may  be  transformed,  directly 
or  indirectly,  into  cm  equivalent  of  any  other  form. 

120.  Amongst  the  most  important  of  the  modern 
advances  in  Physical  Science  is  the  measurement  of  the 
different  forms  of  molecular  energy  in  dynamical  units. 
Thus  the  energy  of  a  unit  of  heat,  (the  heat  required  t<> 
raise  the  temperature  of  1  gram  of  water  from  4°C  to  5°C)\ 
has  been  determined  experimentally  to  be  nearly  equal 
to  42  million  ergs.  From  such  measurements  the  very 
important  generalization,  known  as  the  Conservation  of 
Energy,  has  been  deduced: 

Through  whatever  forms  energy  may  pass,  it  cannot 
be  changed  in  quantity,  and  hence  the  toted  energy  in  the 
universe  remains  constant. 

As  the  Conservation  of  Mass  forms  the  foundation  of 
modern  chemistry,  the  Conservation  of  Energy  may  be 
said  to  form  the  foundation  of  modern  physics. 

121.  Although  the  total  energy  in  the  universe  remains 
constant,  it  is  gradually  being  transformed  into  lower 
forms  so  as  to  be  less  useful  to  man.     This  is  the  principle 


105 

enunciated  by  Lord  Kelvin,  and  known  as  the  Dissipation 
or  Degradation  of  Energy: 

The  energy  of  the  universe  is  gradually  being  trans- 
formed into  a  form  in  which  it  cannot  be  made  use  of  by 
man,  viz.,  that  of  uniformly  diffused  heat. 

122.  Perhaps  the  principal  force  through  which  energy 
is  being  constantly  dissipated,  or  degraded  into  the  useless 
form  of  diffused  heat,  is  friction  (art.  60).  The  direction 
of  this  force  is  always  diametrically  opposite  to  the  direc- 
tion of  motion,  or  to  that  in  which  motion  would  take 
place  under  the  influence  of  the  other  acting  forces. 
When  the  surfaces  between  which  friction  is  called  into 
play  are  plane,  and  sliding  motion  does,  or  is  just  about  to 
take  place,  the  law  of  friction,  determined  by  experiment 
to  an  approximation  of  the  first  degree,  and  sufficiently 
accurate  for  practical  purposes,  may  be  thus  expressed: 

For  like  surfaces  the  friction  varies  directly  (is  the 
K^normal pressure  between  the  surfaces,  and  is  independent 
jof  the  areas  of  the  surfaces  in  contact,  arid  of  the  relative 
/ speed  between  the  surfaces:     F=kE.     Or  thus: 

K  For  like  surfaces  the  friction  per  unit  of  area  depends 
\rnly  upon,  and  varies  directly  as,  the  normal  pressure 
per  unit  of  area  between  the  surfaces :    f=  kr. 

When  there  is  no  relative  motion  between  the  surfaces, 
the  friction  may  have  any  value  from  0  to  the  maximum 
value,  which  is  reached  when  motion  is  just  about  to  take 
place.  The  constant  k  which  measures  the  ratio  of  the 
maximum  friction  to  the  normal  pressure  is  called  the  co- 
efficient of  friction  for  the  two  surfaces  in  question. 
Rankine  has  shown  that  the  value  of  k  lies  between  0'2 
and  0*5  for  wood  on  wood,  02  and  0'6  for  wood  on  metals, 
0'3  and  07  for  metals  on  stone,  and  015  and  025  for 
metals  on  metals. 

On  account  of  the  dissipation  of  energy  through  friction 
and  other  causes,  a  machine  does  not  do  as   much  useful 


106 

work  as  the  equivalent  of  the  energy  imparted  to  it.  The 
ratio  of  the  useful  work  done  to  the  energy  supplied  is 
called  the  efficiency  or  modulus  of  the  machine.  The  duty 
of  a  steam-engine  is  the  amount  of  useful  work  performed 
per  unit  mass  of  fuel  consumed. 

Examination  XII. 

1.  Define  energy,  work,  and  the  configuration  of  a  ma- 
terial system.     How  is  work  physically  manifested? 

2.  Define  kinetic  and  potential  energy,  and  give  three 
good  examples  of  each. 

3.  How  is  work  measured?  Give  examples.  Name 
and  define  the  unit  of  energy  and  work. 

4.  Determine  the  kinetic  energy  of  a  body  whose  mass 
is  m,  and  speed  v. 

5.  Prove  that  the  potential  energy  of  a  body  whose 
mass  is  m  and  height  above  the  earth's  surface  h,  is  mgh. 

6.  Prove  that  when  a  body  is  moving  vertically,  under 
no  other  force  than  its  weight,  its  total  energy,  relatively 
to  the  earth,  is  independent  of  its  position. 

7.  Define  a  kilogrammetre  and  foot-pound,  and  deter- 
mine their  values  in  absolute  measure. 

8.  If  a  body  of  m  pounds  be  moving  with  a  speed  of  v 
vels;  find  its  kinetic  energy  in  foot-pounds. 

9.  Name  and  define  the  unit  of  activity  in  absolute  and 
gravitation  measures,  according  to  both  the  C.G.S.  and 
F.  P.  S.  systems. 

10.  Give  various  examples  of  molecular  energy,  both 
kinetic  and  potential. 

■11.  What  are  our  principal  sources  of  energy? 

12.  Define. the  unit  of  heat,  and  give  its  measurement 
in  ergs  and  kilogrammetres. 

13.  Enunciate  the  principles  known  as  the  Transforma- 
tion, Conservation,  and  Degradation  of  Energy. 


107 

14.  Enunciate  the  law  of  friction  for  plane  surfaces  in 
two  ways,  and  define  the  coefficient  of  friction. 

15.  Define  the  modulus  of  a  machine,  and  the  duty  of 
a  steam-engine. 

16.  Prove  that  when  a  body  is  projected  upwards  in 
the  atmosphere,  the  time  of  ascent  is  less  than  the  time  of 
descent. 


Exercise  XII. 

1.  How  much  work  must  be  done  to  pump  1000  cub.  ft. 
of  water  from  a  mine  150  fathoms  deep? 

2.  In  pile-driving  30  men  raised  a  rammer  of  500  kilo- 
grams through  a  height  of  40  metres  12  times  in  an  hour; 
find  the  average  rate  of  working  per  man? 

3.  How  many  ergs  of  potential  energy  are  there  in  a 
mill-pond  near  Kingston,  Ont.,  which  is  40  in.  long,  20  m. 
broad,  and  1  m.  deep,  and  has  an  average  fall  of  5  metres? 

'4.  A  ball  of  40  lbs  is  moving  at  the  rate  of  300  miles 
per  hour;  find  its  kinetic  energy  in  ft.-lbs. 

5.  A  machine  (modulus  |)  for  raising  coals  is  worked 
by  two  horses;  how  much  coal  will  be  raised  in  a  day  of  8 
working  hours  from  a  pit  90  metres  deep? 

6.  An  engine  is  found  to  raise  6  tons  of  material  per 
hour  from  a  mine  110  fathoms  deep;  find  the  horse-power 
of  the  engine,  supposing  \  of  its  energy  to  be  lost  in  una- 
voidable resistances. 

7.  A  railway  train  of  300  tons,  in  passing  over  a  certain 
mile,  has  its  speed  increased  from  40  to  50  miles  per  hour. 
If  the  average  friction  be  10  lbs.-wt.  per  ton,  find  the  work 
done  by  the  engine  in  passing  over  the  mile. 

8.  What  must  be  the  horse-power  of  an  engine  whose 
modulus  is  f,  working  8  hours  per  day,'which  supplies  3000 
families  with  100  gallons  of  water  each  per  day,  the  mean 
height  to  which  the  water  is  raised  being  60  feet? 


108 

'.).  How  many  bricks  will  a  labourer  raise  to  the  mean 
height  of  20  ft.,  working  8  hours  per  day;  given  that  the 
mass  of  17  bricks  is  125  lbs.,  and  that  the  average  rate  of 
doing  such  work  is  1200  ft. -lbs.  per  minute? 

10.  If  a  load  be  10  bricks  (Ex.  9),  and  the  man's  own 
mass  140  lbs.,  what  is  the  rate  at  which  he  expends  his 
vital  energy  when  working? 

11.  What  would  be  the  cost  per  ton  to  raise  coals  from 
a  pit  25  fathoms  deep,  allowing  $3  per  day  for  a  horse  and 
driver,  and  that  the  horse  performs  24000  ft-lbs.  of  work 
per  minute,  working  8  hours  per  day? 

\(l2)At  what  rate  will  a  train  of  100  tons  be  drawn  by  a 
locomotive-engine  of  70  H.P.,  the  frictional  resistance  be- 
ing 10  lbs.wt.-per  ton;  and  how  far,  after  steam  is  shut  off, 
will  it  go  before  being  brought  to  rest? 

13.  If  8  lbs-wt.  per  ton  (Ex.  12)  be  the  average  fric- 
tional resistance  until  full  speed  is  attained,  how  long  will 
it  take  for  the  train  to  attain  its  maximum  speed  after 
starting;  and  how  far  will  it  have  travelled  in  this  time? 

14.  In  what  time  will  a  locomotive  of  100  force-de- 
cheval,  drawing  a  train  of  100  tonnes,  complete  a  jour- 
ney of  100  kilometres,  supposing  that  the  frictional  resist- 
ance until  full  speed  is  attained,  and  after  steam  is  shut 
off  until  it  stops,  be  on  the  average  3  kilograms-weight 
per  tonne,  and  after  full  speed  is  attained,  4  kilograms- 
weight  per  tonne.  (1  tonne  =  106  grams.) 

15.  Determine  the  H.  P.  of  the  river  Niagara  which 
has  a  total  descent  of  334  feet,  and  discharges  about 
4xl07  tons  of  water  per  hour. 

16.  A  body  rest  on  a  rough  horizontal  board,  which  is 
moving  horizontally;  determine  the  maximum  acceleration 
the  board  can  have  without  the  body  slipping. 

17.  Shew  that  it  requires  as  much  work  to  increase  the 
speed  of  a  ship  from  24  to  25  miles  per  hour  as  to  give  it 
the  first  7  miles  per  hour. 


109 

18.  A  ball  of  10  kilograms  is  fired  from  the  mouth  of  a 
cannon  3  metres  long  with  the  speed  of  15  kilotachs;  find 
the  mean  pressure  of  the  gaseous  products  on  the  ball. 

19.  There  were  4000  cub.  ft.  of  water  in  a  mine  of  depth 
60  fathoms,  when  an  engine  of  70  H.P.  began  to  work  the 
pump;  the  engine  worked  for  5  hours  before  the  mine  was 
cleared  of  the  water;  if  the  modulus  of  the  engine  were  §, 
find  the  rate  at  which  water  was  entering  the  mine. 

20.  Find  in  dyntachs  the  rate  at  which  a  fire-engine 
works,  which  discharges  10  kilograms  of  water  per  second 
with  a  speed  of  1500  tachs. 

21.  A  railway  carriage  of  5  tons  mass  is  started  on  a 
level  railroad  with  a  speed  of  8  vels,  and  moves  over  200 
ft.  before  it  stops;  determine  the  coefficient  of  frictional 
resistance. 

22.  A  cistern  is  10  ft.  long,  7  ft.  broad,  and  8  ft.  deep. 
The  height  of  the  top  of  the  cistern  from  the  water  in  the 
well  is  56  ft.  If  a  man  can  work  with  a  pump  at  the  rate 
of  2600  ft.-lbs.  per  minute,  and  the  modulus  of  the  pump 
is  066,  how  long  will  he  take  to  fill  the  cistern? 

23.  A  spring  tide  raises  the  level  of  the  river  Thames, 
between  London  and  Battersea  bridges,  on  an  average  15 
feet.  If  5  miles  be  the  distance  between  the  bridges  and 
900  feet  the  mean  breadth  of  the  river,  find  the  potential 
energy  of  the  spring  tide  when  full. 


Answers. 

1.  5-616  XlO7  ft.-lbs.  2.   20/9  kilogrammetres  per  sec. 

3.  3622 XlO14.        4.     120,373.        5.     32  tonnes. 

6.  5.        7.     16,948  ft.-tons.        8.     14-2.        9.     3916-8. 

10.  3484-8  ft.-lbs  per  min.         11.     7lf  cents. 

12.  26^  miles  per  hr.:  4608  ft. 

13.  3  min.  19|  sec. ;  1280  yds.       14.    1  hr.  37  min.  233  sec. 
15.  13|  millions  nearly.         16.     kg.         18.     3-75 XlO9. 
19.  5522  cub.  ft.  per  min.         20.     1-125 XlO10. 

21.  1/201  nearly.         22.     20^- hrs. ;  1668  X 108  ft.-lbs. 


Chapter  XIII. 
Action  and  Reaction. 

123.  Two  heavy  bodies  are  connected  by  an  inextensible 
string  which  passes  over  a  fixed  smooth  peg,  (or  pully,  as 
in  Attwood's  machine);  required  to  determine  the  tension 
of  the  string. 

Let  T  denote  the  tension  of  the  string,  m  and  m'  the 
masses  of  the  bodies,  m  being  the  greater.  Since  the  ten- 
sion of  the  string  is  the  same  throughout,  if  the  weight  of 
the  string  may  be  neglected,  by  Newton's  third  law  (art. 
58);  the  acceleration  of  the  heavier  body  will  be  (mg  —  T) 
-4-w  downwards,  and  of  the  lighter  body  (T  —m/g)-7-mf 
upwards;  since  these  must  be  equal, 

9-—=—  -ff>    ••    T=       ,      ,9 

m      m  m-\-m 

~         mi  ^      4.-  mq-T     T-m'q     m-m' 

Cor.     The  acceleration   =_^_  _=_      _»  =  _      — g 

m  m'  m-\-m' 

as  already  proved  (art.  68).  If  m=m' ,  the  tension  of  the 
string  is  mg,  and  there  is  no  acceleration,  so  that  the 
bodies  must  either  be  at  rest  or  moving  with  uniform 
speed. 

The  above  completes  the  solution  of  the  problem  of 
Attwood's  machine  (art.  68),  when  the  weight  and  mass  of 
the  string,  the  pully's  mass,  and  friction  may  be  neglected. 

124.  As  an  additional  illustration  of  Newton's  third 
law  let  us  consider  one  of  the  very  simplest  cases  of  im- 
pulse (art.  54),  viz.,  the  direct  impact  of  two  spherical  parti- 
cles. If  the  centres  of  two  spheres  move  in  the  straight 
line  joining  them,  and  the  spheres  impinge  on  one 
another,  the  impact  is  called  direct;  otherwise,  the  impact 
is  called  oblique. 

Denote  by  m^,  m2,  the  masses  of  the  particles,  and  by 
ult  u2,  their  velocities  before  impact.  If  the  direction  of 
Ui  be  called    +   ,  w2,  will  be  -+-  or  -  according  as  m2  is  or- 


Ill 

iginally  moving  in  the  same  or  opposite  direction  to  r»i« 
The  action  which  takes  place  during  impact  may  be  ex- 
plained thus: 

a).  Alterations  of  form  and  volume  take  place  by  work 
being  done  against  the  molecular  forces,  until  the  relative 
velocity  of  the  two  bodies  is  destroyed.  If  i?  denote  the 
stress  during  this  first  stage  of  the  impact,  and  v  the  com- 
mon velocity,  we  get  from  Newton's  dynamical  laws, 

i?  =  m1(i/1-  v)  =m2(v-  u2).  . . .  ...  ....      (a) 

,  mvvb\  4-  m2u2  /  ■,  x 

whence  v=     1   1 =-^-     ....  (1) 

mx  -}  m2 

R=    mim'2   (»x-u2)      (2) 

m1-\-m2 

These  equations  contain  the  complete  solution  of  the 
problem,  if  the  bodies  do  not  separate  again  after  impact. 
This  will  be  the  case,  when  the  force  of  adhesion  between 
the  bodies  counterbalances  the  force  of  elasticity,  which 
tends  to  separate  them. 

b).  If  the  bodies  be  sufficiently  elastic,  they  have  the 
common  velocity  v  only  for  an  instant,  for  an  amount  of 
molecular  potential  energy  has  been  stored  up  in  conse- 
quence of  the  change  of  configuration  of  each  sphere,  and 
in  the  transformation  of  this  energy  into  the  kinetic  form 
through  the  force  of  elasticity,  the  original  forms  and  vol- 
umes are  as  much  as  possible  restored.  Daring  this  sec- 
ond stage  of  the  impact  it  is  evident  that  the  bodies  re- 
ceive accelerations  of  momentum  in  the  same  directions 
as  during  the  first  stage,  and  if  R  denote  the  stress  called 
into  play,  and  V\,  v2  the  velocities  after  impact, 

R'  =  mi(v-v{)  =  m2(v2-v)       (b) 

Now  it  has  been  proved  by  experiment,  that  if  the  im- 
pact do  not  make  any  sensible  permanent  alteration  of 
form,  the  relative  velocity  of  the  bodies  after  impact  bears 
a  constant  ratio  to  the  relative  velocity  before  impact,  i.e. 

vx  -  v2  =   -  e(Ux  -u  2)  (c) 


112 

where  e  is  a  proper  fraction,  whose  value  depends  only 
upon  the  material  natures  of  the  spheres.  From  (a),  (b), 
and  (c),  by  algebraical  analysis,  R   =  eR.     Also 

v1  =  u1- — 17^—{\+e){u1-u2)       (3) 

mx-\-m2 

v2  =  M2+ —  (1  +  f)  ( '*i  -  u2)       (4) 

m1-\-m2 

R+R'  =mim2(1+e)(u1  +  u2)       (5) 

The  value  of  e  was  found  by  Newton  to  be  -§  for  balls 
of  compressed  wool  and  steel,  §  for  balls  of  ivory,  and  -j-| 
for  balls  of  glass.  It  is  called  by  most  writers  the  co- 
efficient of  elasticity,  a  name  strongly  objected  to  by  Tait 
and  Thomson,  who  call  it  the  coefficient  of  restitution. 

Cor.  1.  If  m2=oo,  and  u2=0,  the  case  is  that  of  a 
sphere  impinging  normally  on  a  fixed  plane.  The  equa- 
tions (3),  (4),  (5),  become  then 

Vi=  —eu-y  ,  v2=0  ,  R-\-R'  =  m1(l+e)n1. 

Cor.  2.  If  m1  =  m2,  and  e  =  l,  then  v1  =  u2,  and  v2  =  u1, 
i.e.  the  bodies  interchange  velocities.  This  may  be  shown 
to  be  nearly  the  case  for  balls  of  ivory  or  glass.  Also,  if 
u2  =  0,  and  m1=em2  ,  then  vx  =  0  ,  and  v2  —  eux. 

125.  The  following  results  are  at  once  deduced  from 
the  preceding  investigation: 

1.  Whether  the  bodies  be  elastic  or  not,  the  total  momen- 
tum is  not  affected  by  the  impact.     (Art.  59.) 

From  (1),  (mx  +  m2)v  =  m1Ui-{-m2u2 

From  (3)  and  (4),  m1v1  +  m2v2  =m1u1-\-m2u2 

2.  The  total  molar  kinetic  energy  after  impact  is  less 
than  before  impact. 

£(ro1  +  m2>?2=im1w12  +  £ra2M22-|    r^-(u1  -  u2f  , 

mx  -f  m2 

and  \mxVi2  +  \m2v22  = 

|wii«i2  +£m2w22  -  ^   mimz  (1  -  e2)  (Mi  -  u2)~. 

nil  +  m2 


113 

What  becomes  of  the  molar  kinetic  energy  lost?  It  is 
transformed  into  the  molecular  kinetic  energy  of  heat,  so 
that  the  bodies  after  impact  are  warmer  than  before  impact. 

126.  The  Conservation  of  Momentum  (art.  59)  teaches 
that  change  of  momentum  in  a  body  or  system  of  bodies 
must  be  produced  by  forces  external  to  the  body  or  sys- 
tem. Let  any  forces  act  upon  a  body  of  mass  m  and  pro- 
duce in  it  an  acceleration  a,  then  ma  is  the  measure  of 
the  single  force  which  would  produce  the  same  dynamical 
effect  on  the  body.  If,  after  Newton,  we  call  a  force 
measured  by  -  ma  the  resistance  to  acceleration,  which 
the  body  offers  in  virtue  of  its  mass  and  inertia,  then 
WAlembert's  Principle  at  once  follows  as  a  corollary  to 
Newton's  third  law: 

The  external  forces  acting  upon  a  body  (or  system,  of 
bodies),  together  with  the  resistance  (or  resistances)  to  ac- 
celeration, form  a,  system  of  forces  in  equilibrium. 

This  principle  evidently  amounts  to  saying  that  the 
molecular  or  internal  forces  acting  within  a  body  or  sys- 
tem of  bodies  are  themselves  in  equilibrium. 

127.  Newton  published  his  axioms  or  laws  of  motion  in 
his  celebrated  work  "  Philosophiae  Naturalis  Principia 
Mathematical  At  the  end  of  the  scholium  appended  to 
his  laws  he  points  out  that  another  meaning  may  be  at- 
tached to  the  words  action  and  reaction  besides  that  of 
force : 

If  the  action  of  an  agent  be  measured  by  the  product 
of  Us  force  into  its  velocity;  and  if,  similarly,  the  reaction 
of  the  resistance  be  measured  by  the  velocities  of  its  sev- 
ered parts  into  their  several  forces,  whether  these  arise 
from  friction,  cohesion,  weight,  or  acceleration;  action  and 
reaction,  in  all  combinations  of  machines,  will  be  equal 
and  opposite. 

As  pointed  out  by  Tait  and  Thomson,  this  remarkable 
passage  contains  in  it  the  foundation  of  that  great  modern 
generalization,  the  Conservation  of  Energy. 


114 

Examination  XIII. 

1.  A  string  passing  over  a  smooth  peg  connects  two 
heavy  bodies;  determine  its  tension,  1)  when  the  bodies 
have  different  weights,  2)  when  the  weights  are  the  same. 

2.  Two  spherical  particles  impinge  directly;  describe 
the  nature  of  the  impact,  and  determine  the  equations  of 
motion.     Define  stress. 

3.  What  is  denoted  by  e  in  the  theory  of  impact?  How 
can  it  be  experimentally  determined?  Give  its  value  for 
a  few  substances. 

4.  How  do  we  deduce  the  equations  of  impact  of  a 
sphere  on  a  fixed  plane.     Give  the  equations. 

5.  Determine  under  what  conditions  will  two  spheres, 
impinging  directly,  interchange  velocities? 

6.  Prove  that  the  momentum  of  a  system  of  spherical 
particles  is  not  altered  by  direct  impacts  of  its  component 
parts. 

7.  Determine  the  change  of  molar  kinetic  energy  in  both 
stages  of  impact,  when  two  spheres  impinge  directly. 
What  becomes  of  it? 

8.  Enunciate  and  explain  D'Alembert's  principle. 

9.  How  can  it  be  said  that  Newton  in  his  third  law  laid 
the  foundation  of  the  science  of  energy? 


Exercise   XIII. 

1.  A  boulder  of  2  tonnes  is  rolled  from  the  summit  of 
El  Capitan  in  the  Yosemite  valley,  a  rock  rising  vertically 
3000  feet;  find  the  speed  of,  and  distance  travelled  by,  the 
earth  when  the  boulder  strikes  the  ground.    (See  Ex.  V,  6.) 

2.  A  ball  is  let  fall  from  a  height  h  above  a  fixed  smooth 
table,  and  rebounds  to  a  height  h',  prove  that  e  for  the 
ball  and  table   =1  '(h'/h). 

3.  Find  the  tensions  of  the  strings  in  Ex.  VII,  5,  9,  15. 


115 

4.  A  chain  20  ft.  long  and  mass  2|  lbs.  per  ft.  is  hang- 
ing vertically,  and  is  connected  by  a  fine  wire  of  insig- 
nificant mass,  which  passes  over  a  smooth  pully  to  a  body 
of  56  lbs.;  find  the  tensions  1)  of  the  wire,  2)  of  the  chain 
at  its  middle  point,  3)  of  the  chain  2  ft.  from  the  free  end. 

5  Prove  that  in  Attwood's  machine,  if  the  total  mass 
of  the  moving  bodies  be  constant,  the  greater  the  tension 
of  the  string  is,  the  less  is  the  acceleration. 

6.  A  body  of  5  kilograms,  moving  with  a  speed  of  3 
kilotachs,  impinges  on  a  body  of  3  kilograms  moving  with 
a  speed  of  1  kilotach ;  e.  =  § ,  find  the  speeds  after  impact. 

7.  Two  bodies  of  unequal  masses,  moving  in  opposite 
directions  with  momenta  equal  in  magnitude,  meet;  shew 
that  the  momenta  are  equal  in  magnitude  after  impact. 

8.  The  largest  gun  in  the  United  States  in  1891,  with 
a  charge  of  440  lbs.  of  prism  powder,  sent  a  projectile  of 
1000  lbs.  with  a  speed  of  1865  vels:  if  the  mass  of  the  gun 
and  carriage  were  100  tons,  find  the  speed  of  recoil  of  the 
gun,  and  the  potential  energy  in  a  lb.  of  powder. 

9.  The  result  of  an  impact  between  two  bodies  moving 
with  equal  speeds  in  opposite  directions,  is  that  one  of 
them  turns  back  with  its  original  speed,  and  the  other 
follows  it  with  half  that  speed;  find  e  and  the  ratio  of  the 
masses. 

10.  A  bomb-shell  moving  with  a  speed  of  50  vels  bursts 
into  two  parts  whose  masses  are  70  and  40  lbs.  After 
bursting,  the  larger  part  turns  back  with  a  speed  of  10 
vels;  find  the  speed  of  the  smaller  part. 

11.  A  and  B  are  two  uniform  spheres  of  the  same  ma- 
terial and  of  given  masses.  If  A  impinges  directly  upon  a 
third  sphere  Cat  rest,  and  then  C,on  B  at  rest,  find  the 
mass  of  C  in  order  that  the  velocity  of  B  may  be  the  great- 
est possible  for  a  given  initial  velocity  of  A. 

12.  Find  the  necessary  and  sufficient  condition  that  one 
body  moves  after  direct  impact  with  the  original  velocity 
of  the  other. 


116 

13.  Two  balls,  each  \  cub.  decim.,  one  of  elm  and  the 
other  of  silver,  are  connected  by  an  inextensible  cord  and 
immersed  in  Lake  Ontario;  find  the  tension  of  the  cord  in 
grs.-wt.,  and  the  acceleration,  neglecting  friction  and  the 
cord's  weight. 

14.  Two  particles  of  1  and  2  kilograms  are  connected 
by  a  cord  which  passes  over  a  smooth  pully;  this  pully  and 
a  particle  of  3  kilograms  are  connected  by  another  cord 
which  passes  over  a  smooth  fixed  pully;  neglecting  the 
masses  and  weights  of  the  pullies  and  cords,  find  the  ten- 
sions of  the  cords  and  the  accelerations  of  the  three  par- 
ticles. 

15.  A  jet  of  water  is  projected  against  an  embankment 
so  as  to  strike  it  normally.  If  the  speed  of  the  jet  be 
2500  tachs,  and  50  kilograms  of  water  strike  the  embank- 
ment per  second,  find  the  pressure  of  water  against  the 
embankment,  1)  when  the  water  does  not  rebound,  2)  when 
it  rebounds  with  a  speed  of  500  tachs. 

16.  A  strikes  B  which  is  at  rest,  and  after  impact  re- 
bounds with  a  speed  equal  to  that  of  B;  shew  that  B's 
mass  is  at  least  3  times  A'a  mass. 

17.  If  the  sum  of  the  masses  of  two  impinging  spherical 
masses  be  2m,  find  the  greatest  loss  of  molar  kinetic  energy 
for  given  values  of  e,  ulf  and  u2. 


Answers. 

1.  1,376 X 10"1*  cm.  per  year;  29,776 X  10~21  cm. 

3.  12  kilogrs.-wt.;  75  or  125  lbs.-wt.;  2.4  Ibs.-wt. 

4.  52-8,  26-4,  5-28  lbs.-wt.        6.     1750,  30831. 

8.  9-325;  123,491  ft.-lbs.         9.     J;  1:4.         10.     155. 

11.  C=  j/(A  B).         12.     Ratio  of  masses  e:  1. 

13.  (0-82)0;  437^  grs.-wt.  nearly. 

14.  24/17  and  48/17  kilogrs.-wt.;  70/17,  5#/17,  g/11. 

15.  127,486  and  152,983  grs.-wt.       17.     imil-'e2)^-^)2. 


Chapter  XIV. 
Dim  ens  iona  I  Eq  uatioit  s . 

128.  In  the  previous  pages  the  student  has  been  intro- 
duced to  two  distinct  scientific  systems  of  units,  called  the 
C.  Gr.  S.  and  F.  P.  S.  systems  respectively.  In  both  sys- 
tems three  independent  or  fundamental  units  are  chosen, 
and  from  these  all  others  are  derived.  It  is  not  necessary 
that  any  three  special  units  be  taken  as  the  fundamental 
ones.  The  three,  however,  which  are  most  easily  fixed 
upon;  and  with  standards  of  which,  comparisons  are  most 
easily  and  directly  made,  at  all  times  and  at  all  places;  and 
in  relation  to  which  the  derived  units  are  most  easily  de- 
fined, and  are  of  the  simplest  dimensions,  in  virtue  of  the 
established  relations  between  the  different  units;  are  the 
units  of  length,  mass,  and  time. 

Dimensional  equations  are  such  as  express  in  algebrai- 
cal form  the  relations  between  dynamical  units,  and  are 
used  more  particularly  to  express  how  a  derived  unit  de- 
pends upon  the  fundamental  units. 

129.  Whatever  units  of  length,  time,  and  speed  be  used, 
V  oc  L/T;  where  V  measures  the  speed  of  a  body  moving 
with  constant  speed,  and  L  is  the  distance  passed  over  by 
the  body  in  the  time  T.  Now  if  we  take  the  unit  of  speed 
as  that  in  which  unit  of  length  is  passed  over  in  unit  of 
time,  the  relation  is  expressed  thus,  V =  L/T.  Hence  if 
v,  I,  t,  denote  the  units  of  speed,  length,  and  time  in  a 
scientific  system,  v  —  l/t.  This  is  called  a  dimensional 
equation.  It  tells  us  that  the  unit  of  speed  depends  upon 
the  unit  of  length  to  the  first  power  directly,  and  the  unit 
of  time  to  the  first  power  inversely.  Hence  if  the  unit  of 
length  be  increased  or  diminished  n  times,  so  will  the  unit 
of  speed  be  increased  or  diminished  n  times;  and  if  the 
unit  of  time  be  increased  or  diminished  n  times,  the  unit 
of  speed  will  be  diminished  or  increased  n  times. 


118 

Similarly  if  m,  a,  M,  f,  w,  h,  denote  respectively  the 
units  of  mass,  acceleration,  momentum,  force,  work,  and 
activity,  in  a  scientific  system  of  units. 

v        I      iK/r  ml    n    M     ml  ni      mP 

«=T=^  M=mv=T,f=T=T,w=fl  =  -r, 

Hence  if  the  unit  of  length  be  increased  or  diminished 
x  times,  the  unit  of  mass  y  times,  and  the  unit  of  time  z 
times,  the  unit  of  activity  will  thereby  be  increased  or 
diminished  x2y/z3  times. 

If  i,  o,  denote  the  units  of  angle  and  angular  velocity, 
i=  arc/radius  =  l/l  =  1°,  i.e.  the  unit  of  angle  is  independent 
of  the  fundamental  units;  and  o  =  i/t=t~1. 

If  A,  p  denote  the  units  of  area  and  pressure -intensity, 
A  =  l2,  and  p  =f/A  =  m/  ( It2 ) 

If  V,  d  denote  the  units  of  volume  and  density, 
V=  I3,  and  d  =  m/V=  m/ls . 

130.  In  whatsoever  way  the  dimensions  of  a  derived 
unit  be  deduced,  they  must  of  necessity  always  be  the 
same.  Thus  (art.  22)  o=v/r  =(l/t)/l  =t~1.  Similarly 
(art.  112)  the  dimensions  of  energy  and  work  are  mv2,  i.e. 
(ml2)/t2  as  above. 

When  an  equation  occurs  in  which  different  units  are 
involved,  it  is  evident  that  the  dimensions  of  each  term 
relatively  to  the  fundamental  units  must  be  the  same; 
otherwise,  by  simply  changing  the  values  of  the  funda- 
mental units,  the  equation  becomes  untrue.  For  examples 
see  articles  35,  and  123  to  125. 

131.  An  important  use  of  dimensional  equations  is  to 
facilitate  the  calculations  of  the  numerical  relations  be- 
tween the  derived  units  of  different  systems,  when  the 
numerical  relations  between  the  fundamental  units  are 
known.     Thus  if  /',  m\  t'  denote  the  fundamental  units  in 


119 

the  F.  P.  S.  system,  and  p'   the  derived  unit  of  pressure- 
intensity,  and  I,  m,  t,  p  the  corresponding  C.  G.  S.  units, 

,       m'  _  m      .    p'  _  m'       I     (  t  y 

''     JF2'  p   '"W'"  y  ~"1^'  T'{  ~F 

=  453-593x0-0328087  =  14-8818  (see  tables  art.  132),  i.e.  1 
poundal  per  square  foot  =  14'8818  barads. 

Ex.  Find  the  units  of  length,  mass,  and  time  in  a 
scientific  system  in  which  a  mile  per  hour  is  the  unit  of 
speed,  a  pound-weight  the  unit  of  force,  and  a  foot-pound 
the  unit  of  work. 


Let  L,  M,  T,  denote  the  fundamental  units: 

JL_5280    J^  =  22_      V_ 
~f  ~3600"    /'    "15  "    t 


(1) 


ML      Q01  ^m'V  _  193     m'V  ,9. 

~W~     ¥  XP 6~'  ~F~  "     {) 


ML2  _  193     nvT2 
T2       ~6  t'< 


2 


(3) 


.-.  L  =  l'=l   foot,  T=lh'  =  ~  second,  and 

M=™    (  *>•.  «  =  14||pounds. 

132.  The  following  tables  give  the  numerical  relations 
between  the  C  G.  S.,  F.  P.  S.,  and  a  few  other  frequently 
occurring  units.  The  numbers  in  the  tables  of  length  and 
mass  give  the  results  of  the  most  accurate  observations 
made  in  comparisons  of  the  French  and  English  standards. 
Those  in  the  other  tables  are  calculated  from  the  dimen- 
sional equations  of  the  units,  as  explained  in  last  article. 
Each  number  is  true  to  the  last  decimal  place  given,  and 
the  mantissae  of  the  logarithms  of  the  true  ratios  are 
added, 


120 


1  foot 

1  mile  (statute) 

1  metre 


1  square  foot 


1 
1 
1 


acre 

are 

square  kilometre 


I.  Length  or  Distance. 

=    30*4797  centimetres 
=    1609*33  metres 
=  3-28087  feet 


II.  Area  or  Sin-face. 

=   929*014  sq.  centimetres 
=   40-4678  ares 
=    1076*41  square  feet 
=   247-110  acres 


cubic  foot 

gallon 

litre 


III.   Volume,  Bulk,  or  Capacity. 

=   28-3161  litres 

=   4-54102    " 

=  61-0254  cubic  inches 


right  angle 
radian 


IV.  Angle. 

=    1-5707963268  radian 
=    57-295779513  degrees 

V.  Mass. 


ounce  avoirdupois    --    28-34954  grains 
pound  "  =    453-5927      " 


1  gram 
1  kilogram 


Mantissae. 

4840111 
2066451 
5159889 


9680222 
6071101 
0319778 
3928899 


4520332 
6571531 
7855105 


1961199 
7581226 


4525461 
6566661 
1884321 


=  15*43235  grains 

=  2-204621  lbs.  avoirdupois  3433339 

VI.  Density. 

1  gram  per  cub.  cm.    =  624262  lbs.  av.  per  cub.  ft.  7953672 

VII.  Time. 

1  day  (mean  solar)    =    86400  seconds  9365137 

1  sidereal  day       =   86164-1    "  9353264 

1  mean  sidereal  month  =  27*321661  days  4365071 

1  mean  synodic  "    =  29*530589  "  4702721 

1  sidereal  year       =  31558149*6  seconds  4991116 

=  365*2564  days  5625978 

1  mean  tropical  year  =  365*2422  "  5625809 


121 


A  solar  day  is  the  time  in  which  the  sun  apparently 
revolves  around  the  earth.     A  sidereal  day  is  the  time  of 
the  apparent  rotation  of  the  sphere  of   the  heavens.     A 
sidereal  month  is  the  time  in  which  the  moon  makes  a 
complete  revolution  in  the  sphere  of  the  heavens  amongst 
the  fixed  stars.     A  synodic  month  is  the  time  between  two 
consecutive  full   moons.     A  sidereal  year  is  the  time  in 
which  the  sun  apparently  makes  a  complete  revolution  in 
the   sphere   of   the   heavens  amongst  the  fixed  stars.     A 
tropical  year  is  the  time  between  two  consecutive  appear- 
ances of  the  sun  on  the  vernal  equinox,  one  of  the  points 
in  which  the  equinoctial  cuts  the  ecliptic;  it  governs  the 
return  of  the  seasons,  and  varies  slowly  through  a  maxi- 
mum range  of  about  a  minute  on  each  side  of  the  mean 
value.     The  student  will  do  well  to  satisfy  himself  that  a 
positive  rotation  of  the  earth  would  produce  an  apparent 
negative  rotation  of  the  sphere  of  the  heavens,  and  a  pos- 
itive revolution  of  the  earth  around  the  sun  would  produce 
an  apparent  positive  revolution  of   the   sun    around   the 
earth.     It  follows  from  this  that  the  number  of  sidereal 
days  in  the  sidereal  year  exceeds  the  number  of  mean  solar 
days  by  unity;  whence  the  relation  between  these  days. 

VIII.  Speed. 


1  poundvel 


vel  =  30-4797  tachs 

mile  per  hr.,  or  22/15  vels  =   44*7036      " 

IX.  Momentum. 

=    138254  gramtachs 

X.  Force  (taking  (j  =  $8Q-o). 

=   13825-4  dynes 

=    1'0199  gram-weight 

=   63'5354  dynes 

XI.  Pressure-intensity. 
poundal  per  sq.  foot  =  14-8818  barads 
mean  atmosphere         =      T0136  megabarad 


poundal 

kilodyne 

grain-weight 


Mantissae. 

4840111 
6503425 


1406772 

1406772 
0085524 
8030157 

1726550 

0058495 


122 

XII.    Work  and  Energy. 

1  foot-poundal  =   421394  ergs  6246883 

1  kilogrammetre  =   7-23307  foot-pounds        8593228 

XIII.  Activity. 

1  foot-poundal  per  second  =  421394  dyntachs  6246883 

1  force  de  cheval  =735405  megadyntachs  8665266 


Examination  XIV. 

1.  What  determines  the  choice  of  fundamental  units? 

2.  Why  is  the  French  method  of  forming  multiples  and 
submultiples  of  units  the  best? 

3.  Define  a  dimensional  equation.  Write  down  the 
dimensional  equations  between  angular  velocity,  momen- 
tum, energy,  angle,  pressure-intensity,  and  density,  and 
the  fundamental  units. 

4.  Determine  the  ratios  of  the  units  of  acceleration, 
angular  velocity,  density,  and  the  gravitation  units  of  the 
rates  of  doing  work,  in  the  F.  P.  S.  and  C.  G.  S.  systems. 

5.  Define  the  following  terms:  mean  solar  day,  sidereal 
day,  sidereal  month,  synodic  month,  sidereal  year,  tropical 
year,  equinox,  equinoctial,  ecliptic. 

6.  How  is  the  ratio  of  the  sidereal  day  to  the  mean 
solar  day  determined?     Calculate  the  ratio. 

7.  Check  all  the  ratios  in  tables  VIII  to  XIII.  art.  132. 


Exercise  XIV. 

1.  If  a  kilometre  and  hour  be  the  units  of  length  and 
time,  what  number  will  express  the  mean  value  of  g? 

2.  If  a  metre,  kilogram,  and  minute  were  the  funda- 
mental units,  what  number  would  express  the  mean  atmos- 
pheric pressure  at  the  sea-level  (T014  megabarad). 


123 

3.  If  a  metre  per  second,  a  kilogram-weight,  and  a  kil- 
ogrammetre  were  the  units  of  speed,  force,  and  work,  find 
the  units  of  length,  mass,  and  time,  and  the  number  which 
expresses  the  pressure  at  a  kilometre-depth  of  ocean  (s.w. 
1-027). 

4.  If  a  metre,  kilogram,  and  10-4  of  a  day  be  the  funda- 
mental units,  find  in  dyntachs  and  barads  the  derived 
units  of  activity  and  hydrostatic  pressure. 

5.  If  g,  a  kilogram-weight,  and  a  force-de-cheval  be  the 
units  of  acceleration,  force,  and  activity,  find  the  units  of 
momentum  and  pressure-intensity. 

6.  The  units  of  speed,  acceleration,  and  force  are  1  kil- 
ometre per  hour,  g,  and  the  weight  of  a  kilogram ;  find  the 
units  of  length,  mass,  time,  and  density  in  terms  of  the 
C.  G.  S.  units. 

7.  The  relation  between  g,  and  the  time  of  oscillation 
(f)  and  the  length  (I)  of  a  pendulum  is  t-  n  \  {l/g).  If  1 
second  be  the  unit  of  time,  and  the  length  of  the  second's 
pendulum  at  the  latitude  of  45 :,  where  </  =  9805  tachs  per 
second,  be  100  units  of  length,  find  the  unit  of  length  in 
centimetres,  and  the  number  which  measures  the  mean 
value  of  g. 

Answers. 

1.     127,072-8.        2.     36504X104.        3.     lm.;9805  grs.; 
1  sec. ;  1-037  X 106.         4.     1013/8643;  105/8642. 

5.  7-5  megagramtachs;  980-53x754^105. 

6.  106  -T-  ( 362X  980-5  );103;  103- (36x9805); 

366x980-53--1015.        7.     0-993454  cm. ;  986-96. 


Chapter  XV. 

Composition  of  Velocities. 

133.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  two  velocities,  re- 
presented by  lines  drawn  from  a  point,  the  resultant  veloc- 
ity will  be  represented  by  the  diagonal,  drawn  from  that 
point,  of  the  parallelogram  described  on  the  two  lines  as 
adjacent  sides. 

Let  a  body  have  a  velocity  along  the  line  AX,  repre- 
sented by  AB,  and  at  the  same  time  let  the  line  AX  move 
parallel  to  itself,  the  end  A  always  keeping  on  A  Y,  with  a 
velocity  represented  by  AC.  It  is  evident  that  every 
point  in  AX,  and  also  the  body  moving  along  AX,  has 
this  velocity  represented  by  AC,  and  therefore  the  body 
under  consideration  has  simultaneously  velocities  repre- 
sented by  AB  and  AC.  It  is  required  to  prove  that  AD, 
the  diagonal  through  A  of  the  parallelogram  ABDC,  re- 
presents the  resultant  velocity  of  the  body. 

1).  In  any  time  t  let  the  body  move  along  AX  through 
the  distance  AP,  and  in  the  same  time  suppose  that  AX 
in  virtue  of  its  motion  moves  parallel  to  itself  through  the 
distance  A  A',  so  that  at  the  end  of  time  t  the  position  of 
AX  is  A'X.  In  AX'  take  A'P'  equal  to  AP,  then  evi- 
dently P'  is  the  position  of  the  moving  body  at  the  end  of 
time  t.  Now  AP:  AA'  =  AB:  AC,  .:  A'P' :  AA  =  CD-.AC, 
.'.  A,D,  and  P'  must  be  in  one  straight  line.  Hence  in  any 
time  t  the  body  i^  found  to  be  in  AD  or  AD  produced, 
and  therefore  the  diagonal  AD  represents  the  direction  of 
the  resultant  velocity. 

2).  Because  the  ratio  AP' :  AP  is  equal  to  the  constant 
ratio  AD  :  AB,  and  since  AP  varies  as  t,  therefore  also 
AP'  varies  as  t,  i.e.  the  velocity  along  AD  is  uniform. 


125 

3).  Because  AP' :  AP:  AA  =  AD:  AB:  AC,  therefore 
AD  represents  the  resultant  speed  on  the  same  scale  that 
AB  and  AC  represent  the  component  speeds  in  the  direc- 
tions of  AX  and  A  Y. 

The  above  important  theorem  is  called  the  Parallelo- 
gram of  Velocities.  It  may  be  lucidly  illustrated  by  the 
motion  of  a  boat  which  is  propelled  directly  across  a 
stream  whilst  carried  down  by  the  current.  The  triangle 
of  velocities  (art.  134)  is  another  way  of  expressing  the 
same  truth. 

Cor.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  two  velocities  re- 
presented by  lines  AB..  AC,  and  if  E  be  the  middle  point 
of  BC,  the  resultant  velocity  is  in  the  direction  of  AEand 
is  measured  in  magnitude  by  twice  the  length  of  AE. 

The  Triangle  of  Velocities. 

134.  If  a  body  hare  simultaneously  two  velocities  re- 
presented by  lines  AB,  BC,  the  Hue  AC  represents  the  re- 
sultant velocity. 

Cor.  1.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  three  velocities 
represented  by  the  sides  of  a  triangle  taken  in  order  {e.g. 
AB,  BC,  CA:  or  AC.  CB,  BA)  the  body  will  be  at  rest. 

Cor.  2.  If  AB,  AC  represent  the  velocities  of  a  body 
at  the  beginning  and  end  of  any  interval,  BC  represents 
the  total  acceleration  during  that  interval. 

The  Polygon  of  Velocities. 

135.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  velocities  repre- 
sented by  lines  AB,  BC,  CD,  .  .  .DM,  MN,  the  line  AN 
represents  the  resultant  velocity. 

Cor.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  velocities  repre- 
sented by  the  sides  of  any  polygon  taken  in  order,  the 
body  will  be  at  rest. 

The  polygon  of  velocities  is  immediately  deduced  by 
repeated  applications  of  the  triangle  of  velocities.  Note 
that  this  theorem  is  true  whether  the  lines  representing 


126 

the  velocities  be  all  in  one  plane  or  not.     The  following 
may  be  taken  as  an  important  particular  case. 
The  Parallelepiped  of  Velocities. 

136.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  three  velocities  re- 
presented  by  the  edges  of  a  parallelepiped  which  meet  at 
a  point  the  diagonal  of  the  parallelepiped  through  the 
point  will  represent  the  resultant  velocity. 

137.  Since  acceleration  is  measured  by  the  change  of 
velocity  per  unit  of  time  (art.  24),  it  is  evident  that  there 
are  propositions  relating  to  the  composition  of  simultaneous 
accelerations  exactly  similar  to  those  of  the  preceding 
articles  for  velocities.     Hence 

1.  The  Parallelogram,  and  Parallelepiped  of  Accelerations. 

If  a  body  have  simultaneously  two  or  three  accelera- 
tions represented  by  lines  drawn  from  a  point,  the  result- 
ant acceleration  will  be  represented  by  the  diagonal, 
drawn  from  that  point,  of  the  parallelogram  or  parallele- 
piped described  on  the  lines  as  adjacent  sides  or  edges. 

2.  The  Triangle  and  Polygon  of  Accelerations. 

If  a  body  have  simultaneously  accelerations  represented 
by  the  sides  of  any  triangle  or  polygon  taken  in  order,  the 
resultant  acceleration  will  be  zero. 

Relative   Velocity. 

138.  By  the  term  relative  velocity  we  denote  the  veloc- 
ity of  one  body  with  respect  to  or  relatively  to  another 
body.     All  velocity  is  relative  (art.  14). 

Ex.  1.  If  a  body  A  be  at  rest,  and  another  body  B  is 
moving  eastwards  with  a  speed  12  ;  or,  if  B  be  at  rest,  and 
A  is  moving  westwards  with  a  speed  12;  or,  if  A  is  moving 
westwards  with  a  speed  4,  and  B  is  moving  eastwards  with 
a  speed  8;  in  all  three  cases  the  velocity  of  B  relatively  to 
A  is  12  eastwards,  and  the  velocity  of  A  relatively  to  B  is  12 
westwards;  for  evidently  B  is  separating  from  A  eastwardly 
with  a  speed  12,  and  A  is  separating  from  B  westwardly  at 
the  same  rate. 


127 

Ex.  2.  Let  two  persons  A  and  B  start  from  the  same 
point  with  equal  speeds  v,  and  let  Pls  P>,  Ps>  •  •  •  •  be 
the  positions  in  successive  units  of  time  of  A  who  is 
travelling  northwards,  and  Qy,  Q2,  Q3,  •  •  •  •  the  correspond- 
ing positions  of  B  who  is  travelling  eastwards.  At  the 
end  of  the  first  unit  of  time.  A  is  at  a  distance  Qx  Px  or 
v  |/2  in  a  N.W.  direction  from  B;  at  the  end  of  the  second 
unit  of  time,  the  distance  is  Q2  P2  or  2  v  4/2  in  a  N.W. 
direction;  at  the  end  of  the  third  unit  of  time,  the  distance 
is  Qs  P3  or  3  v  \/2  in  a  N.W.  direction;  and  so  on.  Hence 
we  learn  that  A  is  moving  relatively  to  B  with  a  velocity 
v  |/2  in  a  N.W.  direction.  Similarly,  the  velocity  of  B 
with  respect  to  A  is  v  \/2  in  a  S.E.  direction. 

From  these  examples  it  is  evident  that  the  velocities  of 
two  bodies  with  respect  to  one  another  are  equal  in  mag- 
nitude and  opposite  in  direction. 

139.  Having  given  the  velocities  of  two  bodies,  (i.e. 
with  respect  to  the  earth),  to  determine  their  velocities 
relatively  to  one  another. 

Let  two  bodies  P  and  Q  have  velocities  represented  by 
AB.  AC  respectively.  Give  to  each  of  them  a  velocity 
represented  by  BA :  P  is  then  brought  to  rest,  and  Q  has 
a  velocity  represented  by  BC  (art.  134).  Since  the  rela- 
tive velocities  of  the  two  bodies  cannot  be  altered  by  giv- 
ing to  each  the  same  velocity,  BC  must  represent  the 
velocity  of  Q  relatively  to  P.  Similarly  by  giving  to  each 
a  velocity  represented  by  CA,  it  is  manifest  that  CB  rep- 
resents P's  velocity  relatively  to  Q.     Hence 

If  two  particles  have  velocities  represented  by  lines 
drawn  from  a  point,  the  line  joining  the  other  extremities 
of  the  two  lines  represents  the  relative  velocities  of  the 
particles.     Or  thus: 

Iftuio  particles  P  and  Q  have  velocities  represented 
by  lines  AB,  AC,  then  BC  represents  the  velocity  of  Q 
relatively  to  P,  and  CB  the  velocity  of  P  relatively  to  Q. 


128 

The  direction  of  relative  velocity  is  not  necessarily  the 
direction  of  relative  position  at  any  time.  The  latter  de- 
pends upon  the  relative  positions  of  the  bodies  at  the  be- 
ginning of  motion  as  well  as  on  their  relative  velocities. 

Cor.  If  two  particles  have  accelerations  represented  by 
lines  drawn  from  a  point,  the  line  joining  the  other  ex- 
tremities of  the  two  lines  represents  the  relative  acceler- 
ations of  the  particles. 

140.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  two  velocities  or 
accelerations  denoted  by  vx  and  v2,  and  if  i  denote  the 
angle  between  the  directions  of  vx  and  v2,  v  the  resultant 
velocity  or  acceleration,  t\  the  angle  between  the  directions 
of  v  and  v1}  and  i2,  the  angle  between  the  directions  of  v 
and  v2,  the  following  formulae  are  easily  deduced: 

v2=v12-\-v22  +  2v1  v2 cos  i  ....  ....  ....(1) 

sin  ix  =     -  sin  i,  and  sin  i2  =  — -  sin  i       ....  ....  (2) 

v  v 

v2  sin  i  i  ,  vx  sin  i  , .,  x 

tan  ix —        — .   ,  and  tan  i2 -  — ^ .       ....  (a) 

V\-\-v2  cos  /  »  v2-\-vx  cos  i 


Examination  XV. 

1.  Enunciate  and  prove  the  parallelogram  of  velocities. 
Give  three  good  physical  illustrations  thereof. 

2.  Enunciate  the  triangle,  polygon,  and  parallelepiped 
of  accelerations. 

3.  Given  the  velocities  of  two  bodies,  determine  their 
relative  velocities.  Apply  your  result,  and  illustrate  by  a 
figure,  when  the  bodies  are  moving  in  the  same  or  in 
opposite  directions. 

4.  Explain  the  directions  of  the  trade  winds,  the  anti- 
trade winds,  and  the  Gulf  stream. 

5.  Simplify  the  equations  in  art.  140  when  i  =  0,  ^n, 
and  n\  also  when  v2  =  vv 

6.  Given  the  velocities  and  accelerations  of  two  bodies, 
express  their  relative  velocities  and  accelerations  by  means 
of  algebraical  equations  similar  to  those  in  art.  140. 


129 

Exercise  XV. 

1.  Prove  that  the  resultant  of  two  equal  velocities 
bisects  the  angle  between  them;  and  conversely. 

2.  The  resultant  of  two  equal  velocities  is  equal  to 
either  of  them;  find  their  inclination. 

3.  A  river  is  12  miles  broad;  a  boat  is  rowed  directly 
across  at  the  rate  of  3  miles  per  hour;  the  current  is  2 
miles  per  hour;  how  far  does  the  boat  travel  in  crossing, 
and  how  long  does  it  take  her  to  cross? 

4.  Find  the  resultant  of  velocities  2,  2,  2,  3,  3,  3,  which 
a  particle  receives  simultaneously  in  directions  parallel  to 
the  sides  of  a  regular  hexagon  taken  in  order. 

5.  Two  persons  start  from  the  same  place,  the  first  an 
hour  before  the  second;  they  travel  along  roads  inclined 
to  one  another  at  an  angle  \  n,  each  with  a  speed  of  150 
tachs;  find  their  relative  velocity,  and  their  distance  apart 
at  the  end  of  1  hours  from  the  starting  of  the  first. 

6.  The  speed  of  light  is  3  X 1010  tachs,  and  that  of  the 
earth  in  its  orbit  3  megatachs;  what  is  the  maximum 
angular  displacement  of  a  star  owing  to  the  aberration  of 

light. 

7.  Two  straight  railroads  cross  each  other;  a  train  on 
each  line  is  approaching  the  junction  with  constant  speed; 
what  is  the  necessary  and  sufficient  condition  that  the 
trains  collide? 

8.  Two  equal  circles  in  the  same  plane  touch  each 
other,  and  from  the  point  wL  contact  two  persons  move 
along  the  circumferences  in  opposite  directions  with  equal 
speeds;  shew  that  each  will  appear  to  the  other  to  move  in 
the  circumference  of  a  circle  of  double  the  diameter  of  the 
real  circles  of  motion,  the  observer  being  in  the  circum- 
ference of  the  circle  of  apparent  motion  of  the  other. 
What  will  be  the  apparent  motions,  if  the  two  persons  start 
from  the  point  of  contact  in  the  same  direction? 


130 

9.  Two  trains,  200  and  150  ft.  long  respectively,  are 
travelling  on  a  double  track  railroad,  with  speeds  of  20  and 
25  miles  per  hour  respectively.  How  long  do  they  take  to 
pass  one  another,  1)  when  going  in  the  same  direction,  2) 
when  in  opposite  directions. 

10.  If  a  body  have  simultaneously  velocities  repre- 
sented by  p.  OA  and  q.  OB,  its  resultant  velocity  is  repre- 
sented by  (p+q)  OC,  where  C  is  a  point  in  AB,  such  that 
p.  AQ=q.  BC. 

pLL)  A  man  can  row  a  boat  at  4  miles  per  hr.  If  the 
current  of  a  river  be  2  miles  per  hr.,  in  what  direction 
must  he  row  relatively  to  either  bank  so  as  to  cross  1)  at 
right  angles  to  the  current,  2)  in  the  shortest  time? 

fl-2-jA-  ship  is  steaming  due  east  across  a  strong  south- 
ward current.  At  the  end  of  4  hours  the  ship  is  found  to 
have  gone  40  miles  30°  south  of  east.     Find  the  current. 

13.  To  a  man  walking  at  2  miles  per  hour  the  rain  ap- 
pears to  fall  vertically;  when  he  increases  his  speed  to  4 
miles  per  hour,  it  appears  to  meet  him  at  an  angle  of  \n; 
find  the  velocity  of  the  rain. 

14.  The  wind  blows  along  a  railroad,  and  two  trains 
moving  with  equal  speeds,  have  the  aqueous  cloud-track  of 
the  one  double  that  of  the  other;  find  the  ratio  of  the  speed 
of  each  train  to  that  of  the  wind. 


Answers. 

2.     §tt.  3.     7614-9  ft.;  24  min. 

4.  2.  in  the  direction  of  the  middle  velocity  3. 

5.  150,  \k  with  either  road;  1,946,998.  6.     20"-6. 

8.  Each  will  seem  to  move  from  and  to  the  other  in  a 

line  perpendicular  to  the  common  tangent. 

9.  47r8T;  m        11.     1)  trr,  2)  fcr  to  either  bank. 

12.     5  miles  per  hr.         13.     2  |/2  miles    per    hr.  at  \n    to 
vertical.         14,     3:1. 


Chapter  XVI. 
Composition  of  Forces. 

A.     Forces  whose  lines  of  action  meet  one  another. 

141.  A  single  force  which  would  produce  the  same 
effect  as  two  or  more  forces  is  called  their  resultant.  The 
term  component  is  correlative  to  resultant.  The  student 
should  familiarize  himself  with  the  term  line  of  action  of 
a  force  by  imagining  the  force  to  act  on  a  body  either 
through  a  stretched  inextensible  cord  or  through  a  rigid 
straight  rod,  when  the  line  of  the  cord  or  rod  will  be  the 
line  of  action  of  the  force,  and  the  point  at  which  the  cord 
or  rod  meets  the  body  may  be  said  to  be  the  point  at  which 
the  force  acts  on  the  body.  A  rigid  body  is  one  whose 
configuration  remains  constant,  whatever  forces  act  upon 
it.  In  the  dynamics  of  solids  (stereodynamics)  the  bodies 
are  assumed  to  be  rigid,  unless  otherwise  stated.  This 
gives  only  a  first  approximation  to  the  complete  solution 
of  problems,  but  it  is  an  approximation  sufficiently  accur- 
ate for  most  practical  purposes.  We  speak  of  the  tension 
of  a  stretched  cord,  assuming  thereby  that  the  stress  be- 
tween every  pair  of  contiguous  particles  is  the  same.  If  we 
may  neglect  the  weight  of  the  cord,  this  may  be  taken  as 
an  immediate  result  of  Newton's  third  law  (art.  58),  and  if 
the  cord  passes  round  any  smooth  surface,  e.g.  a  peg,  the 
tension  remains  unaltered,  as  any  smooth  surface  can  only 
exert  force  normal  to  itself,  and  this  will  not  affect  the 
stress  along  the  cord,  as  will  appear  in  what  follows.  A 
force  is  completely  represented  by  a  straight  line,  when 
the  line  is  the  actual  line  of  action  of  the  force,  and  its 
length  measures  the  magnitude  of  the  force.  Any  parallel 
line  of  equal  length  would  represent  the  force  in  magni- 
tude and  direction. 


132 

142.  The  resultant  of  any  number  of  forces  which  hove 
the  same  line  of  action  is  their  algebraical  sum. 

Let/l5 /2,  —fz,—f±,  /5,  .  .  .  denote  any  forces  (in  dynes 
or  poundals)  acting  on  a  particle  of  mass  m  (in  grams  or 
pounds).  If  alt  a2,  —a3,  -  «4,  a5, .  .  .denote  the  accelerations 
(in  tachs  or  vels  per  second)  which  the  forces  acting 
separately  would  respectively  produce,  then  when  all  the 
forces  act  simultaneously,  the  resultant  acceleration  will 
be  Oi+a2  _  «3~  #-4+«5  •■•  •>  an(i  therefore  the  resultant 
force  m  (a^+a®  -  «s  -  «4+«5  ■••  >)•  If  therefore  /  denote 
the  resultant  force,  f=m  («!  +  a2  -  a3  -  aA  +  a5  .  .  .) 
=  ma1+ma2-ma3  -  ma^+ma5  .  .  .  =fi-\-f2  -/s  -ft+fs  ■  •  • 

143.  From  the  parallelogram  of  velocities  we  passed  at 
once  to  the  parallelogram  of  accelerations  (art.  137).  When 
now  we  take  into  consideration  the  mass  of  the  moving 
body,  we  at  once  deduce  the  parallelogram  of  accelerations 
of  momentum,  or  as  it  is  more  commonly  called, 

The  Parallelogram  of  Forces. 

If  two  forces  acting  on  a  particle  be  represented  in 
magnitude  and  direction  by  lines  drawn  from  a  point,  the 
resultant  force  will  be  represented  in  magnitude  and 
direction  by  the  diagonal,  drawn  from  that  point,  of  the 
parallelogram  described  on  the  two  lines  as  adjacent  si<les. 

Denote  by/!,/2,  and  m,  the  forces  and  the  mass  of  the 
particle,  and  by  /  the  resultant  force.  If  a1}  a2,  a  denote 
the  accelerations  produced  by  flf  f2,  f  respectively,  then 
a1=fi/m,  a2—f2/m,  a=f/m,  (art.  56).  Let  the  lines  AB, 
AC  represent /^T^  and  complete  the  parallelogram  ABDC. 
Since  a^  :  a2— f\  '-f>,  AB,  AC  may  be  taken  to  represent 
the  accelerations  alf  a2,  and  then  AD  will  represent  the 
resultant  acceleration  a  (art.  137.)  Therefore  AD  must 
be  the  direction  of  the  resultant  force/,  and  since  ci\  :  a2  :  a 
-fi  '•  fi  :f  AD  must  also  represent  the  resultant  force  in 
magnitude  on  the  same  scale  as  AB,  AC  represent  the 
components. 


133 

Cor.  1.  If  AB,  AC  represent  two  forces  acting  upon  a 
particle  A,  and  if  E  be  the  middle  point  of  BC,  the  re- 
sultant will  be  completely  represented  by  2  AE. 

Cor.  2.  If  two  equal  forces  (/,  /)  act  upon  a  particle 
at  an  inclination  i,  the  resultant  is  2/  cos  \  i,  and  is  equally 
inclined  to  the  components. 

Cor.  3.  When  /  is  substituted  for  v  in  art.  140,  the 
formulae  apply  equally  well  to  forces  acting  upon  a  particle. 

144.  The  parallelogram  of  forces  can  be  proved  experi- 
mentally by  simple  mechanical  contrivances,  as  explained 
in  treatises  on  Experimental  Physics. 

The  triangle  of  forces  is  another  way  of  stating  the 
same  truth.  Observe  the  use  of  the  term  particle  in  these 
enunciations.  If  body  were  used,  it  would  be  necessary  to 
add  that  the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces  were  concurrent. 

The  Triangle  of  Forces: 

If  three  forces  acting  upon  a  particle  can  be  repre- 
sented in  magnitude  and  direction  by  the  sides  of  a 
triangle  taken  in  order,  they  will  keep  the  'particle  in 
equilibrium.     Or  thus: 

If  two  forces  acting  on  a  particle  be  represented  in 
magnitude  and  direction  by  two  sides  of  a  triangle  taken 
in  order,  the  resultant  force  will  be  represented  by  the 
third  side  taken  in  the  reverse  order. 

Conversely:  If  three  forces  acting  on  a  particle  keep 
it  in  equilibrium,  an<l  a  triangle  be  drawn  having  its  sides 
parallel  to  the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces,  the  magnitudes 
of  the  forces  will  be  proportional  to  the  lengths  of  the 
sides  of  the  triangle  respectively  parallel  to  thou. 

Cor.  1,  If  three  forces  keep  a  particle  in  equilibrium, 
and  a  triangle  be  drawn  having  its  sides  perpendicular  to 
the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces,  the  magnitudes  of  the 
forces  will  be  proportional  to  the  lengths  of  the  sides  of 
the  triangle  respectively  perpendicular  to  them. 


134 

Cor.  2.     If  P,  Q,  R  represent  three  forces  which  keep 
a  particle  in  equilibrium,  and  A,  B,  C  denote  the  angles 
between  the  directions  of  Q  and  R,  R  and  P,  P  and  Q  re- 
spectively, then  P:  Q:R=sin  J.:  sin  B-.sin  C. 
The  Polygon  of  Forces: 

145.  If  (my  number  of  forces,  whose  lines  of  action  are 
concurrent,  can  be  represented  in  magnitude  and  direction 
by  the  sides  of  a  polygon  taken  in  order,  they  will  be  in 
equilibrium.     Or  thus: 

If  any  number  of  forces,  whose  lines  of  action  are  con- 
current, be  represented  in  magnitude  and  direction  by  the 
sides  of  a  polygon  but  one,  taken  in  order,  the  remaining 
side  taken  in  the  reverse  order  will  represent  the  resultant 
force  in  magnitude  and  direction. 

The  polygon  of  forces  is  immediately  deduced  by  re- 
peated applications  of  the  triangle  of  forces.  The  converse 
is  not  true.  This  will  be  understood  at  once  when  it  is  re- 
membered that  equiangular  polygons  are  not  necessarily 
similar.  Note  further  that  the  polygon  of  forces  is  true 
whether  the  forces  all  act  in  one  plane  or  not.  It  contains 
a  geometrical  solution  of  the  problem:  To  determine  the 
resultant  of  any  number  of  forces  acting  upon  a  rigid  body 
wltose  lines  of  action  are  concurrent.  The  parallelepiped 
of  forces  may  be  taken  as  a  particular  case. 

Resolution  of  Velocities  and  Forces. 

146.  Just  as  two  or  more  velocities  or  forces  can  be 
compounded  into  one  resultant,  so  can  any  velocity  or  force 
be  resolved  into  two  or  more  components.  Thus  if  AD 
represent  a  velocity  or  force,  and  it  be  desired  to  resolve  it 
into  components  in  the  directions  of  A X  and  A  Y,  draw 
DB,  DC  parallel  to  AY  and  AX  respectively,  to  meet 
these  lines  in  B  and  D,  then  the  components  will  be  repre- 
sented by  AB  and  AC.  When  the  components  are  to  be 
in  one  plane,  the  solution  is  determinate  if  there  be  only  two 
components,  but  indeterminate  if  more  than  two  (art.  145). 


135 

The  only  important  case  of  the  resolution  of  force  is 
that  in  directions  at  right  angles  to  one  another.  The 
component  in  any  direction  is  then  called  the  resolved 
force,  or  the  resolute,  or  the  principal  component  in  that 
direction,  or  better,  simply  the  component  in  that  direction; 
it  measures  the  effectiveness  of  the  force  in  that  direction. 
If  i  denote  the  angle  between  the  line  of  action  of  a  force 
ff  and  its  principal  component  in  any  direction,  the  com- 
ponent will  be  measured  by /cos  i. 

147.  The  algebraical  sum  of  the  principal  components  in 
any  direction  of  two  forces,  which  act  upon  a  particle,  is 
equal  to  the  principal  component  in  the  same  direction  of 
the  resultant  of  the  two  forces. 

Let  AB,  AC  represent  the  forces,  and  AD  their  result- 
ant. If  XAY  be  the  direction  in  which  the  forces  are  to 
be  resolved,  draw  BE,  CF,  DG  perpendicular  to  XAY. 
Since  AC  and  BD  are  equal  and  parallel,  their  projections 
AF,  EG  on  XY  are  equal.  Now  AG  =  AE  +  EG  = 
AE-\-AF;  which  proves  the  proposition. 

If  AE  be  reckoned  +  ,  AF  and  AG  will  be  +  or  - 
according  as  F  and  G  lie  on  the  same  or  opposite  side  of 
A  as  E  does. 

The  proposition  can  evidently  be  extended  to  any  num- 
ber of  forces  whatsoever,  and  we  therefore  deduce  :  The 
effectiveness  in  any  direction  of  any  number  of  forces  act- 
inn  upon  a  particle  is  measured  by  the  principal  compon- 
ent in  that  direction  of  the  resultant  of  the  forces. 

148.  To  determine  algebraically  the  resultant  of  any 
number  of  forces  acting  on  a  particle. 

For  simplicity  we  shall  confine  ourselves  to  forces  in 
one  plane.  Let  0  denote  the  particle,  and/i,-/a./3i  •  •  • tne 
forces.  Draw  through  O  any  axes  OX,  OY,  at  right 
angles  to  one  another,  and  let  alf  a2,  a3}.  .  .  denote  the 
angles  which  the  forces  make  with  OX.  Let  R  denote  the 
resultant  force,  and  A  its  inclination  to  OX.  Then  (art.  147) 


136 

R  cos  A  =/i  cos  «!  4-/2  cos  o2  +/s  c°s  a3  + .  .  .  =  2  (f  cos  a) 
i?  sin  ^4  =/i  sin  ax  +/2  sin  0-2+/3  sin  «3  +  •  •  •  =  2  (/  sin  a) 
.-.  i22={2'(/cosa)P+ii'(/sina)i2 
tan  J.  =  -T(/sin  a)/2(f  cos  a). 

Cor.     If    the    forces^are   in    equilibrium,    B  =  0;  then 
^(/cos  a)=  0,  ^'(/si11  «)  =0 
which  express  in  algebraical  language  the  necessary  and 
sufficient  conditions  of  equilibrium  of  any  system  of  forces 
acting  on  a  particle  in  one  plane. 


Examination  XVI. 

1.  Define  the  terms  resultant,  rigid,  the  component  in 
any  direction,  stereodynamics,  equilibrium. 

2.  Enunciate  and  prove  the  parallelogram,  triangle, 
and  polygon  of  forces.  Enunciate  these  conversely,  and 
state  which  then  remain  true. 

3.  Deduce  the  algebraical  equations  between  any  two 
forces  and  their  resultant,  and  write  down  the  resultant  of 
two  equal  forces  P,  P  acting  at  an  angle  2  A. 

4.  State  and  prove  the  relations  between  3  forces  in 
equilibrium,  and  the  angles  between  the  lines  of  action. 

5.  Determine,  both  geometrically  and  algebraically, 
the  resultant  of  any  number  of  forces  acting  upon  a 
particle. 

6.  Prove  that  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  components  in 
any  direction  of  any  number  of  forces,  which  act  upon  a 
particle,  is  equal  to  the  component  in  the  same  direction 
of  the  resultant  of  the  forces. 

7.  Express,  both  geometrically  and  algebraically,  the 
necessary  and  sufficient  conditions  of  equilibrium  of  any 
number  of  forces,  which  act  upon  a  particle. 


137 

Exercise  XVI. 

1.  Prove  that  three  equal  forces,  whose  lines  of  action 
pass  through  one  point,  and  are  inclined  to  one  another  at 
an  angle  of  §7r,  will  be  in  equilibrium. 

2.  A  cricket  ball  of  200  grams  is  moving  eastward  with 
a  speed  of  45  metres  per  second;  find  the  impulse  necessary 
to  make  it  move  northwards  with  an  equal  speed. 

3.  Prove  that  forces  represented  by  lines  drawn  from 
the  angular  points  of  a  triangle  to  the  middle  points  of  the 
opposite  sides  are  in  equilibrium. 

/  4.  A  body  of  10  kilograms  is  supported  by  two  strings 
whose  lengths  are  1*2  and  0*9  metre;  the  other  ends  of  the 
strings  are  fastened  at  two  points  in  a  horizontal  line  1^ 
metre  apart;  find  the  tensions  of  the  strings. 

5.  Two  forces  acting  at  M  are  represented  by  MA  and 
MB,  and  two  others  acting  at  N  by  NC  and  ND;  shew 
that  the  four  forces  cannot  be  in  equilibrium  unless  MX 
bisects  both  AB  and  CD. 

6.  Find  tlie  northward  and  eastward  velocities  of  a  ship 
which  is  sailing  in  a  direction  N.  30  E.  with  a  speed  of 
12  miles  per  hour,  and  is  carried  in  a  S.W.  direction  by  a 
current  which  flows  at  the  rate  of  2  miles  per  hour. 

7.  Shew  that  if  the  angle  at  which  two  given  forces  are 
inclined  to  one  another  be  increased,  their  resultant  is  di- 
minished. 

8.  The  circumference  of  a  circle  is  divided  into  any 
number  of  equal  parts;  shew  that  equal  forces  acting  at 
the  centre  towards  the  points  of  division  are  in  equilibrium. 

9.  A  picture  is  suspended  by  a  cord  passed  round  a 
smooth  pin  and  fastened  to  two  rings  on  the  picture  frame; 
if  10  kilograms  be  the  mass  of  the  picture,  and  30:  the  in- 
clination of  the  two  parts  of  the  cord,  find  the  tension  of 
the  cord. 


138 

10  A  sphere  of  2  tonnes  rests  on  two  smooth  planes 
inclined  to  the  horizon  at  angles  of  60°  and  30c;  find  the 
pressure  on  each  plane. 

11.  Three  pegs  A,  B,  C  are  stuck  in  a  vertical  wall  so 
as  to  form  an  equilateral  triangle,  having  A  highest  and 
BC  horizontal ;  a  string  passed  over  the  pegs  supports  a 
kilogram  at  each  end;  find  the  pressure  on  each  peg. 

12.  If  the  ends  of  the  string  (Ex.  11)  be  attached  to  a 
body  of  2  kilograms,  which  is  then  supported  at  a  point  D, 
so  that  DBC  is  an  equilateral  triangle  below  ABC;  find 
the  pressures  on  the  pegs. 

13.  A  boat  is  tied  by  a  rope  to  the  right  bank  of  a  river 
flowing  N.E.,  and  is  acted  upon  by  a  pressure  S  from  the 
river  and  a  pressure  T^from  a  S.E.  wind;  find  the  tension 
and  direction  of  the  rope. 

14.  A  body  of  12  lbs.  is  suspended  from  a  point  by  a 
string  6  ft.  long,  and  is  acted  on  by  a  horizontal  force  of 
9  lbs.-wt.;  find  how  far  the  body  is  displaced  and  the  ten- 
sion of  the  string. 

15.  Two  bodies  of  5  kilograms  each  are  connected  by  a 
string  which  is  passed  over  2  smooth  pegs  in  a  horizontal 
line  1  m.  apart;  a  body  of  3  kilograms  is  then  hooked  on 
to  the  string  between  the  pegs;  how  far  will  it  descend? 

16.  Forces  are  represented  by  4  lines  OA,  OB,  OC,  OD; 
shew  that  their  resultant  is  represented  by  4  00,  O  being 
the  middle  point  of  the  line  which  joins  the  points  of 
bisection  of  AC  and  BD. 

17.  Forces  act  at  the  middle  points  of  the  sides  of  a 
rigid  polygon,  in  the  plane  of  the  polygon  and  at  right 
angles  to  the  sides;  if  the  forces  be  proportional  to  the 
sides  to  which  they  are  respectively  perpendicular,  shew 
that  if  they  all  act  outwards  or  all  act  inwards,  they  will 
be  in  equilibrium. 


139 

18.  A  string  is  wrapped  around  a  regular  smooth  poly- 
gon of  n  sides  and  pulled  with  a  tension  T;  find  the  total 
crushing  force  at  the  angular  points  of  the  polygon. 
Hence  determine  the  total  pressure,  and  the  pressure  per 
unit  of  length,  on  the  circumference  of  a  smooth  circular 
hoop  in  like  circumstances. 

19.  The  circumference  of  a  circle  (radius  r)  is  divided 
into  any  number  (n)  of  equal  parts;  find  the  resultant  of 
a  system  of  forces  acting  at  one  of  the  points  of  division 
and  represented  by  the  straight  lines  drawn  from  that 
point  to  the  other  points  of  division.     See  ex.  8. 

20.  Forces  acting  on  a  particle  are  represented  by  lines 
drawn  to  the  angular  points  of  a  triangle  from  the  centre 
of  the  circumscribing  circle  ;  prove  that  the  resultant  is 
represented  by  the  line  drawn  from  the  same  point  to  the 
intersection  of  the  perpendiculars  on  the  sides  from  the 
angular  points. 

21.  Three  forces  P,  Q,  R  represented  by  AB,  AC,  AD 
act  on  a  particle  A  and  keep  it  at  rest;  if  the  direction  of 
P  be  fixed,  but  that  of  Q  vary,  find  the  locus  of  D  which 
determines  the  direction  of  R. 


Answers. 

2.     1,272,792  gramtachs  N.W.        4.     6  and  8  kilogrs-wt. 

6.     8-9781  and  4-5858  miles  per  hr.         9.     5176-4  grs.-wt. 

10.     1  tonne-wt.;  1732  kilogrs-wt.         11.     1732,  517-6,  and 

517-6  grs.-wt.       12.     2000, 1154-7,  and  1154-7  grs.-wt. 

13.  \{S2+  W2)  at  tan-1  '  IV /S  to  the  bank. 

14.  3-8  ft.;  15  lbs.-wt.        15.     157. 

18.  2  nT  sin  n/n;  2  tt  T,  T/r. 

19.  A  force  measured  by  nr  towards  the  centre. 

21.     A  sphere  with   radius  equal   to  AC,  and  centre  at  E 
in  BA  produced  so  that  AE-AB. 


Chapter  XVII. 
Motion  and  Equilibrium  on  an  Inclined  Plane. 

149.  As  practical  applications  of  the  principles  of  the 
preceding  chapter  let  us  consider  (1)  the  motion  of  a  heavy 
body  sliding  on  an  inclined  plane,  (2)  the  conditions  of 
equilibrium  of  such  a  body. 

A  body  slides  down  an  inclined  plane,  to  determine  the 
nature  of  the  motion. 

The  body  is  acted  upon  by  two  forces;  (1)  its  weight  or 
the  attraction  of  the  earth,  which  acts  vertically  down- 
wards, (2)  the  pressure  of  the  plane.  The  latter  is  gener- 
ally divided  into  the  two  principal  components,  1)  the 
normal  pressure  of  the  plane,  2)  the  tangential  action  or 
friction,  which  being  always  opposite  to  the  direction  of 
motion,  acts  along  the  plane  upwards.  Let  m  denote  the 
mass  of  the  body,  mg  its  weight  (art.  63),  R  the  normal 
pressure  of  the  plane,  F  the  friction,  and  a  the  inclination 
of  the  plane  to  the  horizon.  Resolving  the  forces  along 
and  perpendicularly  to  the  plane  the  components  are 
mg  sin  a  —  F,  and  R  —  mg  cos  a 

Since  there  is  no  motion  perpendicular  to  the  plane 
R-mg  cos  «  =  0,  .-.  R  =  mg  cos  a. 

If  k  denote  the  coefficient  of  friction  between  the  body 
and  the  plane,  F=kR  =  kmg  cos  a  (art.  122);  therefore  the 
resultant  force  acting  along  the  plane  which  moves  the 
body  is  mg  sin  a  —  kmg  cos  a.  The  acceleration  of  the 
body  is  therefore  g (sin  a  -  k  cos  a)  which  is  constant. 
From  this  we  see  that  the  motion  of  a  body  sliding  down 
an  inclined  plane  is  exactly  similar  to  that  of  a  body  fall- 
ing freely,  the  only  difference  being  that  the  acceleration 
of  the  body  is  less. 


141 

Cor.  1.  If  a  body  be  projected  up  an  inclined  plane, 
the  motion  is  uniformly  accelerated,  the  acceleration  being 
g  (sin  a  +  k  cos  a)  down  the  plane. 

Cor  2.  If  the  plane  be  smooth, the,  acceleration  is  g  sin  a 
downwards,  whether  the  body  be  moving  up  or  down. 

150.  If  there  be  no  acceleration,  but  the  body  either 
moving  or  just  about  to  move,  g  (sin  a-k  cos  a)=0,  and 
therefore  fc=tan  a. 

a  is  then  called  the  angle  of  friction  or  angle  of  repose. 
It  is  the  greatest  inclination  a  plane  can  be  made  to  take 
without  the  body,  when  laid  on  the  plane,  actually  sliding 
down.  At  any  less  inclination  the  body  will  not  slide, 
but  then  the  maximum  friction  is  not  called  into  play.  The 
angle  of  repose  is  beautifully  illustrated  in  the  slopes  of 
moving  sand-dunes. 

The  above  value  of  k  points  out  one  of  the  best  and 
simplest  methods  of  practically  determining  the  coeffi- 
cient of  friction  between  two  surfaces. 

151.  The  following  propositions  are  of  interest  in  illus- 
trating principles  and  affording  intellectual  exercise. 

1.  The  time  of  sliding  from  rest  down  any  smooth  chord 
of  a  sphere  drawn  from  the  highest  or  lowest  point  is 
constant. 

Let  d  denote  the  diameter,  and  i  the  inclination  of  the 
chord  to  the  vertical  diameter.  The  length  of  the  chord 
will  be  d  cos  i,  and  the  acceleration  of  any  body  sliding 
down  the  chord  g  cos  i  (art.  149,  cor.  2),  therefore  the 
time  of  descent  down  the  chord  will  be  j/  (2d/g.)  This  is 
a  constant  quantity,  and  is  the  time  of  falling  freely 
through  a  diameter  of  the  sphere,  which  might  be  expected 
as  the  vertical  diameter  is  one  of  the  chords. 

2.  If  two  spheres  touch  at  their  highest  or  lowest  points, 
the  time  of  sliding  from  rest  down  any  smooth  straight  line, 
intercepted  between  the  surfaces  and  passing  through  the 
point  of  contact,  is  constant. 


142 

Let  A  be  the  point  of  contact,  AB  and  ^4Cthe  vertical 
diameters  of  the  spheres,  and  DE  any  line  through  A 
meeting  the  spheres  in  D  and  E.  On  BC  as  diameter,  let 
a  sphere  be  described,  touching  the  other  spheres  in  B  and 
C.  Join  DB  and  EC.  Let  EC  cut  the  sphere  BC  in  F, 
and  join  BE.  Evidently  DEEB  is  a  rectangle,  so  that 
DE  is  parallel  and  equal  to  BF,  and  tlierefore  the  time  of 
descent  down  DE  is  equal  to  that  down  BF,  which  is 
equal  to  the  time  of  descent  down  BC  (prop.  1),  i.e.  the 
time  any  body  would  take  to  fall  freely  through  a  distance 
equal  to  the  difference  or  sum,  according  as  the  spheres 
touch  internally  or  externally,  of  the  diameters  of  the 
spheres. 

152.  In  these  propositions  we  have  the  keys  to  the  solu- 
tion of  a  set  of  interesting  problems  relating  to  lines  of 
quickest  or  slowest  descent.  The  following  will  serve  as 
illustrations.     The  lines  are  supposed  to  be  smooth. 

1.  To  find   the    lines  of  quickest  and  slowest  descent 
from  a  given  sphere  to  a  given  point  without  it. 

Let  0  be  the  centre  of  the  sphere  and  A  the  point. 
Draw  the  vertical  radius  OB.  Join  AB  and  let  C  be  the 
other  point  in  which  AB  meets  the  sphere.  CA  will  be 
the  line  of  quickest  or  slowest  descent  according  as  B  is 
the  highest  or  lowest  point  of  the  sphere.  Join  OC  and 
produce  it  to  meet  the  vertical  line  through  A  in  P.  F  is 
the  centre  of  a  sphere  having  A  for  its  lowest  point  and 
touching  the  sphere  0  in  C.  Take  any  other  point  E  in 
the  sphere  O.  Join  EA  and  let  F  be  the  other  point  in 
which  EA  meets  the  sphere  P.  Now  the  time  of  descent 
down  CA  is  equal  to  the  time  of  descent  down  FA  (art. 
151,  1).  and  therefore  less  or  greater  than  the  time  of  de- 
scent down  EA. 

2.  To  find  the  lines  of  quickest   and  slowest   descent 
from  the  higher  of  two  given  spheres,  without  one  (mother, 

to  the  lower. 


143 

Let  O  and  P  be  the  centres  of  the  two  spheres,  A  the 
highest  or  lowest  point  of  the  former,  and  B  the  lowest  or 
highest  point  of  the  latter.  Join  AB  and  let  C  and  D  be 
the  other  points  in  which  AB  meets  the  spheres.  CD  is 
the  line  required. 

Join  PD  and  produce  it  to  meet  the  vertical  radius  OA 
in  Q.  Q  is  the  centre  of  a  sphere  which  will  touch  the 
spheres  O  and  P  in  A  and  D  respectively.  By  last  prob- 
lem CD  is  the  line  of  quickest  or  slowest  descent  from  the 
sphere  0  to  the  point  D.  Take  any  other  point  E  in  the 
sphere  P.  Join  AE  and  let  F  and  G  be  the  other  points 
in  which  AE  meets  the  spheres  0  and  Q.  FE  is  the  line 
of  quickest  or  slowest  descent  from  the  sphere  0  to  the 
point  E.  But  the  time  of  descent  down  CD  is  equal  to  the 
time  of  descent  down  FG  (art.  151,  2),  and  therefore  less 
or  greater  than  the  time  of  descent  down  FE. 

153.  Let  us  now  consider  the  conditions  of  equilibrium 
of  a  heavy  body  resting  on  an  inclined  plane  and  acted  on 
by  some  force  P  in  addition  to  those  already  considered. 

Let  a  denote  the  inclination  of  the  plane  to  the  horizon, 
b  the  inclination  of  P's  direction  to  the  plane,  W  the 
body's  weight,  R  the  normal  pressure  of  the  plane,  and  k 
the  coefficient  of  friction.  P  is  supposed  to  act  in  the 
same  vertical  plane  as  W  and  R. 

1.  If  P  just  prevents  the  body  from  sliding  down,  or 
the  body  is  sliding  down  uniformly,  the  friction  equals  kR 
and  acts  along  the  plane  upwards.  Resolving  the  forces 
along  and  at  right  angles  to  the  plane, 

Pcos  b -j-kR -W sin  a  =  0,     P  sin  b  +  R  -  W  cos  a =0, 

i             D      Jxr  sin  a .  —  k  cos  a       D      JIr       cos  (a  -\-b) 
whence  P=  W—   — — : ,     R=  W — -^ — : — r 

cos  b  —  k  sin  b  cos  6  -  A'  sin   b 

2.  If  the  body  is  just  about  to  move  up  the  plane,  or 
moves  up  uniformly,  the  friction  will  be  along  the  plane 
downwards,  and  we  get 

p_  rar8"1  (i  +  k  cos  a       z>  _  tit      cos  (a  +  ^) 

cos  b  +  k  sin  6'  cos  6  +  k  sin  b 


144 

If/ denote  the  angle  of  friction  (art.  150),  fc  =  tan/; 
substituting  this  value  of  k  in  the  above,  we  find  that  for 
equilibrium  P  must  lie  between 

wsm_(a-f)    and  Trsin  (a+f) 
cos  (b+f)  cos  (&  —  /") 

Cor.  1.     If  there  be  no  friction  A;  =  0,  and  we  get 

P  :  W  :  R  =  sin  a  :  cos  b  :  cos  (a  +  b). 
Cor.  2.     If  P  act  along  the  plane,  b  =  0,  and  we  get 

P  :  W  :  P  =  sin  «=p/>"  cos  a  :  1  :  cos  «. 
Cor.  3.  If  the  force  P  act  along  the  plane  and  there  be 
no  friction,  k=0  and  6=0,  and  we  get 

P  :  W  :  i?  =  sin  a  :  1  :  cos  a,  i.e. 

=  height  of  plane  :  length  :  horizontal  base. 

Cor.  4.  For  different  values  of  b,  P  in  dragging  up  is 
least  when  6=/,  it  value  being  then  W  sin  (a  +/);  and  this 
becomes  IF  sin /"when  a  =0,  i.e.  when  the  body  is  dragged 
along  a  horizontal  plane. 


Examination  XVII. 

1.  Write  down  the  equations  of  motion  of  a  body  sliding 
down  a  rough  inclined  plane,  and  of  a  body  projected  up 
1)  a  smooth,  2)  a  rough  inclined  plane. 

2.  A  body  is  projected  up  a  rough  inclined  plane,  find 
the  time  taken  to  return  to  the  point  of  projection,  and  the 
speed  on  reaching  it.  What  becomes  of  the  molar  energy 
lost? 

3.  Define  the  angle  of  friction,  and  prove  the  relation 
between  it  and  the  coefficient  of  friction. 

4.  Shew  that  the  kinetic  energy  acquired  by  a  body 
sliding  down  a  smooth  plane  is  the  same  as  it  would  have- 
acquired  in  falling  freely  through  the  same  vertical  height. 

5.  Find  the  limiting  values  of  the  force  which  will 
keep  a  body  in  equilibrium  on  an  inclined  plane.  Explain 
what  takes  place  for  other  values  of  the  force. 


145 

6.  Find  the  direction  and  magnitude  of  the  least  force 
required  to  drag  a  body  1)  up  an  inclined  plane,  2)  along 
a  horizontal  plane. 

7.  If  a  body  is  dragged  up  an  inclined  plane  by  a  force 
acting  along  the  plane,  shew  that  the  work  done  is  the 
same  as  in  dragging  it  along  the  base  supposed  to  be  of 
the  same  material  as  the  plane  itself,  and  then  raising  it 
vertically  through  the  height  of  the  plane. 


Exercise   XVII. 

(  1/)A  body  lies  on  a  horizontal  slab  10  feet  long  ;  if  the 
coefficient  of  friction  be  |,  bow  high  may  one  end  of  the 
slab  be  raised  before  the  body  will  begin  to  slide  down. 

2.  Find  the  speed  with  which  a  body  must  be  projected 
up  a  rough  plane,  inclined  to  the  horizon  at  an  angle  of 
30°,  so  as  to  travel  just  10  metres  up  the  plane,  the  co- 
efficient of  friction  being  tan  30.  Find  also  the  time  it 
will  take  to  descend  10  metres,  if  projected  downwards 
with  a  speed  of  100  tachs. 

3.  A  body  of  10  kilograms  hanging  freely  is  connected 
by  a  cord  passing  over  a  small  smooth  pully  with  another 
body  of  4  kilograms  resting  on  a  plane  inclined  to  the 
horizon  at  \tz;  if  |  be  the  coefficient  of  friction  between 
the  latter  body  and  the  plane,  find  the  acceleration  of 
motion  and  the  tension  of  the  cord. 

4.  A  plane  is  inclined  to  the  horizon  at  an  angle  \ic\ 
find  into  what  two  parts  a  body  of  LOO  Lbs.  must  be  divided, 
so  that  one  part,  connected  by  a  string  with  the  other  and 
hanging  over  the  plane,  may  balance  the  other  part  resting 
on  the  plane,  fc  =  tan  30-. 

5.  At  what  rate  can  an  engine  of  30  horse-power  draw 
a  train  of  50  tons  up  an  incline  1  in  250,  the  resistance 
from  friction  being  7  lbs.-wt.  per- ton? 


146 

6.  It  is  found  that  it  requires  double  the  force  acting 
along  an  inclined  plane  just  to  drag  a  body  up,  as  it  does 
just  to  keep  the  body  from  sliding  down;  find  the  relation 
between  a  and  k. 

7.  A  railway  carriage,  detached  from  a  train  when  going 
up  an  incline  of  1  in  280,  is  found  to  move  over  1500  yds. 
before  it  begins  to  descend;  if  the  friction  be  6|  lbs.-wt. 
per  ton,  find  the  speed  of  the  train. 

8.  If  the  train  (ex.  7)  were  going  at  the  rate  of  30  miles 
an  hour  on  a  level  piece  of  road  when  the  carriage  was  de- 
tached, how  long  and  how  far  would  the  carriage  move  be- 
fore stopping? 

9.  Find  the  lines  of  quickest  and  slowest  descent  from 
a  point  without  a  sphere  to  the  sphere. 

10.  Find  the  lines  of  quickest  descent  between  a  sphere 
and  a  point  within  it. 

11.  Find  the  lines  of  quickest  descent  (1)  from  a 
straight  line  without  a  circle  to  the  circle,  (2)  from  a  circle 
to  a  straight  line  without  it,  the  circle  and  line  being  in 
the  same  vertical  plane. 

12.  Find  the  lines  of  quickest  descent  between  two 
spheres,  one  being  within  the  other. 

13.  If  I  be  the  distance  of  a  point  from  a  plane  and  a 
the  inclination  of  the  plane  to  the  horizon,  find  the  short- 
est time  in  which  a  body  can  fall  from  the  one  to  the  other. 

14.  Find  the  locus  of  a  point  without  a  sphere  of  radius 
r,  such  that  the  shortest  time  in  which  a  body  can  fall  be- 
tween the  point  and  the  sphere  is  equal  to  /. 

15.  Find  the  same  (ex.  14)  when  /  is  the  longest  time  a 
body  can  take  to  fall. 

16.  A  body  of  30  lbs.  descending  under  the  action  of  its 
weight  draws  another  body  of  30  lbs.  up  a  plane  50  ft.  long 
inclined  at  ^tt  to  the  horizon,  by  means  of  a  cord  passing 
over  a  small  smooth  pully ;  find  when  the  cord  must  be  cut, 


147 

in  order  that  the  ascending  body  may  just  reach  the  top  of 
the  plane,  1)  when  the  plane  is  smooth,  2)  when  A*  =  ^. 

17.  Two  bodies  support  one  another  on  a  rough  double 
inclined  plane  by  means  of  a  fine  string  passing  over  the 
vertex,  and  no  friction  is  called  into  play;  shew  that  the 
plane  may  be  tilted  about  either  extremity  of  the  base 
through  an  angle  2/ without  disturbing  the  equilibrium,/ 
being  the  angle  of  friction  and  both  angles  of  the  plane 
being  less  than  \it  -f. 

18.  A  body  is  kept  in  equilibrium  on  an  inclined  plane 
by  a  force  in  a  given  direction;  prove  that  the  pressure  of 
the  plane,  if  the  plane  be  smooth,  is  an  harmonic  mean 
between  the  greatest  and  least  normal  pressures,  if  it  be 
rough. 


Answers. 

1.     6  ft.         2.     1400-4;  10.        3.     387-75;  6045-8  grs.-wt. 
4.     The  hanging  body  may  be  any  mass  not  greater  than 

50.         5.     15  miles  per  hr.         6.     tan  a—Sk. 
7.     30  miles  per  hr.         8.     7  min.  17-7  sec;  3210  yds. 
9  and  10.     The   lines    through    the    lowest   and   highest 

points  of  the  sphere. 

11.  Through  A  the  lowest  or  highest  point  of  the  circle 

draw  the  tangent  AB  meeting  the  line  in  B:  take 
BC  up  or  down  the  line  equal  to  BA:  join  CA 
cutting  the  circle  in  D;  CD  is  the  required  line. 

12.  The  lines  between  the  two  lowest  and  the  two  highest 

points  of  the  spheres.         13.     (sep.  ^a)i/(2l/g). 

14.  Spheres   of   radius    r-\-\gt2,  which  touch   the   given 

sphere  internally  at  its  highest  and  lowest  points. 

15.  Spheres   of   radius   \gt%-r,    which    touch    the  given 

sphere  externally  at  its  highest  and  lowest  points. 

16.  After  going  1)  33|  ft.,  2)  441  ft. 


Chapter  XVIII. 

Composition  of  Forces. 

B.     Forces  whose  lines  of  action  are  parallel. 

154.  In  Chapter  XVI.  we  considered  the  composition 
of  forces  whose  lines  of  action  passed  through  one  point, 
and  could  then  neglect  the  dimensions  of  the  body,  or 
speak  of  the  forces  as  acting  on  a  particle.  From  the  very 
nature  of  the  case  we  cannot  neglect  the  dimensions  of  a 
body  in  determining  the  resultant  of  parallel  forces  acting 
upon  it.  Forces  whose  lines  of  action  are  parallel  and  act 
in  the  same  direction  are  called  like  parallel  forces;  if  they 
act  in  opposite  directions,  they  are  called  unlike  parallel 
forces.  A  pair  of  like  parallel  forces  may  be  illustrated 
by  two  men  supporting  a  heavy  bar,  one  man  at  each  end. 
The  vertically  upward  forces  applied  by  the  men  balance 
the  weight  of  the  bar.  A  pair  of  unlike  parallel  forces  is 
illustrated  in  breaking  a  nut  by  means  of  a  pair  of  nut- 
crackers, the  pressure  of  the  nut  being  opposite  to  that  of 
the  hand  on  either  arm  of  the  crackers.  Unlike  parallel 
forces  are  conveniently  distinguished  by  the  signs  -f-  and  -. 

155.  To  determine  the  magnitude,  direction,  and  line 
of  action  of  the  resultant  of  two  like  parallel  forces. 

Let  P  and  Q  denote  the  forces,  and  let  A  and  B  be 
their  points  of  application.  Since  P  and  Q  have  the  same 
direction,  the  direction  of  the  resultant  acceleration  will 
be  the  same  as  that  of  the  forces,  and  the  magnitude  equal 
to  the  sum  of  the  accelerations  produced  by  each  force 
separately.  Hence  the  resultant  force  R  equals  P+Q, 
and  is  parallel  to  P  and  Q.  This  may  also  be  deduced 
from  art.  143,  cor.  3  by,  making  i=0. 

To  determine  the  line  of  action  of  R,  we  assume  the 
following  axiom:     The   line  of  action   of  the  resultant  of 


149 

any  two  concurrent  forces  passes  through  their  point  of 
intersection.  If  now  a  force  Si  act  at  A  along  AB,  and  an 
equal  force  S2  &t  B  along  BA,  R  will  evidently  be  the  re- 
sultant of  the  four  forces  P,  Q,  Si,  S2.  Let  X  denote  the 
resultant  of  P  and  Si,  and  Y  that  of  Q  and  S2,  and  let  the 
lines  of  action  of  X  and  Y  intersect  in  D,  then  D  must  be 
a  point  in  the  line  of  action  of  R.  If  G  be  the  point  in 
which  R  cuts  AB,  CD  is  the  line  of  action  of  R  and  is 
parallel  to  P  and  Q.  To  determine  C,  v  P:  8  =  CD:  AC, 
and  S:  Q=BC:  CD  (art.  144),  .-.  P:  Q=BC:AC 

156.  It  is  evident  that  the  position  of  D  depends  upon 
the  magnitude  of  S  and  the  direction  of  P  and  Q,  whilst 
that  of  C  is  independent  of  both.  The  position  of  C  de- 
pends only  upon  the  magnitudes  of  P  and  Q,  and  the  posi- 
tions of  their  points  of  application,  and  is  hence  called  the 
centre  of  the  two  parallel  forces. 

157.  To  find  the  magnitude,  direction,  and  line  of  action 
of  the  resultant  of  two  unlike  parallel  forces. 

We  can  deduce  this  directly  as  in  art.  155,  or  thus: 
Let  P  and  Q  denote  the  forces,  Q  being  the  greater, 
and  A  and  B  their  points  of  application.  Join  ^4P»  and 
produce  it  to  C,  so  that  AB: BC—Q - P:  P.  If  now  a 
force  Q-P  parallel  and  like  to  P  act  at  C,  the  three 
forces  P,  Q,  and  Q  —  P  are  in  equilibrium  (art.  155),  and 
therefore  the  resultant  of  P  and  Q  must  be  a  force  Q-P 
parallel  and  like  to  Q,  and  having  C  for  centre. 

158.  From  arts.  155  and  157  it  follows  that  if  (P,  Q)  or 
(P,  —  Q)  be  a  pair  of  parallel  forces  acting  at  A  and  B  re- 
spectively, and  C  be  their  centre,  and  if  AB  be  denoted 
by  -\-l  in  magnitude  and  direction,  then  AC  is  denoted  in 
magnitude  and  direction  by  Ql/(P+Q)  or  -Ql/(P-Q), 
and  CB  by  Pl/{P+Q)  or  Pl/{P-Q). 

159.  By  repeating  the  above  processes  it  is  evident  that 
we  can  determine  the  magnitude  and  line  of  action  of  the 
resultant  of   any    number  of   parallel   forces   whatsoever. 


150 

The  magnitude  is  simply  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  com- 
ponents. The  sign  of  this  resultant  indicates  the  direction: 
if  it  is  +  ,  the  direction  is  the  same  as  the  +  components  ; 
if  — ,  the  same  as  the  -  components.  The  resultant  may 
be  supposed  to  act  at  the  centre  of  the  system. 

Def.  The  centre  of  a  system  of  parallel  forces  is  a 
point,  fixed  relatively  to  the  points  of  application  of  the 
component  forces,  and  through  which  the  resultant  of  the 
system  must  pass,  whatever  be  the  direction  of  the  com- 
ponent forces,  provided  their  directions  relatively  to  one 
another  remain  unchanged. 

By  repeated  applications  of  arts.  155  to  157  the  centre 
of  any  system  can  easily  be  found  geometrically.  In  the 
following  articles  it  is  determined  algebraically. 

160.  Given  the  distances  of  the  points  of  application  of 
two  like  parallel  forces  from  any  plane,  to  determine  the 
distance  of  their  centre  from  the  plane. 

Let  two  like  parallel  forces  P  and  Q  act  at  A  and  B, 
and  let  the  distances  AD  and  BE  from  a  plane  be  denoted 
by  p  and  q.  Let  C  be  the  centre  of  P  and  Q,  and  B  the  re- 
sultant. Join  AB,  draw  CF  perpendicular  to  the  plane, 
and  through  C  draw  a  line  parallel  to  DE  to  meet  AD 
in  G  and  BE  in  H.     Denoting  CF  by>,  we  get 

P:  Q  =  BC:AC  (art.   lbb),  =  BH  :  AG,  =  q-r:  r-p, 
•••  r={Pp+Qq)/(P  +  Q),  or  Rr=Pp  +  Qq. 

161.  Given  the  distances  of  the  points  of  application  of 
two  unlike  parallel  forces  from  any  plane,  to  determine 
the  distance  of  their  centre  from  the  plane. 

Let  two  unlike  parallel  forces  P,  and  -  Q  act  at  dis- 
tances p,  and-  q  (A  and  B  being  on  opposite  sides  of  the 
plane  in  this  case)  from  the  plane.  Suppose  £>P.  Con- 
struct a  figure  as  in  last  article.     Then 

P:Q  =  BC:  AC  (art.  157),  =  BH  :  AG,  =  r  -q  :  p  +  r, 
.:  -7-=  (Pp  +  Qq)/(P-Q),  or  R{-r)  =  Pp  +  Qq 
the  distance  of  C  from  the  plane  in  this  case  being  -r. 


151 

Hence  we  get  the  following  rule  for  determining  the 
distance  of  the  centre  of  any  two  parallel  forces  from  a 
plane: 

Multiply  each  force  by  the  distance  of  its  point  of  ap- 
plication from  the  plane,  take  the  algebraical  sum  of  the 
products,  and  divide  by  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  forces. 

162.  Given  the  distances  of  the  points  of  application 
of  force,  in  any  system  of  parallel  forces,  from  any  plane, 
to  determine  the  distance  of  the  centre  from  the  plane. 

Let  the  forces  be  denoted  by  P,  -  Q,-  R,  S,  T, . . . . 
and  the  distances  of  their  points  of  application  from  the 
plane  by  p,  q,-r,-s,  t, 

By  the  previous  articles  the  forces  P,  and  -  Q,  are  equal 
to  a  single  force  P-Q  acting  at  a  distance  (Pp-Qq) 
-^(P-Q)  from  the  plane;  compound  this  with  the  parallel 
force  -  R,  and  we  get  a  resultant  P-  Q  -  R  acting  at  a 
distance  (Pp  -  Qq  +  Rr)/(P  -Q-R)  from  the  plane;  com- 
pound this  with  the  parallel  force  S,  and  we  get  a"  resultant 
P-Q-R  +  S  acting  at  a  distance  (Pp-Qq  +  Rr-Ss) 
+-{P-Q-  R  +  S)  from  the  plane.  Thus  we  see  that  exactly 
the  same  rule  to  determine  the  centre  of  two  parallel 
forces  (art.  161)  applies  to  any  number  of  parallel  forces. 
It  may  be  concisely  expressed  thus:  d2\P)  =  2\Pp), 
where  P  denotes  any  force  of  a  system  of  parallel  forces, 
p  the  distance  of  its  point  of  application  from  a  plane,  and 
d  the  distance  of  the  centre  of  the  system  from  the  plane. 


Examination  XVIII. 

1.  Define  unlike  parallel  forces;  find  directly  the  re- 
sultant of  a  pair  of  unlike  parallel  forces,  and  thence  de- 
duce the  resultant  of  a  pair  of  like  parallel  forces. 

2.  Shew  how  to  find  the  centre  of  a  pair  of  parallel 
forces  1)  geometrically,  2)  algebraically. 

3.  Define  the  centre  of  any  system  of  parallel  forces, 
and  deduce  the  rule  for  finding  its  distance  from  any  plane. 


152 

Exercise  XVIII. 

/l./K  two  bodies  balance  each  other  on  a  straight  lever 
in  any  one  position  inclined  to  the  vertical,  they  will  bal- 
ance each  other  in  any  other  position  of  the  lever. 

2.  A  shopkeeper  uses  a  balance  having  arms  10  and 
11  inches  in  length,  and  sells  from  the  longer  arm;  what 
percentage  of  money  drawn  does  he  gain  dishonestly? 

3.  Find  the  true  mass  of  a  body  which  balances  a  grams 
when  placed  in  one  scale  of  a  false  balance,  and  b  grams 
when  placed  in  the  other;  find  also  the  ratio  of  the  lengths 
of  the  arms,  and  how  much  the  fulcrum  should  be  shifted, 
21  being  the  length  of  the  beam. 

4.  A  shopkeeper  possessing  a  balance,  whose  arms  are 
a  foot  and  12^  inches  long  respectively,  sells  from  each 
arm  alternately;  will  he  gain  or  lose  in  the  long  run?  by 
how  much  p.c.  of  the  money  drawn? 

5.  If  the  arm  of  a  cork-squeezer  be  30  cm.,  and  a  cork 
be  placed  5  cm.  from  the  fulcrum,  find  the  pressure  on  the 
cork,  when  50  lbs.-wt.  is  applied  by  the  hand. 

6.  Explain  the  boast  of  Archimedes,  "  Give  me  a  lever 
and  whereon  to  rest  it  and  I  shall  move  the  world."  What 
much  easier  way  is  there  of  moving  the  world? 

7.  A  rod,  whose  weight  may  be  neglected,  rests  between 
two  pegs  which  are  1  ft.  apart  and  in  a  horizontal  line;  a 
body  of  10  lbs.  is  hung  from  one  end  of  the  rod,  1^  ft.  from 
the  nearer  peg;  find  the  pressures  on  the  pegs. 

8.  A  man  carries  a  bundle  at  the  end  of  a  stick  over 
his  shoulder;  if  the  piece  of  stick  between  his  hand  and 
shoulder  be  shorteued,  is  the  pressure  on  the  shoulder  in- 
creased or  diminished?  Is  his  pressure  on  the  ground 
altered  thereby?     Explain  your  answers. 

9.  Two  bodies  of  P  and  Q  lbs.  balance  at  the  ends  of  a 
lever  whose  weight  is  insignificant;  if  the  bodies  be  inter- 
changed, so  that  the  greater  P  now  hangs   where  Q  was, 


153 

and  Q  where  P  was,  find  what  additional  weight  must  be 
added  to  Q  to  maintain  equilibrium. 

10.  0  is  any  point  within  a  triangle  ABC;  like  parallel 
forces  act  at  A,  B,  and  C,  proportional  to  the  areas  BOC, 
CO  A,  and  A  OB  respectively;  prove  that  O  is  the  centre. 

11.  If  O  be  outside  of  the  triangle,  and  the  forces  in 
the  same  proportion  as  in  ex.  10,  under  what  condition 
may  O  be  still  the  centre  of  the  parallel  forces? 

12.  Find  a  single  body  whose  weight  will  produce  the 
same  effect  as  the  weights  of  bodies  of  1,  2.  3,  4.  and  5  kil- 
ograms hanging  on  a  rod  at  distances  of  1,  2,  3,  4,  and  5 
decimetres  from  one  end  of  the  rod. 

13.  A  square  board  (side  3  decim.)  is  kept  horizontal 
by  an  attached  string,  when  bodies  of  1.  2,  3,  and  4  lbs. 
respectively  hang  at  the  corners.  Find  the  point  where 
the  string  is  fastened  to  the  board. 

14.  Parallel  forces  K,  L,  M ,  ^V  act  at  E,  F,  G,  H,  and 
K:  L:  M:  iV=area  FGH :  area  GHE  :  area  HEF :  area 
EFG,  shew  that  the  centre  is  at  the  intersection  of  EG 
and  FH. 

15.  Like  parallel  forces  of  3,  5,  7,  5  lbs.-Wt.  act  at  the 
angular  points  A,  B,  C,  D  respectively  of  a  quadilateral, 
taken  in  order;  shew  that  parallel  forces  of  F,  10  -  F, 
4  +  F,  6-  i*1  lbs.-wt.,  where  F  may  have  any  value,  acting 
at  the  middle  points  of  AB,  BC,  CD,  DA  respectively, 
have  the  same  centre  and  resultant. 


Answers. 
2.     9TV       3.      ^(ab);   \/a:  \/b;  7(  |  « -  ^b)j{  v/«+  xb). 
4.     Lose,  TV.         5.    300  lbs.-wt.         7.    25  and  15  lbs.-wt. 
8.     Increased;  no.         9.    (P2  -Q*)IQ.         11.    The  force 

at  the  vertex  of  the  double  angle,  within   which  O 

lies,  must  be  unlike  to  the  other  two. 

12.  15  kilogrs.  at  3|  decim.  from  the  same  end  of  the  rod. 

13.  21  cm.  from  12,  and  15  cm.  from  23. 


Chapter  XIX. 
Couples.         Moments. 

163.  There  is  one  case  of  a  pair  of  parallel  forces  for 
which  the  foregoing  articles  fail  to  give  a  single  resultant, 
viz.,  the  case  of  a  pair  of  equal  unlike  parallel  forces. 
According  to  art.  157  the  resultant  would  be  a  force  of  in- 
definitely small  magnitude,  having  a  line  of  action  at  an 
indefinitely  great  distance;  the  effect  of  which  it  would  be 
impossible  to  foresee.  We  must,  therefore,  as  in  all  cases 
in  which  reasoning  from  established  principles  fail  us, 
appeal  to  experiment  to  ascertain  what  is  the  dynamical 
effect  of  such  a  pair  of  forces.  The  answer  is:  the  pro- 
duction, not  of  translation,  but  of  rotation  of  the  affected 
body  about  an  axis  normal  to  the  plane  of  the  couple. 

A  pair  of  equal  unlike  parallel  forces  is  called  a  couple. 
The  distance  between  the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces  is 
called  the  arm,  of  the  couple.  The  moment  of  a  couple  is 
measured  by  the  product  of  the  numbers  which  measure 
the  magnitude  of  either  force  and  the  length  of  the  arm, 
and  is  +  or  -  according  as  the  couple  tends  to  produce  -f 
rotation  {i.e.  opposite  to  the  apparent  rotation  of  the  sphere 
of  the  heavens,  when  looking  southwards),  or  -  rotation. 

It  can  easily  be  proved  that  two  unlike  couples  of 
equal  moments,  in  the  same  or  parallel  planes,  balance  one 
another.  Hence,  as  is  also  proved  by  experience,  the 
dynamical  action  of  a  couple  is  measured  by  its  moment. 

164.  If  three  forces  can  be  represented  in  magnitude 
and  line  of  action  by  the  sides  of  a  triangle  taken  in  order, 
they  are  equivalent  to  a  couple,  whose  moment  is  measured 
by  twice  the  area  of  the  triangle.  {The  complete  Triangle 
of  Forces). 

Let  8,  T,  R  denote  the  forces  acting  along  the  sides 
BC,  CA,  AB  of  the  triangle  ABC.     By  the  triangle  of 


155 

forces  (art.  144)  the  resultant  of  S  and  T  is  a  force  R, 
whose  line  of  action  passes  through  C,  and  is  parallel  to 
BA,  and  therefore  the  system  of  forces  is  equal  to  a  couple 
RR  whose  arm  is  the  distance  of  0  from  AB,  and  whose 
moment  is  therefore  measured  by  twice  the  triangle  ABC, 
since  R  is  represented  by  AB. 

165.  The  moment  of  a  force  about  a  point  is  measured 
by  the  product  of  the  numbers  which  represent  the  mag- 
nitude of  the  force  and  the  perpendicular  on  its  line  of 
action  from  the  point,  and  is  4-  or  -  according  as  the  force 
tends  to  produce  +  or  -  rotation  about  the  point. 

The  moment  of  a  force  about  any  point  measures  the 
effect  of  the  force  in  producing  rotation  about  the  point. 

This  may  be  taken  as  an  experimental  fact  illustrated 
in  the  use  of  a  lever,  or  it  is  easily  seen  that  the  force  is 
equivalent  to  a  couple,  whose  moment  is  the  same  as  that 
of  the  force  about  the  point,  and  an  equal  parallel  force 
through  the  point,  which  evidently  cannot  produce  rota- 
tion about  the  point. 

Cor.  Just  as  a  force  can  be  resolved  into  a  couple  and 
an  equal  and  parallel  force  in  the  plane  of  the  couple,  so  a 
force  and  couple  in  the  same  plane  can  be  compounded 
into  a  single  force  equal  and  parallel  to  the  original  force. 

166.  The  moment  of  a  force  about  any  point  will  evi- 
dently be  measured  by  twice  the  area  of  the  triangle 
formed  by  drawing  lines  from  the  point  to  the  extremities 
of  the  line  representing  the  force.  The  distance  of  the 
point  from  the  line  of  action  of  the  force  is  called  the  arm 
of  the  force  about  the  point. 

When  will  the  moment  of  a  force  about  a  point  vanish? 
Either  1)  when  the  force  itself  vanishes,  or  2)  when  the 
arm  vanishes,  i.e.  when  the  point  lies  in  the  line  of  action 
of  the  force.  In  either  case  there  can  evidently  be  no 
tendency  to  rotation  about  an  axis  through  the  point. 


156 

The  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  the  forces  form- 
ing a  couple,  about  any  point  in  the  plane  of  the  couple, 
is  evidently  equal  to  the  moment  of  the  couple. 

167.  The  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  two 
coplanar  forces  about  any  point  in  their  plane  is  equal  to 
the  moment  of  their  resultant  about  the  point. 

1)  When  the  forces  are  not  parallel.  Let  S  and  T  de- 
note the  forces,  R  the  resultant.  Let  AB,  AC,  AD  repre- 
sent these  forces.  If  0  be  the  point  about  which  moments 
are  taken,  join  OA,  OB,  OC,  OD.  Suppose  O  lies  between 
AD  produced  and  CD  produced,  then 

moment  of  S :  moment  of  R—  /\  OAB  :  -  £\  OAD 
moment  of  T  :  moment  of  R=  -  /\  OAC  :  -  /\  OAD 
.-.  mo.  of  S+mo.  of  T:  mo.  of  R=  OAB -OAC:  -OAD 
now  OAB  =  OCD  +  DAB  =  OCD+ACD  =  OAC -OAD 
:.  moment  of  S~\-  moment  of  T=  moment  of  R. 

2)  When  the  forces  are  parallel.  Take  S  and  T  unlike 
forces,  S  the  greater,  and  let  R  denote  their  resultant. 
Draw  through  0  a  line  cutting  the  lines  of  actiou  of  the 
forces  in  A,  B,  and  C.     Suppose  O  lies  between  S  and  R, 

moment  of  S  :  moment  of  R—  -  S.OA  :  +  R.OC 
moment  of  T:  moment  of  R=  +  T.OB :  -\-R.OC 
.'.  mo.  of  S+mo.  of  T :  mo.  of  R=T.OB  -  S.OA  :  R.OC 
now  T.OB-  S.OA  =  T.CB  -  T.OC- S.CA  +  S.OC 

=  (S-T)  OC=R.OC 
.'.  moment  of  >S'+ moment  of  T=  moment  of  R. 

The  student  will  find  it  very  instructive  to  verify  the 
proposition  for  all  possible  positions  of  the  point  O. 

Cor.  1.  When  any  number  of  forces  act  upon  a  body  in 
one  plane,  the  moment  of  the  resultant  force  (or  couple), 
about  any  point  in  the  plane,  is  the  algebraical  sum  of  the 
moments  of  the  component  forces  about  the  same  point. 

Cor.  2.  If,  therefore,  the  forces  be  in  equilibrium,  the 
algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  is  zero;  if  the  system  be 


157 

equal  to  a  single  resultant,  the  sum  depends  upon  the 
position  of  the  point,  and  vanishes  only  when  the  point 
lies  on  the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant:  if  the  system 
reduces  to  a  couple,  the  sum  is  a  constant  quantity,  but 
not  zero,  whatever  be  the  position  of  the  point. 

Cor.  3.  Conversely,  if  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  mo- 
ments of  any  number  of  forces  acting  in  one  plane,  about 
three  points  not  in  a  straight  line,  be  zero  for  all  three 
points,  the  forces  are  in  equilibrium ;  if  the  sum  be  not  of 
the  same  value  for  all  three  points,  the  forces  have  a  single 
resultant;  if  the  sum  be  of  the  same  value  but  not  zero  for 
all  three  points,  the  forces  are  equivalent  to  a  couple. 

168.  When  a  body  can  move  in  any  manner  whatever, 
it  is  said  to  be  free;  if  its  motion  be  restricted  in  any  man- 
ner or  by  any  condition,  it  is  said  to  be  constrained.  We 
have  already  considered  a  case  of  motion  of  a  constrained 
body  in  Chap.  XVII.  A  oscillating  pendulum,  a  sliding 
window,  a  swinging  door,  a  ring  moving  on  a  retort  stand 
will  serve  as  other  illustrations  of  constrained  bodies. 

If  a  body  can  only  rotate  about  a  fixed  axis,  and  is 
acted  upon  by  a  system  of  forces  whose  lines  of  action  are 
all  at  rigid  angles  to  the  axis,  it  is  required  to  find  the 
necessary  and  sufficient  condition  of  equilibrium. 

The  body  will  be  in  equilibrium  if  the  forces  do  not 
produce  rotation  about  the  axis.  The  effect  of  any  one 
force  to  produce  rotation  being  measured  by  the  product 
of  the  force  into  the  distance  of  its  line  of  action  from  the 
axis,  i.e.  by  the  moment  of  the  force  about  the  axis,  the 
necessary  and  sufficient  condition  of  equilibrium  is,  that 
the  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  the  forces  about 
the  axis  vanish. 

In  the  wheel  and  axle,  toothed  wheels,  and  other  forms 
of  the  lever  we  have  practical  examples  of  bodies  con- 
strained in  the  manner  just  considered. 


158 

169.  If  the  line  of  action  of  any  force  Ph  not  at  right 
angles  to  the  axis,  resolve  i°into  two  components,  one  par- 
allel to  the  axis,  and  the  other  at  right  angles  to  the  axis. 
The  moment  of  the  latter  about  the  axis,  will  evidently 
measure  the  effect  of  P  in  producing  rotation  about  the 
fixed  axis.  This  effect  will  vanish,  (1)  when  /'vanishes, 
(2)  when  the  line  of  action  P  is  parallel  to  the  axis,  (3) 
when  the  line  of  action  of  P  meets  the  axis. 

The  other  component  will  produce  motion  parallel  to 
the  axis,  and  may  be  neglected  if  the  body  can  only  rotate; 
if,  however,  the  body  can  also  slide  parallel  to  the  axis,  as 
a  ring  on  a  retort-stand  or  a  screw  in  its  nut,  there  cannot 
be  equilibrium,  unless  1)  the  sum  of  the  moments  about 
the  axis,  of  the  components  at  right  angles  to  the  axis, 
vanish,  and  2)  the  sum  of  the  components  parallel  to  the 
axis  vanish.  If,  as  in  a  sliding  window,  rotation  is  impos- 
sible, equilibrium  is  established,  if  2)  alone  is  satisfied. 

170.  When  three  forces  keep  a  body  in  equilibrium, 
their  lines  of  action,  must  all  lie  in  one  plane,  and  must  be 
all  concurrent  or  all  parallel. 

Let  R,  S,  T  denote  the  forces.  Take  A,  B,  and  C points 
in  the  lines  of  action  of  R,  S,  and  T,  such  that  BC,  CA, 
and  AB  are  not  parallel  to  the  lines  of  action  of  R,  S, 
and  T  respectively.  Since  the  body  is  in  equilibrium,  we 
may  suppose  BC  s.  fixed  axis.  The  forces  S  and  T  whose 
lines  of  action  meet  this  axis,  can  have  no  effect  in  pro- 
ducing rotation  about  it,  nor  therefore,  since  the  body  is 
in  equilibrium,  can  R  produce  rotation  about  it.  The  line 
of  action  of  R  must  therefore  cut  BC  (art.  169),  and  must 
therefore  lie  in  the  plane  ABC  Similarly  it  may  be  shewn 
that  the  lines  of  action  of  S  and  T  lie  in  the  plane  ABC. 

If  the  lines  of  action  be  not  all  parallel,  let  two  of  them 
K  and  S  meet  in  O,  then  the  resultant  of  R  and  S  passes 
through  (),  and,  since  this  resultant  is  balanced  by  T,  the 
line  of  action  of  T  must  also  pass  through  O. 


159 

Examination  XIX. 

1.  Define  a  couple,  the  arm  and  moment  of  a  couple, 
and  write  down  the  dynamical  dimensions  of  the  moment 
of  a  couple  or  force. 

2.  Prove  that  two  unlike  couples  of  equal  moments  in 
the  same  plane  balance  one  another,  and  shew  that  when 
three  parallel  forces  are  in  equilibrium  they  are  really  a 
pair  of  such  balancing  couples. 

3.  Enunciate  and  prove  the  complete  triangle  of  forces. 
Hence  prove  the  complete  polygon  of  forces:  If  a  system 
of  forces  can  be  represented  in  magnitude  and  line  of 
action  by  the  sides  of  a  plane  polygon  taken  in  order,  it  is 
equivalent  to  a  couple  whose  moment  is  measured  by  twice 
the  area  of  the  polygon. 

4.  Define  the  moment  of  a  force  about  a  point,  and 
prove  from  theory  what  it  measures. 

5.  Find  the  magnitude  and  line  of  action  of  the  result- 
ant of  a  force  I'  and  a  couple  Qq  in  the  same  plane. 

6.  Prove  that  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of 
two  coplanar  forces  about  any  point  in  their  plane  is  equal 
to  the  moment  of  their  resultant,  and  extend  the  proposi- 
tion to  any  number  of  forces  in  one  plane. 

7.  Any  number  of  forces  act  upon  a  body  in  one  plane; 
find  the  conditions  that  the  forces  can  be  reduced  to  1)  a 
single  resultant,  2)  a  couple,  3)  equilibrium. 

8.  Define  the  moment  of  a  force  about  an  axis;  find  the 
condition  of  equilibrium  of  a  body  which  can  only  rotate 
about  a  fixed  axis;  and  give  examples  of  such  bodies. 

9.  Prove  that  when  three  forces  keep  a  body  in  equili- 
brium, their  lines  of  action  must  all  lie  in  one  plane. 


Exercise   XIX. 
1.  If  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  forces  in  one  plane  be 
of  the  same  value,  but  not  zero,  for  two  points  in  the  plane, 


160 

the  straight  line  which  join  these  two  points  is  parallel  to 
the  resultant  force,  or  the  forces  reduce  to  a  couple. 

2.  In  a  wheel  and  axle  the  radii  are  as  8  to  3;  two 
bodies  of  6  and  15  lbs.  are  suspended  from  ropes  wound 
round  the  wheel  and  the  axle  respectively;  one  is  sup- 
ported by  a  prop;  find  the  pressures  on  the  prop,  and  on 
the  fixed  supports  of  the  wheel  and  axle. 

3.  Bodies  of  1  and  4  lbs.  are  suspended  from  the  ends 
of  a  straight  lever  of  insignificant  weight;  the  fulcrum  and 
a  point  at  which  another  body  is  suspended  divide  the 
lever  into  three  equal  parts;  find  the  mass  of  the  third 
body  in  order  that  the  lever  may  be  in  equilibrium. 

4.  A  lever  of  insignificant  weight  is  5  ft.  long;  two 
strings,  3  and  4  ft.  long,  attached  to  the  extremities  of  the 
lever,  support  a  body  of  10  kilograms;  if  the  lever  be  kept 
in  equilibrium  in  a  horizontal  position,  find  the  tensions 
of  the  strings  and  the  position  of  the  fulcrum. 

5.  Two  coplanar  forces  S  and  T  act  at  the  ends  of  a 
straight  lever  AB,  whose  weight  may  be  neglected;  find 
the  position  of  the  fulcrum  in  order  that  there  may  be 
equilibrium,  the  inclinations  of  S  and  T  to  AB  being  a 
and  b  respectively;  find  also  the  pressure  on  the  fulcrum. 

6.  Forces  are  represented  by  the  perpendiculars  drawn 
from  the  angular  points  of  a  triangle  on  to  the  opposite 
sides;  find  under  what  condition  they  are  in  equilibrium. 

7.  0  is  any  point  within  a  triangle  ABC;  AO,  BO, 
CO  cut  the  sides  in  D,  E,  F;  find  under  what  conditions 
forces  represented  by  AD,  BE,  and  CF are  in  equilibrium. 


Answers. 
2.     |  and  20g  lbs.-wt,         3.     2  lbs. 

4.  8  and  6  kilogrs.-wt. ;  AC  :  CB=9  :  16. 

5.  AC:  CB  =  T  sin.  h  :  S  sin.  a; 

tflSt+T2 -2  ST  cos  (a  +  b)\. 

6.  That  the  triangle  be  equilateral.  7.     D,  E,  F  must 

be  the  middle  points  of  the  sides. 


Chapter  XX. 
Centres  of  Weight  and  Mass. 

171.  We  may  consider  any  body  or  system  of  bodies  to 
be  made  up  of  small  particles,  whose  positions  can  be  de- 
fined by  geometrical  points,  and  the  weights  of  the  par- 
ticles may  be  supposed  to  act  at  these  points,  and  to  be 
parallel  (art.  62).  The  centre  of  such  a  system  of  parallel 
weights  is  called  the  centre  of  weight  or  centre  of  gravity 
of  the  body  or  system  of  bodies.  To  save  circumlocution 
in  what  follows,  we  shall  use  the  term  body  either  for  a 
single  body,  or  for  a  system  of  bodies  whose  configuration 
does  not  change. 

It  follows  from  art.  159  that  the  position  of  the  centre 
of  weight,  relatively  to  the  particles  which  compose  the 
body,  is  constant,  whatever  be  the  position  of  the  body 
relatively  to  the  earth.  Hence,  if  the  different  parts  of  a 
body,  acted  on  only  by  weight,  be  rigidly  connected  ivith 
the  centre  of  weight,  and  if  this  point  be  supported,  the 
body  will  balance  in  all  positions.  This  important  pro- 
perty is  sometimes  used  as  a  definition  of  the  centre  of 
weight.     The  following  facts  follow  immediately  from  it: 

1.  If  a  body  balances  on  a  straight  line  (or  axis)  in  all 
positions,  the  centre  of  weight  must  lie  in  that  line. 

2.  If  a  body  can  turn  freely  round  an  axis  which  is 
not  vertical,  it  cannot  be  at  rest  unless  the  centre  of  weight 
lies  in  the  vertical  plane  through  the  axis. 

3.  If  a  body  hang  from  a  point  round  which  it  can 
turn  freely,  it  cannot  be  at  rest  unless  the  centre  of  weight 
is  in  the  vertical  line  through  the  point  of  suspension. 

Hence  when  a  body  is  suspended  by  strings  at- 
tached to  different  points  of  the  body,  the  lines  of  the 
strings,  when   the   body  is  at  rest,  all  pass  through  the 


162 

centre  of  weight.  This  gives  a  practical  method  of  finding 
the  centre  of  weight  of  any  body,  however  irregular  its 
configuration  may  be. 

172.  When  a  body  is  suspended  by  a  string,  the  centre  of 
weight  will  necessarily  be  below  the  point  of  suspension 
on  account  of  the  non-rigidity  of  the  string.  When  it  is 
rigidly  connected  with  a  point,  the  body  can  be  supported 
at  this  point,  provided  the  centre  of  weight  and  point  of 
support  be  in  the  same  vertical  line.  Should,  however, 
the  centre  of  weight  be  above  the  point  of  support, 
and  any  slight  displacement  take  place,  the  weight  of  the 
body  will  cause  it  to  rotate  about  the  point,  until  the  cen- 
tre is  below  the  point  of  support.  If  the  centre  of  weight 
be  below  the  point  of  support,  and  any  slight  displacement 
take  place,  the  weight  will  bring  the  body  back  again  to 
to  its  old  position.  If  the  centre  of  weight  coincide  with 
the  point  of  support,  and  any  slight  displacement  take 
place  the  body  will  remain  displaced  without  any  tendency 
either  to  recede  further  from,  or  to  return  to  its  former 
position.  In  these  respective  relative  positions  of  the 
point  of  support  and  centre  of  weight,  the  body  is  said  to 
be  in  unstable,  stable,  or  neutral  equilibrium. 

173.  A  body  placed  on  a  plane  will  stand  or  fall,  ac- 
cording as  the  vertical  line  through  its  centre  of  weight 
passes  within  or  without  the  base  of  support. 

By  base  in  this  statement  is  meant  the  polygon  of 
greatest  area  which  can  be  formed  by  joining  points  of 
contact  of  the  body  and  plane. 

174.  Since  weight  is  a  vertically  downward  force,  its 
effect  on  a  body  is  to  bring  down  the  centre  of  weight  as 
far  as  possible.  Hence  a  body  supported  in  any  way  from 
falling  will  be  in  stable  equilibrium,  for  a  displacement 
in  any  direction,  if  such  a  displacement  raises  the  centre 
of  weight  ;  in  unstable  equilibrium,  if  the  displacement 
lowers  the  centre  of  weight  ;  and  in  neutral  equilibrium, 


163 

if  the  displacement  does  not  alter  the  vertical  height  of 
the  centre  of  weight.  A  right  circular  cone  of  uniform 
density  resting  on  a  horizontal  plane  illustrates  the  three 
kinds  of  equilibrium  according  as  it  rests  on  its  base, 
apex,  or  curved  surface. 

A  body  is  practically  in  unstable  equilibrium  if  it  be 
in  unstable  equilibrium  for  a  displacement  in  any  direction 
whatsoever.  A  sphere  of  uniform  density,  resting  on  a 
saddle-back  surface,  presents  the  three  kinds  of  equilib- 
rium according  to  the  direction  of  displacement,  but  prac- 
tically it  is  in  unstable  equilibrium. 

175.  Given  the  weights  and  Cartesian  coordinates  of 
the  particles  which  composed  body,  to  determine  the  co- 
ordinates of  the  centre  of  weight. 

Take  three  axes  OX,  OY,  OZ  mutually  at  right  angles 
to  one  another,  and  let  x,  y,  z  denote  the  coordinates  of 
any  one  of  the  particles  of  the  body  having  weight  w,  and 
a,  b,  c  the  coordinates  of  the  c.  of  w.,  then  (art.  162) 
a—I{icx)^-I  {to),  b  =  I  (10  y)^-2  (w),  c—S{wz)^rI{w). 

Cor.  When  a  number  of  bodies  are  raised  through 
various  heights,  the  work  done  is  the  same  as  that  of  rais- 
ing a  body,  whose  weight  is  the  sum  of  the  weights  of  the 
bodies,  through  the  height  that  the  c.  of  w.  of  the  bodies 
is  raised. 

176.  If  in  the  above  we  write  mg  for  w  (art.  (YS)  we  get 
a— 2  (mx)-±-Z(m),b=2  (m  y)^-S(m),c  =  Z (mz)^-2  (m), 
the  coordinates  of  a  point,  which,  although  it  coincides 
with  the  c.  of  w.,  is  quite  independent  of  weight.  It  is 
called  the  centre  of  mass  or  centre  of  inertia  of  the  body. 
It  may  be  also  thus  defined: 

The  centre  of  mass  of  a  body  is  a  point,  which  coin- 
cides with  the  centre  of  a  system  of  parallel  forces,  acting 
at  the  particles  which  compose  the  body,  and  proportional 
to  the  masses  of  the  particles. 


164 

For  a  body  of  uniform  density  the  position  of  the  c.  of 
m.  depends  only  upon  its  configuration,  and  is  independent 
of  its  mass.  The  term  centroid  is  then  used  for  c.  of  m.; 
also  centre  of  length,  area,  or  volume  according  as  the 
body  is  practically  a  line,  surface,  or  solid. 

Let  it  be  observed  that  we  can  speak  of  the  centre  of 
mass  of  any  body  whatsoever,  whether  belonging  to  the 
earth  or  external  to  it,  whilst,  properly  speaking,  the  term 
centre  of  weight  is  applicable  only  to  bodies  near  the 
earth's  surface,  and  whose  dimensions  are  small. 

177.  The  centre  of  mass  of  a  very  thin  straight  rod  of 
uniform  density  and  section  is  its  middle  point. 

Cor.  If  the  rod  be  thick,  the  centre  of  mass  will  lie  in 
the  middle  section,  for  any  such  rod  may  be  supposed  to 
be  made  up  of  indefinitely  thin  rods. 

178.  To  find  the  centre  of  mass  of  a  thin  triangular 
plate  of  uniform  density  and  thickness. 

Such  a  plate  can  be  represented  by  a  plane  triangle 
ABC.  Let  D  and  E  be  the  middle  points  of  BC  and  CA. 
AD  is  the  locus  of  the  middle  points  of  all  lines  parallel 
to  BC.  Now  we  may  conceive  the  plate  to  be  made  up  of 
an  indefinitely  large  number  of  thin  rods  parallel  to  BC, 
and  the  centre  of  mass  of  each  of  these  rods  will  lie  in  AD, 
therefore  the  centre  of  mass  of  the  whole  plate  will  lie  in 
AD.  Similarly  it  may  be  shewn  that  it  will  lie  in  BE. 
Therefore  it  is  C  the  point  of  intersection  of  AD  and  BE. 
Since  D  and  E  are  the  middle  points  of  BC  and  CA,  DE 
is  parallel  to  AB  and  equal  to  one  half  of  AB;  and  the 
triangle  DGE  is  similar  to  the  triangle  AGB;  therefore 
DG  is  one-half  of  GA  or  one-third  of  DA. 

Cor.  1.  The  medians  of  a  triangle  meet  in  the  centroid 
of  the  triangle  and  trisect  one  another. 

Cor.  2.  The  centre  of  mass  of  a  thin  triangular  plate 
coincides    with    that   of    three  equally    massive  particles 


165 

situated  at  the  angular  points  of  the  triangle,  or  at  the 
middle  points  of  the  sides. 

Cor.  3.  The  centroid  of  a  plate  in  the  form  of  a  paral- 
lelogram is  the  intersection  of  the  diagonals. 

Cor.  4.  The  centroid  of  a  triangular  prism  is  the 
middle  point  of  the  line  joining  the  centroids  of  the  oppos- 
ite triangular  faces. 

Cor.  5.  The  centroid  of  a  plate  in  the  form  of  any 
plane  rectilineal  polygon  may  be  determined  by  dividing 
the  polygon  into  triangles  and  applying  art  155. 

179.  To  determine  the  centroid  of  a  thin  plate  in  the 
form  of  any  plane  rectilineal  quadrilateral. 

Let  ABCD  represent  the  plate.  Bisect  BD  in  E;  take 
EF  one-third  of  AE,  and  EH  one-third  of  CE;  join  FH, 
cutting  BD  in  K;  take  HG  equal  to  FK  (or  FO  equal  to 
HK);  G  is  the  centroid  required. 

180.  To  find  the  centroid  of  a  triangular  pyramid. 
Let  ABCD  represent  the  pyramid.     Bisect  CD  in  E; 

take  EF  one-third  of  BE,  and  EH  one-third  of  AE;  let 
AF  and  BH  intersect  in  G;  G  is  the  centroid  required. 
For  we  may  imagine  the  pyramid  to  be  made  up  of  in- 
definitely thin  triangular  plates,  all  parallel  to  BCD.  Let 
bed  represent  one  of  these  plates,  cutting  the  plane  ABFE 
in  bfe.  Since  dec  is  parallel  to  DEC,  de  :  DE,  =  Ae  :  AE, 
-  ec  :  EC;  therefore  de  —  ec.  Again,  because  bfe  is 
parallel  to  BFE,  ef  :  EF=Af  :  AF,  =  bf  :  BF;  therefore 
e/is  one-third  of  be,  and /is  the  centroid  of  the  plate  bed. 
Thus  AF  is  the  locus  of  the  centroids  of  all  the  plates 
parallel  to  BCD,  and  therefore  contains  the  centroid  of 
the  pyramid.  Similarly  it  may  be  shewn  that  BH  con- 
tains the  centroid,  and  therefore  G  is  the  centroid  required. 
Because  EF  is  one-third  of  EB,  and  EH  one-third  of 
EA,  FH  is  parallel  AB  and  is  one-third  of  AB;  and  the 
triangle  HFG  is  similar  to  the  triangle  ABG.  Therefore 
FG  is  one-third  of  GA,  or  one-fourth  of  FA. 


166 

Cor.  1.  The  lines  drawn  from  the  vertices  of  a  tetrahe- 
dron to  the  centroids  of  the  opposite  faces  meet  in  the 
centroid  of  the  tetrahedron,  and  quadrisect  one  another. 

Cor.  2.  The  centre  of  mass  of  a  triangular  pyramid  of 
uniform  density  coincides  with  that  of  four  equally  mas- 
sive particles  placed  at  the  vertices  of  the  pyramid. 

Cor.  3.  A  pyramid  whose  base  is  any  plane  rectilineal 
polygon  can  easily  be  divided  into  triangular  pyramids. 
The  centroid  of  the  pyramid  will  lie  in  the  line  joining 
the  vertex  with  the  centroid  of  the  base,  and  be  three- 
quarters  of  this  line  from  the  vertex. 

Cor.  4  A  cone  may  be  considered  to  be  a  pyramid 
having  a  base  with  an  indefinitely  large  number  of  sides, 
and  therefore  the  rule  for  finding  the  centroid  of  a  pyra- 
mid (Cor.  3)  applies  to  a  cone  having  any  plane  base. 

181.  A  body  is  symmetrical  with  respect  to  a  point, 
line,  or  plane,  when  the  body  may  be  conceived  to  be  made 
up  of  pairs  of  equally  massive  particles,  the  two  which 
form  a  pair  being  on  opposite  sides  of  the  point,  line,  or 
plane,  equidistant  from  it,  and  in  the  same  perpendicular 
to  it.  The  point,  line,  or  plane  will  contain  the  centre  of 
mass  of  every  pair  of  particles,  and  therefore  also  the 
centre  of  mass  of  the  whole  body.  From  this  principle 
of  symmetry  we  can  frequently  find  the  centre  of  mass 
with  great  facility.  Thus,  the  centroids  of  a  circular  or 
elliptic  ring,  of  a  circular  or  elliptic  plate,  of  a  sphere, 
spheroid,  or  cuboid  are  apparent. 

182.  Having  given  the  speeds  of  any  number  of  par- 
ticles in  any  direction,  to  determine  the  speed  of  their 
centre  of  mass  in  the  same  direction. 

Let  m  denote  the  mass  of  any  one  of  the  particles,  and 
d  its  distance  from  a  fixed  plane  at  right  angles  to  the 
direction  in  question,  at  any  instant;  then  the  distance  of 
the  centre  of  mass  from  the  plane  at  the  same  instant  will 
be  I(md)^-lXm).     Let  v  denote  the  speed  of  the  particle 


167 

m  in  the  direction  in  question,  then  at  the  end  of  time  t 
the  distance  of  m  from  the  plane  will  be  d-\-vt,  and  there- 
fore the  distance  of  the  centre  of  mass  from  the  plane,  at 
the  end  of  time  /,  will  be  2\m(d  +  vf)\-7-2(m),  that  is 
\l\md)^r-(m)\-\-\2\7nv)-h2(m)}t  which  shews  that  the 
speed  of  the  centre  of  mass  is  2(mv)  -±-2(m). 

If  the  speeds  of  the  particles  in  the  given  direction  be 
not  all  constant,  t  must  be  taken  indefinitely  small. 

183.  From  arts.  59  and  182  we  deduce  the  important 
fact,  that  the  velocity  of  the  centre  of  mass  of  any  system 
of  bodies  cannot  be  altered  by  the  mutual  actions  (e.g. 
direct  impact,  art.  125)  of  its  several  parts.  Hence  the 
centre  of  mass  of  the  universe,  or  of  any  body  not  acted  on 
by  external  force,  is  either  at  rest  or  in  uniform  motion. 

184.  Having  given  the  accelerations  of  any  number  of 
particles  in  any  direction,  to  determine  the  acceleration  of 
the  centre  of  mass  in  the  same  direction. 

Let  v  denote  the  speed,  in  the  given  direction,  of  any 
particle  having  mass  m,  at  any  instant,  then  -(mv)^--(m) 
is  the  speed  of  the  centre  of  mass  at  the  same  instant  (art. 
182).  If  «  denote  the  acceleration  of  m,  then  at  the  end 
of  time  /  the  speed  of  m  will  be  v  +  at,  and  therefore  the 
speed  of  the  centre  of  mass  will  be  I{m(v-\-at)\^2\m),  or 
{  I(mv) -4-  2\m) }  +  j  I(ma)  +  -(m)  \  t,  which  proves  that  the 
acceleration  of  the  centre  of  mass  is  2 (ma)  -*-  2'(ra) . 

If  the  accelerations  of  the  particles  in  the  given  direc- 
tion be  not  all  constant,  t  must  be  taken  indefinitely  small. 

185.  Articles  182  and  184  shew  us,  that  at  any  instant, 
the  total  momentum  and  acceleration  of  momentum  of  any 
system  of  particles,  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  total  mass  of 
the  system  concentrated  at  the  centre  of  mass.  Hence, 
when  any  forces  act  upon  a  system  of  bodies,  the  motion  of 
the  centre  of  mass  is  the  same  as  that  of  a  particle,  whose 
mass  is  the  total  mass  of  the  system,  and  which  is  acted 
upon  by  the  same  forces.     Hence,  so  far  as  translation  is 


168 

concerned,  the  motion  of  any  body  is  represented  by  the 
motion  of  its  centre  of  mass. 

186.  The  kinetic  energy  of  any  system  of  particles  is 
equal  to  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  ivhole  mass  of  the  system 
moving  with  the  speed  of  the  centre  of  mass,  together  with 
the  kinetic  energies  of  the  different  parts  of  the  system 
relatively  to  the  centre  of  mass. 

Let  O  J  represent  the  velocity  of  the  c.  of  m.  and  IP 
that  of  any  particle  (mass  m)  of  the  system  relatively  to  the 
c.  of  m.,  then  OP  represents  the  velocity  of  m.  Draw  PQ 
at  right  angles  to  01;  then  I(m.  IQ)  =0,  (art.  182).  Now 
OP2  =  OI2+IP2±2  01.  IQ  /.  I(^mOP2)=^(7n).  OF2 
-{-I  (\  m.  IP2),  which  proves  the  proposition. 

Ex.  A  body  of  mass  M  hanging  vertically,  draws  an- 
other body  of  mass  m  along  a  horizontal  plane,  by  means 
of  a  string  passing  over  a  smooth  pulley.  If  v  denote  the 
speed  at  any  given  instant,  and  k  the  coefficient  of  friction 
on  the  plane,  find  the  motion  of  the  centre  of  mass,  the 
masses  of  the  string  and  pulley  being  insignificant. 

At  the  given  instant  the  centre  of  mass  has  a  horizontal 
velocity  mv-^(M-\-m),  anda  vertical  velocity  Mv^-(MJr7n) 
downwards;  therefore  its  total  velocity  is  \/(M 2  +  ra2)v-H 
{M-\-m),  in  a  direction  which  makes  an  angle  with  the 
horizon,  whose  tangent  is  the  ratio  M/m. 

Let  T  denote  the  tension  of  the  string;  then  the  accel- 
eration of  m  is  ( T-  kmg)^m,  and  that  of  M  is  ( Mg  -  T) 
-i-M.  These  are  numerically  equal,  therefore  T  is  equal 
to  Mm(l+k)g-i-(M+m),  and  the  acceleration  of  either 
body  is  (M-km)g^-(M-\-m).  The  centre  of  mass  has 
therefore  a  horizontal  acceleration  m  (M -  km)g-t-(M+m)2, 
a  vertical  acceleration  M(M -km)g^-(M  +  m)2,  and  a 
total  acceleration^  (M-kni)  y  (M 2  +  m?)g-i-(M+m)2  in 
a  direction  which  makes  an  angle  —  tan_1(il//wi)  with  the 
horizon.      Hence  the    acceleration    is   constant,    and    its 


169 

direction  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  velocity  at  the  given 
instant,  and  therefore  the  centre  of  mass  moves  in  a 
straight  line  inclined  at  an  angle—  tan-1  (M/m)  to  the 
horizon  with  uniformly  accelerated  motion. 


Examination  XX. 

1.  Define  the  centre  of  weight,  and  prove  propositions 
1,  2,  3  of  art.  171. 

2.  How  may  the  c.  of  w.  of  any  irregularly  shaped  body 
be  experimentally  determined? 

3.  What  are  the  different  kinds  of  equilibrium?  Illus- 
trate these  by  bodies  supported  1)  at  a  point,  2)  on  a  plane, 
3)  on  a  surface  of  double  curvature. 

4.  When  a  body  is  placed  on  a  plane,  state  and  prove 
the  condition  of  equilibrium. 

5.  Define  the  centre  of  mass  of  a  body.  When  does  it 
coincide  with  the  centre  of  weight?  Define  centroid; 
what  other  names  may  be  used  for  this  term? 

6.  Find  the  controids  of  1)  a  triangular  plate,  2)  a 
quadrilateral  plate,  3)  a  cuboid,  4)  a  triangular  pyramid, 
5)  a  right  circular  cone,  6)  a  spheroid. 

7.  Determine  algebraical  expressions  for  the  position, 
velocity,  and  acceleration  of  the  c.  of  m.  of  any  material 
system. 

8.  Prove  the  corollary  to  art.  175. 

9.  What  is  meant  by  saying  that  the  motion  of  a  body 
is  represented  by  the  motion  of  its  c.  of  m.?  Enunciate 
and  prove  the  corresponding  proposition  for  the  kinetic 
energy  of  a  material  system. 

10.  What  do  we  know  about  the  c.  of  m.  of  the  solar 
system,  and  of  that  of  the  whole  universe? 


170 

Exercise  XX. 

1.  Three  men  support  a  heavy  triangular  board,  of  uni- 
form density  and  thickness,  at  its  corners;  shew  that  all 
three  exert  the  same  force.  Would  this  be  the  case  if  they 
supported  it  at  the  middle  points  of  the  sides? 

2.  Prove  that  a  rhomboidal  lamina  of  uniform  density, 
when  placed  on  a  horizontal  plane,  will  rest  in  equilibrium 
on  any  one  of  its  sides,  if  its  plane  be  vertical. 

3.  A  round  table  stands  on  three  legs  placed  on  the 
circumference  at  equal  distances;  shew  that  a  body,  whose 
weight  is  not  greater  than  that  of  the  table,  may  be  placed 
on  any  part  of  it  without  upsetting  it. 

4.  A  uniform  rod  1  metre  long,  and  500  grams  mass,  is 
supported  horizontally  by  means  of  a  ringer  below  the  rod, 
5  cm.  from  one  end,  and  the  thumb  at  the  end  over  the 
rod;  find  the  pressures  on  the  linger  and  thumb. 

5.  Two  strings  have  each  one  of  their  ends  fixed  to  a 
peg,  and  the  others  to  the  ends  of  a  uniform  rod;  when  the 
rod  is  hanging  in  equilibrium,  shew  that  the  tensions  of 
the  strings  are  proportional  to  their  lengths. 

6.  A  heavy  bar,  of  uniform  section  and  density,  3 
metres  long,  is  to  be  carried  by  two  men,  one  of  whom  is 
half  as  strong  again  as  the  other;  if  the  weaker  man  sup- 
ports the  bar  at  one  end,  where  should  the  stronger  man 
support  it? 

7.  The  base  of  a  solid  right  circular  cone  is  in  contact 
with  a  plane  which  can  be  gradually  inclined;  find  the 
ratio  of  the  altitude  of  the  cone  to  the  radius  of  the  base, 
in  order  that  the  cone  may  be  just  on  the  point  of  toppling 
over  as  it  begins  to  slide  down. 

8.  A  uniform  triangular  plate  is  suspended  from  a 
point  by  strings  attached  to  its  angular  points;  shew  that 
the  tensions  of  the  strings  are  proportional  to  their  lengths. 


171 

9.  The  lower  end  of  a  rigid  ladder  is  fixed,  whilst  the 
upper  rests  against  a  vertical  wall;  compare  the  heights  a 
man  and  boy  can  ascend  respectively,  so  that  the  pressure 
against  the  wall  may  be  the  same. 

10.  It  is  observed  that  a  rod  AB,  12  feet  long,  will 
balance  at  a  point  2  feet  from  the  end  A;  but  when  a  body 
of  100  lbs.  is  suspended  at  the  end  B,  the  rod  balances  at  a 
point  2  feet  from  that  end;  find  the  mass  of  the  rod. 

11.  In  Ex.  XIII,  6  and  10,  find  the  speeds  of  the 
centres  of  mass  after  impact  and  bursting  respectively. 

12.  Find  the  motions  of  the  centres  of  mass  in  the  sys- 
tems described  in  Ex.  VII,  5  and  15. 

13.  Three  particles  of  equal  mass  are  moving  along  the 
sides  of  a  triangle  taken  in  order,  with  speeds  propor- 
tional to  the  sides  along  which  they  move  respectively; 
find  the  velocity  of  their  centre  of  mass. 

14.  Find  the  amount  of  work  required  to  dig  a  cylin- 
drical well  to  a  depth  of  20  feet,  the  diameter  being  4  feet, 
and  the  density  of  the  material  raised  2*3. 

15.  A  shaft  100  feet  deep  is  full  of  water;  find  the 
depth  of  the  surface  of  the  water  when  j,  and  also  \  of  the 
work  required  to  empty  the  shaft  has  been  done. 

16.  Find  the  centroid  of  a  thin  shell  in  the  shape  of  a 
right  circular  cone. 

Answers. 

1.  Yes.  4,  5  and  4^  kilogrs.-wt.  6.  50  cm.  from 
the  other  end.  7.  4  :  k.  9.  Inversely  as  their 
weights.         10.     25  lbs.         11.     2250;  50.' 

12.  Uniform  vertical  ace.  of  ysQ;  uniform  ace.  of  13-9 
at  -  tan-1  f  to  the  horizon.         13.     0. 

14.  360,705  ft.-lbs.  15.  50,  705.  16.  On  the  axis, 
at  two-thirds  of  the  axis  from  the  vertex. 


Chapter   XXI. 
Simple  Machines. 

187.  This  chapter  might  be  called  an  introduction  to 
mechanics  (art.  61).  Machines  are  used  for  various  pur- 
poses: for  transmitting  force  or  motion,  as  in  many  uses 
of  flexible  cords  and  straps,  rigid  rods,  or  toothed  wheels; 
for  changing  the  direction  of  force  or  motion,  as  when  a 
stretched  rope  is  passed  around  a  pin  or  smooth  pulley,  or 
in  the  use  of  bevelled  toothed  wheels;  in  measuring  force, 
as  by  a  balance  or  dynamometer;  but  the  use  principally 
aimed  at,  in  the  larger  number  of  machines,  is  to  enable 
man  to  balance,  or  do  work  against  great  forces  by  the 
application  of  small  forces.  This  is  the  use,  for  example, 
of  a  crowbar  to  balance  the  weight  of  or  to  move  a  heavy 
beam,  or  of  a  screw  to  apply  great  pressure,  as  in  an  ordi- 
nary book-binder's  press.  This  may  be  called  appropriately 
the  dynamical  advantage,  of  the  machine. 

If  W  denotes  the  resistance  which  is  balanced  or 
worked  against  by  the  aid  of  the  machine,  and  P  the  force 
applied  to  balance  or  work  against  the  resistance,  the 
ratio  W/P  measures  the  dynamical  advantage. 

In  the  present  chapter  the  dynamical  advantages  of  a 
few  of  the  simplest  machines  will  be  calculated.  More 
complicated  machines  will  be  found  to  be  combinations  of 
such  simple  machines,  and  if  the  dynamical  advantages  of 
the  latter  are  known,  it  needs  but  simple  multiplication  to 
find  those  of  the  former. 

188.  When  there  is  no  appreciable  friction  called  into 
play  in  the  use  of  a  machine,  the  dynamical  advantage 
arises  entirely  from  the  combination  of  parts  or  the  me- 
chanism of  the  machine,  and  is  then  called  the  mechanical 
advantage  of  the  machine.     Thus  in  sliding  a  heavy  body 


173 

up  an  inclined  plane,  which  may  be  considered  a  simple 
machine,  the  mechanical  advantage  is  (cos  6)/(sin  a),  art. 
153  cor  1,  and  this  becomes  cosec  a,  when  Pacts  along  the 
plane,  and  cotan  a,  when  P  acts  horizontally. 

When  friction  is  called  into  play,  and  the  machine  is 
used  to  aid  in  merely  balancing  the  resistance  W,  then 
friction  can  always  be  taken  advantage  of  in  favour  of  the 
balancing  force  P.  When  friction  is  fully  taken  advan- 
tage of,  so  that  the  resistance  W  is  just  kept  in  check,  or 
motion  is  just  about  to  take  place  against  P,  the  dynami- 
cal advantage  may  then  be  called  the  static  advantage  of 
the  machine.  It  is  the  greatest  advantage  the  machine 
can  offer  in  balancing  any  resistance.  Thus,  in  the  inclined 
plane,  the  static  advantage  is  cos  (6+/)/sin(«—  /),  art  153, 
and  this  becomes  l/(sin  a  —  k  cos  a)  when  P  acts  along 
the  plane,  and  cot  (a  -/)  when  P  acts  horizontally. 

When  it  is  desired  to  do  work,  i.e.  move  against  the  re- 
sistance W,  with  the  aid  of  the  machine,  the  friction  called 
into  play  always  acts  in  opposition  to  the  moving  force  P.  In 
this  case  the  dynamical  advantage  may  be  called  the  kinetic 
advantage  of  the  machine.  It  is  evidently  always  less  than 
the  mechanical  advantage.  Its  value,  like  that  of  the 
static  advantage,  depends  upon  the  friction  called  into  play 
as  well  as  on  the  mechanism  of  the  machine.  In  the  inclined 
plane  the  kinetic  advantage  is  cos  (b  -/)-i-sin  (a+f), 
art.  153,  which  becomes  cot  (a  +f)  when  P  acts  horizon- 
tally, and  l/(sin  a  +  k  cos  a)  when  P  acts  along  the  plane. 

189.  Less  tvork  is  never  done  in  overcoming  any  resist- 
ance through  a  given  distance  with  the  aid  of  a  machine, 
than  would  be  done  in  overcoming  the  resistance  through 
the  same  distance  directly,  i.e.,  without  the  machine. 

Thus,  although  a  man  may  be  able  to  roll  a  heavy  body 
which  he  could  not  lift  up  an  inclined  plane,  yet  the 
amount  of  work  he  does  is  not  less  than  the  work  which 
would  be  done  in  raising  the  heavy  body  vertically  through 


174 

the  height  of  the  plane.  In  .reality  more  work  is  done  with 
the  aid  of  the  machine,  for  some  work  must  always  be  done 
against  friction,  and  this  work  is  entirely  lost.  It  is  a  case 
of  the  dissipation  of  energy  (art.  122). 

If  there  were  not  any  friction,  the  ivork  done  with  the 
aid  of  a  machine  by  the  moving  force  would  be  the  exact 
equivalent  of  the  ivork  done  against  the  resistance. 

This  is  an  immediate  result  of  the  great  law  of  the 
conservation  of  energy  (art.  120),  and  is  generally  known 
as  the  principle  of  ivork.  Thus,  in  sliding  a  body  up  an 
inclined  plane,  P  cos  b=  W  sin  a,  (art.  153,  cor.  1),  there- 
fore PI  cos  b  =  Wl  sin  a;  but  I  cos  b  is  the  distance  through 
which  P  works  in  its  own  direction  in  raising  the  body 
from  the  bottom  to  the  top  of  the  plane,  I  denoting  the 
length  of  the  plane,  and  I  sin  a  is  the  vertical  distance 
through  which  W  \s  overcome;  hence  the  work  done  by  P 
is  equal  to  the  work  done  against  W.  If  P  act  along  the 
plane,  Px  length  of  plane  =  Wx  height,  (art.  153,  cor.  3). 

190.  It  is  evident  that  from  the  principle  of  work  the 
mechanical  advantage  of  a  machine  can  be  determined 
with  great  facility  by  studying  the  kinematics  of  the  ma- 
chine. It  is  not  always  vital  energy  which  is  used  as  the 
motive  power  in  machines.  In  a  steam-engine  e.g.  it  is  the 
potential  energy  of  atomic  separation  of  coal  and  the  oxy- 
gen of  the  air,  which  is  transformed  into  mechanical  work, 
and  if  we  do  not  consume  animal  energy  in  doing  work 
with  a  steam-engine,  we  exhaust  an  equivalent  amount  of 
our  store  of  potential  energy  in  the  form  of  coal. 

The  Lever  and  Fulcrum. 

191.  A  lever  is  a  rigid  rod  moveable  in  one  plane  about 
an  axis  called  the  fulcrum.  The  condition  of  equilibrium 
can  be  deduced  from  art.  168.  When,  as  is  generally  the 
case,  friction  may  be  neglected,  and  the  weight  of  the  lever 
itself  is  balanced  at  the  fulcrum  or  may  be  neglected,  the 
condition  can  be  stated  thus:     The  moment  of  the  balanc- 


175 

ing  or  moving  force  about  the  fulcrum  must  be  equal   and 
unlike  to  the  moment  of  the  resistance. 

Hence  the  mechanical  advantage  of  a  lever  is  measured 
by  the  ratio  of  the  arm  of  the  moving  or  balancing  force 
about  the  fulcrum  to  the  arm  of  the  resistance.  This  can 
be  deduced  easily  from  the  principle  of  work  by  making  a 
small  displacement  about  the  fulcrum.  To  find  the  pres- 
sure on  the  fulcrum,  apply  art.  143  or  159. 

192.  Levers  are  sometimes  divided  into  3  classes;  1) 
those  in  which  the  fulcrum  lies  between  the  places  of  ap- 
plication of  the  balancing  or  moving  force  and  resistance, 
as  a  crow-bar,  a  claw-hammer,  a  common  balance,  or  com- 
mon scissors;  2)  those  in  which  the  place  of  application  of 
the  resistance  lies  between  the  fulcrum  and  place  of  appli- 
cation of  the  balancing  or  moving  force,  as  in  a  wheel- 
barrow, an  oar,  nut-crackers,  or  cork-squeezers;  3)  those  in 
which  the  place  of  application  of  the  moving  force  lies 
between  the  fulcrum  and  the  place  of  application  of  the 
resistance,  as  in  many  parts  of  the  animal  frame- work, 
such  as  the  forearm,  in  the  shells  of  bivalve  molluscs,  and 
some  forms  of  shears.  In  the  first  and  second  classes  the 
mechanical  advantage  will  generally  be  greater  than  unity, 
and  in  the  third  less  than  unity.  The  object  sought  in  the 
third  class  of  levers  is  therefore  not  the  acquisition  of  me- 
chanical power,  but  the  production  of  motion  over  a  con- 
siderable range  by  means  of  motion  through  a  small 
distance. 

Many  very  powerful  combinations  of  levers  are  used  in 
the  mechanical  arts,  such  e.g.  as  may  be  seen  in  the  hand 
printing  presses,  and  the  large  paper  cutting  machines 
used  by  printers  and  bookbinders. 

Wheel  and  Axle. 
193.  A  wheel  and  axle  consists  of  two  cylinders  capable 
of  rotating  about  a  common  axis.     The  larger  cylinder  is 
called  the  wheel,  and  the  smaller  one   the  axle.     To  the 


176 

latter  a  resistance  to  be  worked  against  is  applied  by  means 
of  a  rope  in  tension  or  otherwise,  to  the  former  a  moving 
force  to  overcome  this  resistance.  Familiar  examples  of 
such  machines  are  found  at  wells  to  draw  water  up  in  buck- 
ets, and  in  the  windlass  and  capstan  which  are  commonly 
used  on  board  ship,  the  former  to  raise  merchandise  from 
the  hold,  the  latter  to  weigh  anchor.  In  these  the  wheel 
generally  consists  of  spokes,  at  the  extremities  of  which 
the  moving  force  is  applied.  The  axis  of  the  capstan  is 
vertical,  and  the  applied  forces  horizontal. 

The  mechanical  advantage  can  be  easily  deduced  from 
art.  168,  or  from  the  principle  of  work,  thus:  Let  R  and 
r  denote  the  radii  of  the  wheel  and  axle  respectively;  if 
the  machine  be  rotated  through  any  angle  i,  the  work  done 
by  the  moving  force  P  is  PRi,  and  that  done  against 
the  resistance  W  is  Wri;  since  these  must  be  equal, 
W/P  =  R/r.  The  pressure  on  the  axis  of  rotation  will  be 
the  resultant  of  P  and  IV,  and  the  weight  of  the  machine. 

Toothed  Wheels. 

194.  Toothed  wheels  are  principally  used  to  communi- 
cate motion  from  one  wheel  to  another,  as  e.g.  in  clock- 
work. In  cranes  and  other  machines,  however,  mechanical 
advantage  is  sought  by  their  aid.  We  shall  illustrate 
their  use  in  this  respect  by  rinding  the  mechanical  advan- 
tage of  a  machine  consisting  of  one  wheel  and  axle  driving 
another  wheel  and  axle,  the  axle  of  the  first  and  the  wheel 
of  the  second  having  teeth  which  work  into  one  another. 
Let  P  denote  the  force  acting  on  the  first  wheel,  which 
balances,  without  friction  being  called  into  play,  a  resist- 
ance W  acting  on  the  second  axle.  Let  Q  denote  the 
mutual  pressure  between  the  teeth  in  contact;  this  will  be 
normal  to  the  surfaces  in  contact.  Denote  by  R  and  /  the 
arms  of  P  and  Q  about  the  first  axis,  and  by  V  and  r'  the 
arms  of  Q  and  IF  about  the  second  axis.     Then  (art.  168), 

PR  =  Ql,  QV  =  Wr,  :.  W/P  =  Rl'/lr'. 


177 

If  r  and  R'  denote  the  radii  of  the  first  axle  and  the 
second  wheel,  and  the  teeth  be  small  compared  with  these 
radii,  l/V  =  r/R',  and  therefore  W/P  =  RR/rr',  a  result 
easily  deduced  from  the  principle  of  work,  thus:  Let  the 
first  wheel  and  axle  be  rotated  through  any  angle  i,  then 
the  second  will  be  rotated  through  an  angle  i.  (r/R'), 
and  therefore  PRi  =  Wr'i.  (r/R),  or  W/P  =  RR'lrr'. 

Endless  bands  are  much  used  in  machinery  for  the 
same  purposes  as  toothed  wheels,  when  it  is  inconvenient 
to  bring  the  wheels  close  together,  friction  preventing  the 
bands  from  slipping. 

Pulley  and  Rope. 

195.  A  pulley  is  a  grooved  wheel  which  rotates  about 
an  axis,  fixed  generally  in  a  framework  called  a  block.  A 
stretched  rope  or  cord  passes  around  the  wheel  within  the 
groove.  The  pulley  may  be  used  1)  merely  to  change  the 
direction  of  the  rope,  so  as  to  apply  a  force  in  a  convenient 
direction,  or  2)  to  get  mechanical  advantage.  In  the  first 
case  the  pulley  is  fixed,  in  the  second  it  is  moveable. 

To  understand  more  clearly  what  follows,  the  student 
may  imagine  the  part  of  the  cord,  which  is  in  immediate 
contact  with  the  pulley  at  any  instant,  as  forming  part  of 
the  pulley  to  which  the  forces  are  applied.  Neglecting 
friction,  the  tension  of  the  rope  wound  round  the  pulley 
is  the  same  at  both  sides  (art.  141).  To  balance  these  ten- 
sions, there  must  be  another  force  acting  on  the  pulley 
equal  to  2  T  cos  i,  where  T  denotes  the  tension  of  the  rope, 
and  2  i  the  inclination  of  its  two  branches  as  it  leaves  the 
pulley.  If  1)  the  pulley  be  fixed,  2  T  cos  i  denotes  the 
tension  of  the  beam  which  holds  the  pulley,  necessitated 
by  the  tension  of  the  rope;  if  we  add  to  this  the  weight  of 
the  pulley  and  rope,  we  get  the  total  tension  of  the  beam. 
If  2)  the  pulley  be  moveable,  2  T  cos  i  denotes  the  resist- 
ance which  the  tensions  of  the  rope  balance,  and  this  re- 
sistance includes  the  weight  of  the  pulley  and  rope,  which, 
however,  are  often  neglected. 


178 

Cor.  If  the  two  branches  of  the  rope  be  parallel  in  a 
moveable  pulley,  and  W denote  the  resistance,  W=2  T,  a 
result  easily  arrived  at  from  the  principle  of  work. 

196.  Pulleys  in  various  combinations  are  commonly  used 
in  practice  to  lift  bodies  against  their  weights.  The  stud- 
ent will  find  the  above  results  sufficient  to  enable  him  to 
determine  the  mechanical  advantage,  as  well  as  the  tension 
of  the  supporting  beam,  in  any  combination  whatsoever. 
In  any  system  of  pulleys  the  kinetic  advantage  is  consider- 
ably less  than  the  mechanical  on  account  of  the  friction 
called  into  play,  arising  principally  from  the  rigidity  or 
imperfect  flexibility  of  the  ropes. 

Double  Axle  and  Pulley. 

197.  A  combination,  in  which  the  mechanical  advantage 
can  be  made  as  great  as  required  with  great  facility,  is 
known  as  the  differential  axle  or  Chinese  wheel.  It  con- 
sists of  two  cylinders  having  a  common  axis:  round  the 
larger  cylinder  a  rope  is  wound  a  few  times,  then  passed 
under  a  moveable  pulley,  and  thereafter  round  the  smaller 
cylinder.  The  direction  of  coiling  the  rope  on  the  latter 
is  opposite  to  that  on  the  former,  so  that  as  the  rope  is 
wound  on  to  the  larger  cylinder  it  is  wound  off  the  smaller. 
The  moving  force  is  generally  applied  by  means  of  a  winch 
which  rotates  on  the  same  axis  as  the  double  axle,  and  the 
resistance  acts  on  the  block  of  the  pulley.  Let  a  denote 
the  arm  of  the  moving  force  applied  to  the  winch,  b  and 
c  the  radii  of  the  larger  and  smaller  cylinders  respectively. 
If  the  two  lines  of  rope  passing  round  the  pulley  be  paral- 
lel, then  for  one  complete  turn  we  get  by  the  principle  of 
work,  P.27ia=  IV.n(b-c),  and  therefore  W/P  =  2a/(b  - c). 

Hence,  by  making  the  difference  between  b  and  c  small 
enough,  the  mechanical  advantage  can  be  made  as  great 
as  required  without  sacrificing  the  strength  of  the  machine 
or  making  it  unduly  bulky. 


179 

Screw  and  Nut. 

198.  A  screw  may  be  described  as  a  right  circular  cylin- 
drical bolt,  on  the  surface  of  which  runs  a  uniform  pro- 
jecting thread,  which  makes  a  constant  angle  with  the 
base.  The  nut  of  a  screw  is  a  hollow  cylinder  in  which  is 
cut  a  spiral  groove,  the  exact  counterpart  of  the  thread  of 
the  screw. 

When  the  screw  enters  its  nut,  it  is  evident  that  they 
can  only  move  relatively  to  one  another  by  one  of  them  ro- 
tating, and  then  there  is  sliding  motion  parallel  to  the  axis 
of  the  cylinder,  proportional  in  amount  to  the  angle  of  ro- 
tation. Either  the  screw  or  nut  can  both  slide  and  rotate, 
or  one  can  rotate  and  the  other  slide.  Generally  the  nut 
is  fixed,  as  in  a  book-press,  or  the  screw  only  rotates  and 
the  nut  slides,  as  in  a  dividing  engine. 

The  distance,  measured  parallel  to  the  axis,  between 
two  adjacent  coils,  is  called  the  pitch  of  the  screw.  It  is 
evident  that  for  every  complete  rotation  the  sliding  motion 
is  equal  to  the  pitch  of  the  screw.  The  inclination  of  the 
thread  to  the  base  of  the  cylinder  is  called  the  angle  of  the 

screw. 

The  principal  uses  of  a  screw  and  nut  are  1)  to  measure 
small  distances,  as  in  a  dividing  engine  or  micrometer;  and 
2)  to  exert  great  pressure  in  the  direction  of  the  axis,  as  in 
a  book-press.  For  the  first  of  these  uses,  the  head  of  the 
screw  is  provided  with  a  carefully  divided  circle  to  enable 
the  experimenter  to  measure  any  small  rotation;  for  the 
second,  the  moving  force  is  generally  applied  to  a  rigid  bar 
fixed  into  the  head  of  the  screw,  and  acts  at  right  angles 
to  the  axis.  If  a  denote  the  arm  of  the  moving  force  and 
p  the  pitch  of  the  screw,  it  is  evident  that  the  mechanical 
advantage  is  measured  by  ^Inajp.  ' 

Screw  and  Toothed   Wheel. 

199.  In  this  machine  a  toothed  wheel  takes  the  place 
of  a  screw's  nut.     The  thread  of  a  short  screw  fits  into  the 


180 

spaces  between  the  teeth  of  a  wheel  (or.  the  teeth  of  the 
wheel  fit  into  the  groove  between  the  coils  of  the  screw). 
The  axis  of  the  screw  is  fixed,  and  so  long  as  the  screw  is 
turned,  the  wheel  is  made  to  rotate  about  its  own  axis. 
Hence  the  machine  is  generally  called  the  endless  screw. 
The  wheel  generally  forms  part  of  a  wheel  and  axle,  and 
to  the  axle  the  resistance  is  applied.  The  moving  force  is 
applied  by  means  of  a  crank  or  winch  fitted  on  to  the  axis 
of  the  screw.  The  mechanical  advantage  is  evidently 
measured  by  the  product  of  the  numbers,  which  measure 
the  mechanical  advantages  of  the  screw,  and  wheel  and 
axle  respectively. 

The  Wedge, 

200.  The  wedge  may  be  described  as  a  rigid  right  tri- 
angular prism  having  two  of  its  faces  inclined  generally  at 
a  very  acute  angle.  The  line  in  which  those  faces  meet  is 
called  the  edge  of  the  wedge,  and  their  inclination  the 
angle  of  the  wedge.  The  face  opposite  the  edge  is  called 
the  head  of  the  wedge.  The  wedge  is  practically  used  to 
separate  two  bodies,  as  in  lifting  a  heavy  body  through  a 
small  distance  against  its  weight,  or  to  divide  a  body  into 
two  parts  against  molecular  force,  as  in  splitting  wood. 
Friction  plays  an  important  part  in  the  practical  use  of 
the  wedge.  The  moving  force  is  frequently  impulsive,  as 
when  the  wedge  is  driven  by  the  sharp  blows  of  a  hammer. 
Axes,  knives,  and  chisels  are  different  forms  of  the  wedge, 
which  may  be  considered  a  double  inclined  plane,  and  as 
the  angle  between  the  two  faces  is  very  small  the  mechan- 
ical advantage  is  very  great. 

In  the  above  machines  there  are  in  reality  only  three 
primary  principles,  viz.,  the  principles  of  the  inclined 
plane,  the  lever,  and  the  moveable  pulley.  The  wheel  and 
axle  and  toothed  wheels  are  just  special  levers,  whilst  the 
screw  and  nut  and  the  wedge  are  special  forms  of  the  in- 
clined plane. 


181 

Examination  XXI. 

1.  Define  the  mechanical,  static,  and  kinetic  advan- 
tages of  a  machine,  and  find  those  of  an  inclined  plant', 
when  a  body  is  slid  up  the  plane. 

2.  Enunciate  the  principle  of  work  and  apply  it  to  find 
the  mechanical  advantages  of  the  lever,  Chinese  wheel, 
and  endless  screw. 

3.  Give  examples  of  the  different  classes  of  levers,  and 
state  the  object  of  each  class. 

4.  What  is  the  effect  of  changing  the  direction  of  P  or  of 
W  in  a  wheel  and  axle?  Is  the  mechanical  advantage 
thereby  changed? 

5.  In  the  first  system  of  pulleys  each  pulley  is  sup- 
ported by  a  separate  rope,  one  end  of  which  is  fixed  to  the 
beam,  and  the  other  to  the  block  of  the  pulley  above.  If 
the  lines  of  rope  be  all  parallel,  and  the  free  end  of  the 
rope  of  the  highest  moveable  pulley  pass  over  a  fixed 
pulley,  find  the  mechanical  advantage,  1)  when  the  weights 
may  be  neglected,  2)  when  the  weight  of  each  pulley  is  w. 
Find  also  the  tension  of  the  supporting  beam. 

6.  In  the  second  system  of  pulleys  there  are  two  blocks, 
one  fixed  and  the  other  moveable;  each  block  contains  a 
number  of  pulleys,  and  the  same  rope  passes  round  all  the 
pulleys,  the  lines  of  rope  being  parallel  or  very  nearly  so; 
find  the  mechanical  advantage,  1)  when  the  weight  of  the 
lower  block  and  pulleys  may  be  neglected,  2)  when  the 
weight  of  the  lower  block  and  pulleys  is  w.  Find  also  the 
tension  of  the  beam  supporting  the  upper  block. 

7.  The  third  system  of  pulleys  is  just  the  first  system 
reversed,  the  beam  and  resistance  changing  places;  find  in 
it  the  mechanical  advantage  and  tension  of  the  beam,  1) 
when  the  weights  of  the  pulleys  are  insignificant,  2)  when 
the  weight  of  each  pulley  is  w. 

8.  When  will  the  static  and  kinetic  advantages  of  an 
inclined  plane  be  maxima  for  given  values  of  a  and  fe? 


182 

Exercise  XXI. 

1.  Prove  that  the  efficiency  of  a  machine  (art.  122)  is 
measured  by  the  ratio  of  the  kinetic  advantage  to  the 
mechanical  advantage,  and  hence  find  the  efficiency  of  an 
inclined  plane. 

2.  Shew  how  to  graduate  a  common  steelyard.  What 
change  is  produced  on  the  graduations  by  increasing  1) 
the  moveable  counterpoise,  2)  the  density  of  the  rod. 

3.  If  a  counterpoise  of  one  pound  be  used  in  a  steelyard 
which  was  graduated  for  a  counterpoise  of  one  kilogram, 
shew  that  the  merchant  will  defraud  himself,  or  defraud 
his  customers,  or  deal  justly,  according  as  the  centre  of 
weight  of  the  steelyard  is  in  the  longer  arm,  in  the  shorter 
arm,  or  just  below  the  point  of  suspension. 

4.  A  lever  of  insignificant  weight  is  a  metre  long;  a 
body  of  10  kilograms  is  supported  by  two  strings,  6  and  8 
decimetres  long  respectively,  attached  to  its  extremities;  if 
the  lever  be  in  equilibrium  when  horizontal,  shew  that  the 
fulcrum  divides  it  into  two  parts  in  the  ratio  of  9  to  16. 
What  is  the  pressure  on  the  fulcrum? 

5.  In  the  Danish  steelyard  the  beam  is  heavy  at  one 
end  and  the  fulcrum  moveable;  the  masses  to  be  measured 
are  suspended  at  the  light  end;  shew  that  the  distances  of 
the  graduations  from  the  light  end  form  an  harmonical 
progression. 

6.  Under  what  condition  may  there  be  no  mechanical 
advantage  in  the  first  system  of  pulleys,  w  being  the  weight 
of  each  pulley?  Find  the  force  required  just  to  balance 
the  weights  of  the  pulleys. 

7  The  mass  of  a  uniform  straight  lever,  which  turns 
about  a  fulcrum  at  one  end,  is  6  lbs.;  in  what  direction 
must  a  force  of  5  lbs.-wt.  be  applied  at  the  other  end,  so  as 
to  keep  the  lever  at  rest  in  a  horizontal  position  ?  What 
will  be  the  pressure  of  the  fulcrum  ? 


183 

8.  Sixteen  sailors,  each  exerting  a  force  of  30  lbs.-wt., 
push  a  capstan,  each  with  a  length  of  lever  equal  to  8  ft.; 
calculate  the  weight  they  are  capable  of  sustaining,  the 
radius  of  the  cylinder  of  the  capstan  being  1  ft.  4  in. 

9.  A  body  of  100  kilograms  is  kept  from  sliding  down 
an  inclined  plane  of  inclination  \ti,  by  a  string  in  tension 
parallel  to  the  plane  ;  the  string  passes  round  an  axle  of 
diameter  3  decimetres;  find  what  body  must  hang  from  a 
wheel,  of  diameter  1  metre,  having  a  common  axis  with 
the  axle,  in  order  to  keep  the  100  kilograms  at  rest  without 
friction  being  called  into  play. 

10.  One  body  is  suspended  from  a  single  moveable 
pulley,  and  is  supported  by  another  body  hanging  freely 
over  a  fixed  pulley,  the  three  lines  of  rope  being  parallel; 
prove  that,  whatever  be  the  vertical  height  of  each  body, 
the  height  of  their  centre  of  weight  is  constant. 

11.  A  man  stands  in  a  scale  attached  to  a  moveable 
pulley;  the  free  end  of  a  rope  passes  over  a  fixed  pulley; 
find  with  what  force  the  man  must  hold  the  free  end,  in 
order  to  support  himself,  the  lines  of  rope  being  parallel. 

12.  One  tonne  is  to  be  raised  by  means  of  a  third  sys- 
tem of  6  pulleys;  if  the  mass  of  each  pulley  be  a  kilogram, 
find  the  mechanical  advantage,  the  tension  of  each  rope 
in  kilograms-weight,  and  the  tension  of  the  beam. 


Answers. 

1.   |  Cos  (b  -/)  sin  a\  +  j  cos  b  sin  (a+f)  \ .        2.  The  zero 
is  moved  1)  nearer  to,  2)  further  from  the  fulcrum. 
4.     10  kilograms-wt.         6.      W=w\  w  -w/2n. 

7.  sin-1  f-  to  the  horizontal;  5  lbs.-wt. 

8.  2880   lbs.-wt.         9.     15  kilogrs.         11.     One-third 

of  the  weight  of  the  man,  scale,  and  pulley. 
12.     668;  15,  31,  63,  127,  254,  510;  1021. 


Miscellaneous  Examples. 
l.Jlt  requires  a  grams-wt.  to  sink  Nicholson's  hydro- 
meter by  itself  to  the  mark  on  the  stem,  b  grams-wt.  when 
a  piece  of  amber  is  placed  in  the  upper  pan.  and  c  grams-wt. 
when  the  amber  is  placed  in  the  lower  pan;  find  the  s.w. 
of  amber. 

2.  /A  man  whose  mass  is  68  kilograms  can  just  float  in 
fresh  water;  find  the  greatest  quantity  of  gold  (s.w.  19'3) 
he  could  keep  from  sinking,  when  floating  in  the  sea 
(s.w.  1-027). 

3.  If  in  Ex.  XIII,  13,  the  balls  be  painted  alike  so  that 
the  frictional  resistance  /  between  the  water  and  each  ball 
be  the  same,  will  the  resistance  increase  or  diminish  the 
tension  of  the  cord?     By  how  much'? 

4.  Two  bodies  of  4  and  5  kilograms  together  pull  one 
of  6  kilograms  over  a  smooth  peg  by  means  of  a  connecting 
string;  after  descending  through  10  metres,  the  5  kilo- 
grams mass  is  detached  without  interrupting  the  motion; 
find  through  what  distance,  and  for  what  time,  the  remain- 
ing 4  kilograms  will  continue  to  descend. 

5.  To  a  person  travelling  eastwards  with  a  speed  of  4 
miles  per  hour  the  wind  appears  to  be  north;  on  doubling 
his  speed,  it  appears  to  be  N.E.;  find  the  velocity  of  the 
wind. 

6.  A  body  of  6  lbs.  hanging  vertically  is  connected  by 
an  inextensible  string  with  a  body  of  4  lbs.  which  is  drawn 
up  a  plane  inclined  to  the  horizontal  at  \n  radians;  find 
the  motion  of  the  c.  of  m.,  k= \. 

7.  The  hole  in  a  boiler  for  the  safety  valve  is  a  circle  of 
g  in.  diameter.  The  centre  of  the  valve  is  If  in,  from  the 
fulcrum  of  a  lever  which  keeps  it  closed;  find  where  a 
weight  of  7  lbs.  must  be  hung  to  the  lever  so  that  the  valve 
may  not  rise  till  the  pressure  of  the  steam  is  3  atmospheres. 
Take  7i  =  ^-  and  1  atmosphere  — 147  lbs.-wt.  per  sq.  in. 


185 

8.  In  a  Bramah  press  the  diameters  of  the  pistons  are 
2  and  f  inch.  The  smaller  piston  is  also  the  piston  of  a 
pump  which  supplies  the  liquid  to  the  press.  The  arms  of 
a  lever  which  moves  this  piston  are  2j  and  11^  inches:  find 
the  mechanical  advantage  of  the  machine. 

9.  A  ship  is  sailing  eastwards,  and  it  is  known  that  the 
wind  is  N.W.;  the  apparent  direction  of  the  wind,  as 
shown  by  a  vane  on  the  mast  head,  is  N.  N.E.;  shew  that 
the  speed  of  the  ship  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  wind. 

10.  A  ship  sailing  eastwards  with  a  speed  of  15  miles 
per  hour  passes  a  light-house  at  noon;  a  second  ship  sail- 
ing northwards  with  the  same  speed  passes  the  light-house 
at  1.30  p.m.  When  were  the  ships  nearest  to  one  another, 
and  what  was  their  distance  apart  then? 

11.  ABCD  is  a  parallelogram;  forces  represented  in 
magnitude  and  line  of  action  by  AB,  BC,  and  CD  act 
upon  a  body;  find  the  resultant. 

12.  A  man's  mass  is  140  lbs.,  and  he  supports  an  Eng- 
lish ton- weight  (2,240  lbs.)  by  means  of  4  moveable  pulleys 
fixed  as  in  the  first  system;  find  his  pressure  on  the 
floor  on  which  he  stands,  1)  when  he  pulls  the  free  end  of 
the  rope  upwards,  2)  when  the  rope  passes  over  a  fixed 
pulley,  and  he  pulls  downwards. 

13.  The  capacity  of  the  receiver  of  an  air-pump  is  20 
times  that  of  the  barrel;  a  piece  of  bladder  is  placed  over 
a  hole  in  the  top  of  it:  the  bladder  is  able  to  bear  a  pres- 
sure of  3  lbs.-wt.  per  sq.  in. ;  how  many  strokes  of  the  pump 
will  burst  the  bladder? 

,14.  A  body  floats  in  water  with  |  of  its  volume  above 
the  surface;  the  whole  is  put  under  the  receiver  of  an  air- 
pump,  and  the  air  extracted;  find  the  alteration  in  the 
volume  immersed. 

15.  How  much  cork  (s.  w.  \)  is  required  to  float  a  man 
of  152  lbs.  in  sea-water,  his  mean  s.w.  being  l'l? 


186 

16.  Find  the  lines  of  quickest  descent  between  a  point 
and  a  line,  and  shew  that  they  are  at  right  angles  to  one 
another. 

17.  An  endless  cord  hangs  over  two  smooth  pegs  in  the 
same  horizontal  line,  and  a  heavy  body  is  supported  on 
each  festoon;  if  the  one  body  be  twice  as  heavy  as  the 
other,  shew  that  the  angle  between  the  lines  of  the  upper 
festoon  must  be  greater  than  \n  and  less  than  it. 

18.  A  body  floats  in  a  liquid  two-thirds  immersed,  and 
it  requires  a  pressure  equivalent  to  two  lbs.-wt.  just  to  im- 
merse it  totally;  what  is  the  mass  of  the  body? 

19.  Oxygen  at  0:  and  76  cm.  pressure  has  density  1"1056 
with  respect  to  air;  find  its  density  at  100  and  70  cm., 
1)  with  respect  to  air  at  0  and  76  cm.,  2)  with  respect  to 
air  at  100    and  70  cm. 

20.  The  mass  of  a  specific  gravity  bottle  is  20"5  when 
empty,  70"5  when  filled  with  water,  63  when  filled  with 
turpentine;  when  10  grams  of  salt  are  put  into  it,  and  it  is 
thereafter  filled  up  with  turpentine,  the  mass  is  69-6;  find 
the  s.w.  of  the  turpentine,  and  of  the  salt  to  an  approxi- 
mation of  the  first  degree. 

21.  A  sunken  vessel,  whose  bulk  is  half  a  megalitre  and 
mass  10°  kilograms,  is  to  be  raised  by  attaching  water- 
tight barrels  to  it.  If  the  mass  of  each  barrel  be  30  kilo- 
grams, and  the  volume  a  kilolitre,  find  how  many  will  be 
required. 

22.  Find  the  height  of  the  water  barometer -under  the 
mean  atmospheric  pressure,  when  the  temperature  is  15  C. 
the  s.w.  of  water  at  15c  being  0999125  according  to 
Despretz. 

23.  One  end  of  a  string  is  fastened  to  a  body  of  10  kilo- 
grams; the  string  passes  over  a  fixed  pulley,  then  under  a 
movable  pulley,  and  has  its  other  end  attached  to  a  fixed 
hook;  a  body  of  7|  kilograms  is  attached  to  the  movable 
pulley,  whose  mass  is  250  grams;  if  the  three  parts  of  the 


187 

string  be  parallel,  and  friction  and  the  masses  of  the  string 
and  pulleys  may  be  neglected,  find  the  accelerations  of  the 
bodies  and  the  tension  of  the  string. 

24.  A  body  of  100  kilograms  pulls  by  its  weight  200 
kilograms  along  a  rough  horizontal  plane;  if  the  coefficient 
of  friction  be  02,  find  the  speed  after  moving  through  a 
hectometre,  and  the  acceleration  of  the  c.  of  m. 

25.  A  stream  is  a  feet  broad,  b  feet  deep,  and  flows  at 
the  rate  of  c  feet  per  hour;  there  is  a  fall  of  d  feet;  the 
water  turns  a  machine  of  which  the  efficiency  is  e;  it  re- 
quires /foot-pounds  per  minute  for  1  hour  to  grind  a 
bushel  of  corn;  determine  how  much  corn  the  machine 
will  grind  in  1  hour. 

26.  Find  what  must  be  the  area  of  a  cake  of  ice  18 
inches  thick,  sufficient  to  bear  the  aggregate  weight  of 
three  school  boys  whose  aggregate  mass  is  280  lbs.;  1)  in 
fresh  water,  2)  in  sea-water. 

27.  Three  bodies  P,  Q,  R,  of  masses  30, 15, 10  kilograms 
respectively,  are  connected  by  strings  AB  and  BC,  whose 
lengths  are  5  m.  and  70  cm.  Q,  R,  BC,  and  half  of  AB  lie 
on  the  edge  of  a  table  vertically  under  a  peg,  over  which 
the  other  half  of  AB  is  placed  holding  P.  If  P  be  now 
allowed  to  fall  freely,  find  the  motions  of  P,  Q,  and  R.  the 
tensions  of  the  strings  after  both  become  stretched,  and 
the  measures  of  the  impulsive  tensions  which  set  Q  and  R 
in  motion.  Friction  and  the  masses  of  the  strings  may  be 
neglected,  and  #  =  980. 

28.  A  string  which  passes  over  two  pegs  in  a  horizontal 
line  supports  a  heavy  ring  from  falling;  prove  that  the 
string  cannot  be  drawn  so  tight  as  to  be  horizontal. 

2(J.  A,  B,  C,  and  D  are  any  four  points  whatsoever;  find 
a  point  O  such  that  forces  represented  by  OA,  OB,  OC, 
and  OD  are  in  equilibrium.  Hence  shew  from  dynamical 
considerations  that  the  lines  joining  the  middle  points  of 
AB  and  CD.  of  AC  and  BD,  and  of  AD  and  BC  bisect 
one  another. 


188 

30.  A  cubical  box  is  all  but  1/wth  part  filled  with  water, 
and  is  placed  on  a  rough  rectangular  board  so  as  to  have 
the  edges  of  the  base  parallel  to  those  of  the  rectangle;  de- 
termine in  what  order  spilling,  sliding,  and  toppling  over 
will  take  place,  when  the  board  is  gradually  inclined  to 
the  horizon  about  an  edge. 

31.  Find  the  least  volume  of  a  balloon  filled  with  hy- 
drogen that  it  may  rise  from  the  earth  when  the  mass  of 
the  solid  parts  of  the  balloon  and  the  contents  of  the  car 
is  altogether  250  kilograms. 

32.  The  height  of  mount  Fuji  in  Japan  was  found  by 
means  of  an  omnimeter  to  be  12365  feet;  the  reduced 
reading  of  the  barometer  on  the  summit  was  found  to  be 
48  cm.  when  the  temperature  was  0°;  shew  that  the  height 
of  the  atmosphere  is  at  least  7 '3  miles  high. 


Answers. 

1.     (&-b)/(c-b).  2.     1939-2.  3.     Increase  by  £/ 

very  nearly.  4.     10  m.,  102  sec.  5.     4  j/2 

miles  per  hr.,  N.W.         6.     (11  -  4  y3)  v  (13  -  6  t/3)# 

-^100  in  direction  -tan-1  (3-  yS)  to  the  horizon. 

7.     266  inches  from  the  fulcrum.  8.     80. 

10.     12.45  p.m.;  159  miles.  12.     1)  280  lbs.-wt.,  2)  0. 

13.     47.  14.     An  increase  of  3-233/103  of  the  volume. 

15.     325.  18.     4.  19.     07453,  11056. 

20.    085,  2-5.  21.     516.         22.     10169. 

23.     4  g,  \  g,  5  kilogrs.-wt.  24.     1980"4;  T\  g  \  5  at 

-  tan  -1 1  to  the  horizontal.         25.     624  abode /60  f. 

26.     37-4,  28.  27.     Q  starts  with  speed  1400/3,  R  with 

420;  27T3T  and  Vd\\  kilograms-wt.;  Q,  AB  7  mega- 
gramtachs;  E,  AB  28  and  BC  42  megagramtachs. 

29.  The  middle  point  of  EF.  E  and  F  being  the  middle 
points  ot  AB  and  CD.  30.     It  spills   when 

tan  a  —  2/n  or  n/(2n-2),  slides  when  «=/,  and 
topples  over  when  a  —  \7z.  31.     207,710  litres. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


QA.      Marshall,  D 

845        Introduction  to  the  science 

M35     of  Dynamics 


1